docs: use Returns: consistently

Instead of Return value:

219 files changed, 1612 insertions, 1612 deletions

diff --git a/gdk/gdk.c b/gdk/gdk.c
index 98144c6d8e..99ad1266d0 100644
--- a/gdk/gdk.c
+++ b/gdk/gdk.c
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ gdk_get_display_arg_name (void)
  * display has previously been set, simply returns that. An internal
  * function that should not be used by applications.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the default display, if it could be
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the default display, if it could be
  *   opened, otherwise %NULL.
  **/
 GdkDisplay *
@@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ gdk_threads_dispatch_free (gpointer data)
  * }
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
+ * Returns: the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -736,7 +736,7 @@ gdk_threads_add_idle_full (gint           priority,
  *
  * See gdk_threads_add_idle_full().
  *
- * Return value: the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
+ * Returns: the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
  * 
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -803,7 +803,7 @@ gdk_threads_add_idle (GSourceFunc    function,
  * }
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
+ * Returns: the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
  * 
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -842,7 +842,7 @@ gdk_threads_add_timeout_full (gint           priority,
  *
  * See gdk_threads_add_timeout_full().
  * 
- * Return value: the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
+ * Returns: the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -869,7 +869,7 @@ gdk_threads_add_timeout (guint       interval,
  * See g_timeout_add_seconds_full() for a discussion of why it is
  * a good idea to use this function if you don’t need finer granularity.
  *
- * Return value: the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
+ * Returns: the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
  * 
  * Since: 2.14
  */
@@ -907,7 +907,7 @@ gdk_threads_add_timeout_seconds_full (gint           priority,
  *
  * For details, see gdk_threads_add_timeout_full().
  * 
- * Return value: the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
+ * Returns: the ID (greater than 0) of the event source.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
diff --git a/gdk/gdkcolor.c b/gdk/gdkcolor.c
index c121593869..92c88f5d6c 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkcolor.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkcolor.c
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
  *
  * The result must be freed using gdk_color_free().
  *
- * Return value: a copy of @color
+ * Returns: a copy of @color
  */
 GdkColor*
 gdk_color_copy (const GdkColor *color)
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ gdk_color_free (GdkColor *color)
  * A hash function suitable for using for a hash
  * table that stores #GdkColors.
  *
- * Return value: The hash function applied to @color
+ * Returns: The hash function applied to @color
  */
 guint
 gdk_color_hash (const GdkColor *color)
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ gdk_color_hash (const GdkColor *color)
  *
  * Compares two colors.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the two colors compare equal
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the two colors compare equal
  */
 gboolean
 gdk_color_equal (const GdkColor *colora,
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ G_DEFINE_BOXED_TYPE (GdkColor, gdk_color,
  * (White in the four forms is “\#fff”, “\#ffffff”, “\#fffffffff”
  * and “\#ffffffffffff”).
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the parsing succeeded
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the parsing succeeded
  */
 gboolean
 gdk_color_parse (const gchar *spec,
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ gdk_color_parse (const gchar *spec,
  *
  * The returned string can be parsed by gdk_color_parse().
  *
- * Return value: a newly-allocated text string
+ * Returns: a newly-allocated text string
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
diff --git a/gdk/gdkcursor.c b/gdk/gdkcursor.c
index 2157bcf2db..914d2fbec4 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkcursor.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkcursor.c
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ gdk_cursor_init (GdkCursor *cursor)
  *
  * Adds a reference to @cursor.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): Same @cursor that was passed in
+ * Returns: (transfer full): Same @cursor that was passed in
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use g_object_ref() instead
  */
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ gdk_cursor_unref (GdkCursor *cursor)
  *
  * To make the cursor invisible, use %GDK_BLANK_CURSOR.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GdkCursor
+ * Returns: a new #GdkCursor
  */
 GdkCursor*
 gdk_cursor_new (GdkCursorType cursor_type)
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ gdk_cursor_new (GdkCursorType cursor_type)
  *
  * Returns the cursor type for this cursor.
  *
- * Return value: a #GdkCursorType
+ * Returns: a #GdkCursorType
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  **/
@@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ gdk_cursor_get_cursor_type (GdkCursor *cursor)
  * - ![](sb_v_double_arrow.png) #GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW (move horizontal splitter)
  * - #GDK_BLANK_CURSOR (Blank cursor). Since 2.16
  *
- * Return value: a new #GdkCursor
+ * Returns: a new #GdkCursor
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
diff --git a/gdk/gdkdeprecated.c b/gdk/gdkdeprecated.c
index 56a9ddc654..02a40fb266 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkdeprecated.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkdeprecated.c
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ gdk_pointer_ungrab (guint32 time)
  * Note that this does not take the inmplicit pointer grab on button
  * presses into account.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the pointer is currently grabbed by this application.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the pointer is currently grabbed by this application.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use gdk_display_device_is_grabbed() instead.
  **/
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ gdk_keyboard_ungrab (guint32 time)
  * NOTE: For multihead-aware widgets or applications use
  * gdk_display_get_window_at_pointer() instead.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): window under the mouse pointer
+ * Returns: (transfer none): window under the mouse pointer
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use gdk_device_get_window_at_position() instead.
  **/
diff --git a/gdk/gdkdevice.c b/gdk/gdkdevice.c
index 653a0aa2f9..9508a7be13 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkdevice.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkdevice.c
@@ -597,7 +597,7 @@ gdk_device_get_window_at_position (GdkDevice  *device,
  * more motion events delivered directly, independent of the windowing
  * system.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the windowing system supports motion history and
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the windowing system supports motion history and
  *  at least one event was found.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ gdk_device_free_history (GdkTimeCoord **events,
  *
  * Determines the name of the device.
  *
- * Return value: a name
+ * Returns: a name
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
@@ -685,7 +685,7 @@ gdk_device_get_name (GdkDevice *device)
  *
  * Determines whether the pointer follows device motion.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the pointer follows device motion
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the pointer follows device motion
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
@@ -704,7 +704,7 @@ gdk_device_get_has_cursor (GdkDevice *device)
  *
  * Determines the type of the device.
  *
- * Return value: a #GdkInputSource
+ * Returns: a #GdkInputSource
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
@@ -722,7 +722,7 @@ gdk_device_get_source (GdkDevice *device)
  *
  * Determines the mode of the device.
  *
- * Return value: a #GdkInputSource
+ * Returns: a #GdkInputSource
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
@@ -1169,7 +1169,7 @@ gdk_device_get_axis_value (GdkDevice *device,
  * Interprets an array of double as axis values for a given device,
  * and locates the value in the array for a given axis use.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the given axis use was found, otherwise %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the given axis use was found, otherwise %FALSE
  **/
 gboolean
 gdk_device_get_axis (GdkDevice  *device,
diff --git a/gdk/gdkdisplay.c b/gdk/gdkdisplay.c
index 6896197f9d..37ac390a2d 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkdisplay.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkdisplay.c
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ gdk_display_is_closed  (GdkDisplay  *display)
  * Gets the next #GdkEvent to be processed for @display, fetching events from the
  * windowing system if necessary.
  * 
- * Return value: the next #GdkEvent to be processed, or %NULL if no events
+ * Returns: the next #GdkEvent to be processed, or %NULL if no events
  * are pending. The returned #GdkEvent should be freed with gdk_event_free().
  *
  * Since: 2.2
@@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ gdk_display_get_event (GdkDisplay *display)
  * not get more events from the windowing system.  It only checks the events
  * that have already been moved to the GDK event queue.)
  * 
- * Return value: a copy of the first #GdkEvent on the event queue, or %NULL 
+ * Returns: a copy of the first #GdkEvent on the event queue, or %NULL 
  * if no events are in the queue. The returned #GdkEvent should be freed with
  * gdk_event_free().
  *
@@ -1288,7 +1288,7 @@ _gdk_display_pointer_info_foreach (GdkDisplay                   *display,
  * Determines information about the current keyboard grab.
  * This is not public API and must not be used by applications.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if this application currently has the
+ * Returns: %TRUE if this application currently has the
  *  keyboard grabbed.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -1553,7 +1553,7 @@ gdk_display_flush (GdkDisplay *display)
  * on @display. This window is implicitly created by GDK.
  * See gdk_window_set_group().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The default group leader window
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The default group leader window
  * for @display
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1573,7 +1573,7 @@ gdk_display_get_default_group (GdkDisplay *display)
  * Returns whether #GdkEventOwnerChange events will be
  * sent when the owner of a selection changes.
  *
- * Return value: whether #GdkEventOwnerChange events will
+ * Returns: whether #GdkEventOwnerChange events will
  *               be sent.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
@@ -1595,7 +1595,7 @@ gdk_display_supports_selection_notification (GdkDisplay *display)
  * Request #GdkEventOwnerChange events for ownership changes
  * of the selection named by the given atom.
  *
- * Return value: whether #GdkEventOwnerChange events will
+ * Returns: whether #GdkEventOwnerChange events will
  *               be sent.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
@@ -1727,7 +1727,7 @@ gdk_display_supports_composite (GdkDisplay *display)
  * Returns the list of available input devices attached to @display.
  * The list is statically allocated and should not be freed.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none) (element-type GdkDevice):
+ * Returns: (transfer none) (element-type GdkDevice):
  *     a list of #GdkDevice
  *
  * Since: 2.2
@@ -1780,7 +1780,7 @@ gdk_display_get_app_launch_context (GdkDisplay *display)
  *
  * Opens a display.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GdkDisplay, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GdkDisplay, or %NULL
  *     if the display could not be opened
  *
  * Since: 2.2
@@ -2069,7 +2069,7 @@ _gdk_display_create_window (GdkDisplay *display)
  *
  * Returns the #GdkKeymap attached to @display.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkKeymap attached to @display.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GdkKeymap attached to @display.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  */
@@ -2215,7 +2215,7 @@ gdk_error_trap_pop_ignored (void)
  * sync for you, so you had to gdk_flush() if your last
  * call to Xlib was not a blocking round trip.
  *
- * Return value: X error code or 0 on success
+ * Returns: X error code or 0 on success
  */
 gint
 gdk_error_trap_pop (void)
diff --git a/gdk/gdkdisplaymanager.c b/gdk/gdkdisplaymanager.c
index 6b28b0a276..6163006a2c 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkdisplaymanager.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkdisplaymanager.c
@@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ gdk_display_manager_set_default_display (GdkDisplayManager *manager,
  *
  * List all currently open displays.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer container) (element-type GdkDisplay): a newly
+ * Returns: (transfer container) (element-type GdkDisplay): a newly
  *     allocated #GSList of #GdkDisplay objects. Free with g_slist_free()
  *     when you are done with it.
  *
@@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ gdk_display_manager_list_displays (GdkDisplayManager *manager)
  *
  * Opens a display.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GdkDisplay, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GdkDisplay, or %NULL
  *     if the display could not be opened
  *
  * Since: 3.0
diff --git a/gdk/gdkdnd.c b/gdk/gdkdnd.c
index 0a7636dab8..d57c8f7285 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkdnd.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkdnd.c
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
  *
  * Retrieves the list of targets of the context.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none) (element-type GdkAtom): a #GList of targets
+ * Returns: (transfer none) (element-type GdkAtom): a #GList of targets
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  **/
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ gdk_drag_context_list_targets (GdkDragContext *context)
  * Determines the bitmask of actions proposed by the source if
  * gdk_drag_context_get_suggested_action() returns GDK_ACTION_ASK.
  *
- * Return value: the #GdkDragAction flags
+ * Returns: the #GdkDragAction flags
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  **/
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ gdk_drag_context_get_actions (GdkDragContext *context)
  *
  * Determines the suggested drag action of the context.
  *
- * Return value: a #GdkDragAction value
+ * Returns: a #GdkDragAction value
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  **/
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ gdk_drag_context_get_suggested_action (GdkDragContext *context)
  *
  * Determines the action chosen by the drag destination.
  *
- * Return value: a #GdkDragAction value
+ * Returns: a #GdkDragAction value
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  **/
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ gdk_drag_context_get_selected_action (GdkDragContext *context)
  *
  * Returns the #GdkWindow where the DND operation started.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GdkWindow
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GdkWindow
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  **/
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ gdk_drag_context_get_source_window (GdkDragContext *context)
  *
  * Returns the destination windw for the DND operation.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GdkWindow
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GdkWindow
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
@@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ gdk_drop_finish (GdkDragContext *context,
  * handling a %GDK_DROP_FINISHED event, its return value is
  * meaningless at other times.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the drop was successful.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the drop was successful.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ gdk_drag_drop_succeeded (GdkDragContext *context)
  *
  * Returns the selection atom for the current source window.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the selection atom, or %GDK_NONE
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the selection atom, or %GDK_NONE
  */
 GdkAtom
 gdk_drag_get_selection (GdkDragContext *context)
diff --git a/gdk/gdkevents.c b/gdk/gdkevents.c
index 1f5bcb2af7..7562e713a4 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkevents.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkevents.c
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ _gdk_event_emit (GdkEvent *event)
  * Find the first event on the queue that is not still
  * being filled in.
  * 
- * Return value: Pointer to the list node for that event, or NULL.
+ * Returns: Pointer to the list node for that event, or NULL.
  **/
 GList*
 _gdk_event_queue_find_first (GdkDisplay *display)
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ _gdk_event_queue_remove_link (GdkDisplay *display,
  * Removes and returns the first event from the event
  * queue that is not still being filled in.
  * 
- * Return value: the event, or %NULL. Ownership is transferred
+ * Returns: the event, or %NULL. Ownership is transferred
  * to the caller.
  **/
 GdkEvent*
@@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ gdk_event_handler_set (GdkEventFunc   func,
  *
  * Checks if any events are ready to be processed for any display.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if any events are pending.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if any events are pending.
  */
 gboolean
 gdk_events_pending (void)
@@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ gdk_events_pending (void)
  * on, fetching events from the windowing system if necessary.
  * See gdk_display_get_event().
  * 
- * Return value: the next #GdkEvent to be processed, or %NULL if no events
+ * Returns: the next #GdkEvent to be processed, or %NULL if no events
  * are pending. The returned #GdkEvent should be freed with gdk_event_free().
  **/
 GdkEvent*
@@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ gdk_event_get (void)
  * If there is an event waiting in the event queue of some open
  * display, returns a copy of it. See gdk_display_peek_event().
  * 
- * Return value: a copy of the first #GdkEvent on some event queue, or %NULL if no
+ * Returns: a copy of the first #GdkEvent on some event queue, or %NULL if no
  * events are in any queues. The returned #GdkEvent should be freed with
  * gdk_event_free().
  **/
@@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ static GHashTable *event_hash = NULL;
  * 
  * Creates a new event of the given type. All fields are set to 0.
  * 
- * Return value: a newly-allocated #GdkEvent. The returned #GdkEvent 
+ * Returns: a newly-allocated #GdkEvent. The returned #GdkEvent 
  * should be freed with gdk_event_free().
  *
  * Since: 2.2
@@ -613,7 +613,7 @@ _gdk_event_get_pointer_emulated (GdkEvent *event)
  * Copies a #GdkEvent, copying or incrementing the reference count of the
  * resources associated with it (e.g. #GdkWindow’s and strings).
  * 
- * Return value: a copy of @event. The returned #GdkEvent should be freed with
+ * Returns: a copy of @event. The returned #GdkEvent should be freed with
  * gdk_event_free().
  **/
 GdkEvent*
@@ -820,7 +820,7 @@ gdk_event_free (GdkEvent *event)
  *
  * Extracts the #GdkWindow associated with an event.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The #GdkWindow associated with the event
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The #GdkWindow associated with the event
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -839,7 +839,7 @@ gdk_event_get_window (const GdkEvent *event)
  * Returns the time stamp from @event, if there is one; otherwise
  * returns #GDK_CURRENT_TIME. If @event is %NULL, returns #GDK_CURRENT_TIME.
  * 
- * Return value: time stamp field from @event
+ * Returns: time stamp field from @event
  **/
 guint32
 gdk_event_get_time (const GdkEvent *event)
@@ -916,7 +916,7 @@ gdk_event_get_time (const GdkEvent *event)
  * in the event. @event may be %NULL, in which case it’s treated
  * as if the event had no state field.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if there was a state field in the event 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if there was a state field in the event 
  **/
 gboolean
 gdk_event_get_state (const GdkEvent        *event,
@@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ gdk_event_get_state (const GdkEvent        *event,
  * 
  * Extract the event window relative x/y coordinates from an event.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the event delivered event window coordinates
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the event delivered event window coordinates
  **/
 gboolean
 gdk_event_get_coords (const GdkEvent *event,
@@ -1063,7 +1063,7 @@ gdk_event_get_coords (const GdkEvent *event,
  * 
  * Extract the root window relative x/y coordinates from an event.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the event delivered root window coordinates
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the event delivered root window coordinates
  **/
 gboolean
 gdk_event_get_root_coords (const GdkEvent *event,
@@ -1133,7 +1133,7 @@ gdk_event_get_root_coords (const GdkEvent *event,
  *
  * Extract the button number from an event.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the event delivered a button number
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the event delivered a button number
  *
  * Since: 3.2
  **/
@@ -1172,7 +1172,7 @@ gdk_event_get_button (const GdkEvent *event,
  *
  * Extracts the click count from an event.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the event delivered a click count
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the event delivered a click count
  *
  * Since: 3.2
  */
@@ -1215,7 +1215,7 @@ gdk_event_get_click_count (const GdkEvent *event,
  *
  * Extracts the keyval from an event.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the event delivered a key symbol
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the event delivered a key symbol
  *
  * Since: 3.2
  */
@@ -1250,7 +1250,7 @@ gdk_event_get_keyval (const GdkEvent *event,
  *
  * Extracts the hardware keycode from an event.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the event delivered a hardware keycode
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the event delivered a hardware keycode
  *
  * Since: 3.2
  */
@@ -1285,7 +1285,7 @@ gdk_event_get_keycode (const GdkEvent *event,
  *
  * Extracts the scroll direction from an event.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the event delivered a scroll direction
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the event delivered a scroll direction
  *
  * Since: 3.2
  */
@@ -1370,7 +1370,7 @@ gdk_event_get_scroll_deltas (const GdkEvent *event,
  * Extract the axis value for a particular axis use from
  * an event structure.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the specified axis was found, otherwise %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the specified axis was found, otherwise %FALSE
  **/
 gboolean
 gdk_event_get_axis (const GdkEvent *event,
@@ -1921,7 +1921,7 @@ gdk_event_set_screen (GdkEvent  *event,
  * to which `event->motion.x_root` and
  * `event->motion.y_root` are relative.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the screen for the event
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the screen for the event
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -1992,7 +1992,7 @@ gdk_set_show_events (gboolean show_events)
  * 
  * Gets whether event debugging output is enabled.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if event debugging output is enabled.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if event debugging output is enabled.
  **/
 gboolean
 gdk_get_show_events (void)
@@ -2225,7 +2225,7 @@ gdk_setting_get (const gchar *name,
  *
  * Retrieves the type of the event.
  *
- * Return value: a #GdkEventType
+ * Returns: a #GdkEventType
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
diff --git a/gdk/gdkframeclock.c b/gdk/gdkframeclock.c
index 6a76cfa1aa..3a7bb24145 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkframeclock.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkframeclock.c
@@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ gdk_frame_clock_init (GdkFrameClock *clock)
  * time.
  *
  * Since: 3.8
- * Return value: a timestamp in microseconds, in the timescale of
+ * Returns: a timestamp in microseconds, in the timescale of
  *  of g_get_monotonic_time().
  */
 gint64
@@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_counter (GdkFrameClock *frame_clock)
  * gdk_frame_clock_get_history_start() and
  * gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_counter(), inclusive.
  *
- * Return value: the frame counter value for the oldest frame
+ * Returns: the frame counter value for the oldest frame
  *  that is available in the internal frame history of the
  *  #GdkFrameClock.
  * Since: 3.8
@@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ _gdk_frame_clock_begin_frame (GdkFrameClock *frame_clock)
  * for the current frame or a recent frame. The #GdkFrameTimings
  * object may not yet be complete: see gdk_frame_timings_get_complete().
  *
- * Return value: the #GdkFrameTimings object for the specified
+ * Returns: the #GdkFrameTimings object for the specified
  *  frame, or %NULL if it is not available. See
  *  gdk_frame_clock_get_history_start().
  * Since: 3.8
diff --git a/gdk/gdkkeys.c b/gdk/gdkkeys.c
index 89d6142d6a..85c900d202 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkkeys.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkkeys.c
@@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ gdk_keymap_get_modifier_state (GdkKeymap *keymap)
  * The returned array should be freed
  * with g_free().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if keys were found and returned
+ * Returns: %TRUE if keys were found and returned
  **/
 gboolean
 gdk_keymap_get_entries_for_keyval (GdkKeymap     *keymap,
@@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ gdk_keymap_get_entries_for_keycode (GdkKeymap     *keymap,
  * this function, since the effective group/level may not be
  * the same as the current keyboard state.
  *
- * Return value: a keyval, or 0 if none was mapped to the given @key
+ * Returns: a keyval, or 0 if none was mapped to the given @key
  **/
 guint
 gdk_keymap_lookup_key (GdkKeymap          *keymap,
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ gdk_keymap_lookup_key (GdkKeymap          *keymap,
  * you store accelerators, you should always store them with consumed
  * modifiers removed. Store `<Control>plus`, not `<Control><Shift>plus`,
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if there was a keyval bound to the keycode/state/group
+ * Returns: %TRUE if there was a keyval bound to the keycode/state/group
  **/
 gboolean
 gdk_keymap_translate_keyboard_state (GdkKeymap       *keymap,
@@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ gdk_keymap_get_modifier_mask (GdkKeymap         *keymap,
  * `gdk/gdkkeysyms.h` header file
  * but without the leading “GDK_KEY_”.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a string containing the name of the key,
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a string containing the name of the key,
  *     or %NULL if @keyval is not a valid key. The string should not be
  *     modified.
  */
diff --git a/gdk/gdkkeyuni.c b/gdk/gdkkeyuni.c
index a8c1c3472b..d770737ccc 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkkeyuni.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkkeyuni.c
@@ -879,7 +879,7 @@ static const struct {
  * Convert from a GDK key symbol to the corresponding ISO10646 (Unicode)
  * character.
  * 
- * Return value: the corresponding unicode character, or 0 if there
+ * Returns: the corresponding unicode character, or 0 if there
  *               is no corresponding character.
  **/
 guint32
@@ -1678,7 +1678,7 @@ static const struct {
  * 
  * Convert from a ISO10646 character to a key symbol.
  * 
- * Return value: the corresponding GDK key symbol, if one exists.
+ * Returns: the corresponding GDK key symbol, if one exists.
  *               or, if there is no corresponding symbol, 
  *               wc | 0x01000000
  **/
diff --git a/gdk/gdkpango.c b/gdk/gdkpango.c
index 8d9dcdf579..e3fb0c6477 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkpango.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkpango.c
@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ layout_iter_get_line_clip_region (PangoLayoutIter *iter,
  * the clip region.  The clip region is mainly useful for highlightling parts
  * of text, such as when text is selected.
  * 
- * Return value: a clip region containing the given ranges
+ * Returns: a clip region containing the given ranges
  **/
 cairo_region_t*
 gdk_pango_layout_line_get_clip_region (PangoLayoutLine *line,
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ gdk_pango_layout_line_get_clip_region (PangoLayoutLine *line,
  * the clip region.  The clip region is mainly useful for highlightling parts
  * of text, such as when text is selected.
  * 
- * Return value: a clip region containing the given ranges
+ * Returns: a clip region containing the given ranges
  **/
 cairo_region_t*
 gdk_pango_layout_get_clip_region (PangoLayout *layout,
@@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ gdk_pango_layout_get_clip_region (PangoLayout *layout,
  * is more convenient if you want to keep a context around and track
  * changes to the screen’s font rendering settings.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a new #PangoContext for the default display
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a new #PangoContext for the default display
  **/
 PangoContext *
 gdk_pango_context_get (void)
@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ gdk_pango_context_get (void)
  * is more convenient if you want to keep a context around and track
  * changes to the screen’s font rendering settings.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer full): a new #PangoContext for @screen
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a new #PangoContext for @screen
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
diff --git a/gdk/gdkpixbuf-drawable.c b/gdk/gdkpixbuf-drawable.c
index 640fd2d095..7ad1d27d01 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkpixbuf-drawable.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkpixbuf-drawable.c
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@
  * (In short, there are several ways this function can fail, and if it fails
  *  it returns %NULL; so check the return value.)
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): A newly-created pixbuf with a reference
+ * Returns: (transfer full): A newly-created pixbuf with a reference
  *     count of 1, or %NULL on error
  */
 GdkPixbuf *
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ convert_no_alpha (guchar *dest_data,
  * This function will create an RGB pixbuf with 8 bits per channel.
  * The pixbuf will contain an alpha channel if the @surface contains one.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): A newly-created pixbuf with a reference
+ * Returns: (transfer full): A newly-created pixbuf with a reference
  *     count of 1, or %NULL on error
  */
 GdkPixbuf *
diff --git a/gdk/gdkrgba.c b/gdk/gdkrgba.c
index 5f65d1574c..66d0bd4039 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkrgba.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkrgba.c
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ gdk_rgba_parse (GdkRGBA     *rgba,
  * A hash function suitable for using for a hash
  * table that stores #GdkRGBAs.
  *
- * Return value: The hash value for @p
+ * Returns: The hash value for @p
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ gdk_rgba_hash (gconstpointer p)
  *
  * Compares two RGBA colors.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the two colors compare equal
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the two colors compare equal
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
diff --git a/gdk/gdkscreen.c b/gdk/gdkscreen.c
index d6ea6ca529..1ae58fa8a5 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkscreen.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkscreen.c
@@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ gdk_screen_get_monitor_at_window (GdkScreen      *screen,
  * 
  * Returns the width of the default screen in pixels.
  * 
- * Return value: the width of the default screen in pixels.
+ * Returns: the width of the default screen in pixels.
  **/
 gint
 gdk_screen_width (void)
@@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ gdk_screen_width (void)
  * 
  * Returns the height of the default screen in pixels.
  * 
- * Return value: the height of the default screen in pixels.
+ * Returns: the height of the default screen in pixels.
  **/
 gint
 gdk_screen_height (void)
@@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ gdk_screen_height (void)
  * Returns the width of the default screen in millimeters.
  * Note that on many X servers this value will not be correct.
  * 
- * Return value: the width of the default screen in millimeters,
+ * Returns: the width of the default screen in millimeters,
  * though it is not always correct.
  **/
 gint
@@ -378,7 +378,7 @@ gdk_screen_width_mm (void)
  * Returns the height of the default screen in millimeters.
  * Note that on many X servers this value will not be correct.
  * 
- * Return value: the height of the default screen in millimeters,
+ * Returns: the height of the default screen in millimeters,
  * though it is not always correct.
  **/
 gint
@@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ gdk_screen_set_font_options (GdkScreen                  *screen,
  * 
  * Gets any options previously set with gdk_screen_set_font_options().
  * 
- * Return value: the current font options, or %NULL if no default
+ * Returns: the current font options, or %NULL if no default
  *  font options have been set.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -477,7 +477,7 @@ gdk_screen_set_resolution (GdkScreen *screen,
  * Gets the resolution for font handling on the screen; see
  * gdk_screen_set_resolution() for full details.
  * 
- * Return value: the current resolution, or -1 if no resolution
+ * Returns: the current resolution, or -1 if no resolution
  * has been set.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -848,7 +848,7 @@ gdk_screen_get_monitor_workarea (GdkScreen    *screen,
  *
  * Call g_list_free() on the return value when you’re finished with it.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer container) (element-type GdkVisual):
+ * Returns: (transfer container) (element-type GdkVisual):
  *     a list of visuals; the list must be freed, but not its contents
  *
  * Since: 2.2
@@ -869,7 +869,7 @@ gdk_screen_list_visuals (GdkScreen *screen)
  * This is the visual for the root window of the display.
  * The return value should not be freed.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the system visual
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the system visual
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -899,7 +899,7 @@ gdk_screen_get_system_visual (GdkScreen * screen)
  * For setting an overall opacity for a top-level window, see
  * gdk_window_set_opacity().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a visual to use for windows with an
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a visual to use for windows with an
  *     alpha channel or %NULL if the capability is not available.
  *
  * Since: 2.8
@@ -923,7 +923,7 @@ gdk_screen_get_rgba_visual (GdkScreen *screen)
  * On X11 this function returns whether a compositing manager is
  * compositing @screen.
  *
- * Return value: Whether windows with RGBA visuals can reasonably be
+ * Returns: Whether windows with RGBA visuals can reasonably be
  * expected to have their alpha channels drawn correctly on the screen.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -943,7 +943,7 @@ gdk_screen_is_composited (GdkScreen *screen)
  * Determines the name to pass to gdk_display_open() to get
  * a #GdkDisplay with this screen as the default screen.
  *
- * Return value: a newly allocated string, free with g_free()
+ * Returns: a newly allocated string, free with g_free()
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -974,7 +974,7 @@ gdk_screen_make_display_name (GdkScreen *screen)
  * The returned window should be unrefed using g_object_unref() when
  * no longer needed.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the currently active window, or %NULL.
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the currently active window, or %NULL.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1006,7 +1006,7 @@ gdk_screen_get_active_window (GdkScreen *screen)
  * windows it contains, so it should be freed using g_list_free() and
  * its windows unrefed using g_object_unref() when no longer needed.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full) (element-type GdkWindow):
+ * Returns: (transfer full) (element-type GdkWindow):
  *     a list of #GdkWindows for the current window stack,
  *               or %NULL.
  *
@@ -1063,7 +1063,7 @@ gdk_screen_get_setting (GdkScreen   *screen,
  * where it is better to use gdk_window_get_scale_factor() instead.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
- * Return value: the scale factor
+ * Returns: the scale factor
  */
 gint
 gdk_screen_get_monitor_scale_factor (GdkScreen *screen,
diff --git a/gdk/gdkselection.c b/gdk/gdkselection.c
index 1d7c2b6cc4..eab6193e20 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkselection.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkselection.c
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ gdk_selection_send_notify_for_display (GdkDisplay       *display,
  * will not be used by applications, who should use the #GtkClipboard
  * API instead.
  *
- * Return value: the length of the retrieved data.
+ * Returns: the length of the retrieved data.
  */
 gint
 gdk_selection_property_get (GdkWindow  *requestor,
@@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ gdk_selection_convert (GdkWindow *requestor,
  * Converts a text property in the given encoding to
  * a list of UTF-8 strings.
  *
- * Return value: the number of strings in the resulting list
+ * Returns: the number of strings in the resulting list
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  */
@@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ gdk_text_property_to_utf8_list_for_display (GdkDisplay     *display,
  * is not specified; it may be as pseudo-escape sequences
  * \x{ABCD}, or it may be in some other form of approximation.
  *
- * Return value: the newly-allocated string, or %NULL if the
+ * Returns: the newly-allocated string, or %NULL if the
  *               conversion failed. (It should not fail for
  *               any properly formed UTF-8 string unless system
  *               limits like memory or file descriptors are exceeded.)
diff --git a/gdk/gdkvisual.c b/gdk/gdkvisual.c
index 77a14fedca..9c27bc0e68 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkvisual.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkvisual.c
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ gdk_visual_class_init (GdkVisualClass *visual_class)
  *
  * Call g_list_free() on the return value when you’re finished with it.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer container) (element-type GdkVisual):
+ * Returns: (transfer container) (element-type GdkVisual):
  *     a list of visuals; the list must be freed, but not its contents
  */
 GList*
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ gdk_list_visuals (void)
  * This is the visual for the root window of the display.
  * The return value should not be freed.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): system visual
+ * Returns: (transfer none): system visual
  */
 GdkVisual*
 gdk_visual_get_system (void)
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ gdk_visual_get_system (void)
  * means “largest,” i.e. 32 preferred over 24 preferred over 8 bits
  * per pixel.
  *
- * Return value: best available depth
+ * Returns: best available depth
  */
 gint
 gdk_visual_get_best_depth (void)
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ gdk_visual_get_best_depth (void)
  *
  * Return the best available visual type for the default GDK screen.
  *
- * Return value: best visual type
+ * Returns: best visual type
  */
 GdkVisualType
 gdk_visual_get_best_type (void)
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ gdk_visual_get_best_type (void)
  * Get the visual with the most available colors for the default
  * GDK screen. The return value should not be freed.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): best visual
+ * Returns: (transfer none): best visual
  */
 GdkVisual*
 gdk_visual_get_best (void)
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ gdk_visual_get_best (void)
  * over grayscale or fixed-colormap visuals. The return value should
  * not be freed. %NULL may be returned if no visual supports @depth.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): best visual for the given depth
+ * Returns: (transfer none): best visual for the given depth
  */
 GdkVisual*
 gdk_visual_get_best_with_depth (gint depth)
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ gdk_visual_get_best_with_depth (gint depth)
  * should not be freed. %NULL may be returned if no visual has type
  * @visual_type.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): best visual of the given type
+ * Returns: (transfer none): best visual of the given type
  */
 GdkVisual*
 gdk_visual_get_best_with_type (GdkVisualType visual_type)
@@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ gdk_visual_get_best_with_type (GdkVisualType visual_type)
  * Combines gdk_visual_get_best_with_depth() and
  * gdk_visual_get_best_with_type().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): best visual with both @depth and
+ * Returns: (transfer none): best visual with both @depth and
  *     @visual_type, or %NULL if none
  */
 GdkVisual*
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ gdk_query_visual_types (GdkVisualType **visual_types,
  *
  * Returns the type of visual this is (PseudoColor, TrueColor, etc).
  *
- * Return value: A #GdkVisualType stating the type of @visual.
+ * Returns: A #GdkVisualType stating the type of @visual.
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  */
@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ gdk_visual_get_visual_type (GdkVisual *visual)
  *
  * Returns the bit depth of this visual.
  *
- * Return value: The bit depth of this visual.
+ * Returns: The bit depth of this visual.
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  */
@@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ gdk_visual_get_depth (GdkVisual *visual)
  *
  * Returns the byte order of this visual.
  *
- * Return value: A #GdkByteOrder stating the byte order of @visual.
+ * Returns: A #GdkByteOrder stating the byte order of @visual.
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  */
@@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ gdk_visual_get_byte_order (GdkVisual *visual)
  *
  * Returns the size of a colormap for this visual.
  *
- * Return value: The size of a colormap that is suitable for @visual.
+ * Returns: The size of a colormap that is suitable for @visual.
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  */
@@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ gdk_visual_get_colormap_size (GdkVisual *visual)
  *
  * Returns the number of significant bits per red, green and blue value.
  *
- * Return value: The number of significant bits per color value for @visual.
+ * Returns: The number of significant bits per color value for @visual.
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  */
@@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ gdk_visual_get_blue_pixel_details (GdkVisual *visual,
  *
  * Gets the screen to which this visual belongs
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the screen to which this visual belongs.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the screen to which this visual belongs.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  */
diff --git a/gdk/gdkwindow.c b/gdk/gdkwindow.c
index 51fc8ba689..606c45c705 100644
--- a/gdk/gdkwindow.c
+++ b/gdk/gdkwindow.c
@@ -1223,7 +1223,7 @@ sync_native_window_stack_position (GdkWindow *window)
  * more details.  Note: to use this on displays other than the default
  * display, @parent must be specified.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the new #GdkWindow
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the new #GdkWindow
  **/
 GdkWindow*
 gdk_window_new (GdkWindow     *parent,
@@ -2105,7 +2105,7 @@ gdk_window_get_user_data (GdkWindow *window,
  *
  * Gets the type of the window. See #GdkWindowType.
  *
- * Return value: type of window
+ * Returns: type of window
  **/
 GdkWindowType
 gdk_window_get_window_type (GdkWindow *window)
@@ -2121,7 +2121,7 @@ gdk_window_get_window_type (GdkWindow *window)
  * 
  * Gets the #GdkVisual describing the pixel format of @window.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GdkVisual
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GdkVisual
  *
  * Since: 2.24
  **/
@@ -2139,7 +2139,7 @@ gdk_window_get_visual (GdkWindow *window)
  * 
  * Gets the #GdkScreen associated with a #GdkWindow.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkScreen associated with @window
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GdkScreen associated with @window
  *
  * Since: 2.24
  **/
@@ -2157,7 +2157,7 @@ gdk_window_get_screen (GdkWindow *window)
  * 
  * Gets the #GdkDisplay associated with a #GdkWindow.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkDisplay associated with @window
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GdkDisplay associated with @window
  *
  * Since: 2.24
  **/
@@ -2174,7 +2174,7 @@ gdk_window_get_display (GdkWindow *window)
  *
  * Check to see if a window is destroyed..
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the window is destroyed
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the window is destroyed
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -2271,7 +2271,7 @@ gdk_window_get_position (GdkWindow *window,
  * gdk_window_get_parent() will most likely not do what you expect if
  * there are offscreen windows in the hierarchy.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): parent of @window
+ * Returns: (transfer none): parent of @window
  **/
 GdkWindow*
 gdk_window_get_parent (GdkWindow *window)
@@ -2291,7 +2291,7 @@ gdk_window_get_parent (GdkWindow *window)
  *
  * See also: gdk_offscreen_window_get_embedder()
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): effective parent of @window
+ * Returns: (transfer none): effective parent of @window
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  **/
@@ -2321,7 +2321,7 @@ gdk_window_get_effective_parent (GdkWindow *window)
  * gdk_window_get_toplevel() will most likely not do what you expect
  * if there are offscreen windows in the hierarchy.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the toplevel window containing @window
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the toplevel window containing @window
  **/
 GdkWindow *
 gdk_window_get_toplevel (GdkWindow *window)
@@ -2349,7 +2349,7 @@ gdk_window_get_toplevel (GdkWindow *window)
  *
  * See also: gdk_offscreen_window_get_embedder()
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the effective toplevel window containing @window
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the effective toplevel window containing @window
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  **/
@@ -2379,7 +2379,7 @@ gdk_window_get_effective_toplevel (GdkWindow *window)
  * The returned list must be freed, but the elements in the
  * list need not be.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer container) (element-type GdkWindow):
+ * Returns: (transfer container) (element-type GdkWindow):
  *     list of child windows inside @window
  **/
 GList*
@@ -2400,7 +2400,7 @@ gdk_window_get_children (GdkWindow *window)
  * Like gdk_window_get_children(), but does not copy the list of
  * children, so the list does not need to be freed.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none) (element-type GdkWindow):
+ * Returns: (transfer none) (element-type GdkWindow):
  *     a reference to the list of child windows in @window
  **/
 GList *
@@ -2429,7 +2429,7 @@ gdk_window_peek_children (GdkWindow *window)
  * The list is returned in (relative) stacking order, i.e. the
  * lowest window is first.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer container) (element-type GdkWindow):
+ * Returns: (transfer container) (element-type GdkWindow):
  *     list of child windows inside @window
  *
  * Since: 3.10
@@ -2571,7 +2571,7 @@ gdk_window_remove_filter (GdkWindow     *window,
  * The returned list should be freed with g_list_free(), but
  * its elements need not be freed.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer container) (element-type GdkWindow):
+ * Returns: (transfer container) (element-type GdkWindow):
  *     list of toplevel windows, free with g_list_free()
  *
  * Since: 2.2
@@ -2607,7 +2607,7 @@ gdk_screen_get_toplevel_windows (GdkScreen *screen)
  * Checks whether the window has been mapped (with gdk_window_show() or
  * gdk_window_show_unraised()).
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the window is mapped
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the window is mapped
  **/
 gboolean
 gdk_window_is_visible (GdkWindow *window)
@@ -2626,7 +2626,7 @@ gdk_window_is_visible (GdkWindow *window)
  * we only check as far as we have GDK window parents, not to the root
  * window.)
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the window is viewable
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the window is viewable
  **/
 gboolean
 gdk_window_is_viewable (GdkWindow *window)
@@ -2646,7 +2646,7 @@ gdk_window_is_viewable (GdkWindow *window)
  * Gets the bitwise OR of the currently active window state flags,
  * from the #GdkWindowState enumeration.
  *
- * Return value: window state bitfield
+ * Returns: window state bitfield
  **/
 GdkWindowState
 gdk_window_get_state (GdkWindow *window)
@@ -3155,7 +3155,7 @@ _gdk_window_ref_cairo_surface (GdkWindow *window)
  * Note that calling cairo_reset_clip() on the resulting #cairo_t will
  * produce undefined results, so avoid it at all costs.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created Cairo context. Free with
+ * Returns: A newly created Cairo context. Free with
  *  cairo_destroy() when you are done drawing.
  * 
  * Since: 2.8
@@ -4070,7 +4070,7 @@ _gdk_window_invalidate_for_expose (GdkWindow       *window,
  * gdk_window_get_update_area() returns %NULL. You are responsible for
  * calling cairo_region_destroy() on the returned region if it’s non-%NULL.
  *
- * Return value: the update area for @window
+ * Returns: the update area for @window
  **/
 cairo_region_t *
 gdk_window_get_update_area (GdkWindow *window)
@@ -4412,7 +4412,7 @@ gdk_window_constrain_size (GdkGeometry    *geometry,
  * The position is given in coordinates relative to the upper left
  * corner of @window.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the window containing the pointer (as with
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the window containing the pointer (as with
  * gdk_window_at_pointer()), or %NULL if the window containing the
  * pointer isn’t known to GDK
  *
@@ -4445,7 +4445,7 @@ gdk_window_get_pointer (GdkWindow	  *window,
  * The position is given in coordinates relative to the upper left
  * corner of @window.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The window underneath @device (as with
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The window underneath @device (as with
  * gdk_device_get_window_at_position()), or %NULL if the window is not known to GDK.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
@@ -4501,7 +4501,7 @@ gdk_window_get_device_position_double (GdkWindow       *window,
  *
  * Use gdk_window_get_device_position_double() if you need subpixel precision.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The window underneath @device (as with
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The window underneath @device (as with
  * gdk_device_get_window_at_position()), or %NULL if the window is not known to GDK.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -4531,7 +4531,7 @@ gdk_window_get_device_position (GdkWindow       *window,
  * Obtains the root window (parent all other windows are inside)
  * for the default display and screen.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the default root window
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the default root window
  **/
 GdkWindow *
 gdk_get_default_root_window (void)
@@ -5257,7 +5257,7 @@ gdk_window_set_events (GdkWindow       *window,
  * Gets the event mask for @window for all master input devices. See
  * gdk_window_set_events().
  *
- * Return value: event mask for @window
+ * Returns: event mask for @window
  **/
 GdkEventMask
 gdk_window_get_events (GdkWindow *window)
@@ -5860,7 +5860,7 @@ gdk_window_set_cursor_internal (GdkWindow *window,
  * there is no custom cursor set on the specified window, and it is
  * using the cursor for its parent window.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GdkCursor, or %NULL. The returned
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GdkCursor, or %NULL. The returned
  *   object is owned by the #GdkWindow and should not be unreferenced
  *   directly. Use gdk_window_set_cursor() to unset the cursor of the
  *   window
@@ -6128,7 +6128,7 @@ gdk_window_get_height (GdkWindow *window)
  * gdk_window_get_geometry() which return the position of a window
  * relative to its parent window.)
  *
- * Return value: not meaningful, ignore
+ * Returns: not meaningful, ignore
  */
 gint
 gdk_window_get_origin (GdkWindow *window,
@@ -6603,7 +6603,7 @@ gdk_window_merge_child_input_shapes (GdkWindow *window)
  * implementing scary features that involve deep knowledge of the
  * windowing system. Don’t worry about it unless you have to.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the server supports static gravity
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the server supports static gravity
  */
 gboolean
 gdk_window_set_static_gravities (GdkWindow *window,
@@ -6717,7 +6717,7 @@ gdk_window_set_composited (GdkWindow *window,
  * Determines whether or not the window manager is hinted that @window
  * has modal behaviour.
  *
- * Return value: whether or not the window has the modal hint set.
+ * Returns: whether or not the window has the modal hint set.
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  */
@@ -6736,7 +6736,7 @@ gdk_window_get_modal_hint (GdkWindow *window)
  * Determines whether or not the desktop environment shuld be hinted that
  * the window does not want to receive input focus.
  *
- * Return value: whether or not the window should receive input focus.
+ * Returns: whether or not the window should receive input focus.
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  */
@@ -6755,7 +6755,7 @@ gdk_window_get_accept_focus (GdkWindow *window)
  * Determines whether or not the desktop environment should be hinted that the
  * window does not want to receive input focus when it is mapped.
  *
- * Return value: whether or not the window wants to receive input focus when
+ * Returns: whether or not the window wants to receive input focus when
  * it is mapped.
  *
  * Since: 2.22
@@ -6774,7 +6774,7 @@ gdk_window_get_focus_on_map (GdkWindow *window)
  *
  * Determines whether or not the window is an input only window.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @window is input only
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @window is input only
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  */
@@ -6792,7 +6792,7 @@ gdk_window_is_input_only (GdkWindow *window)
  *
  * Determines whether or not the window is shaped.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @window is shaped
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @window is shaped
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  */
@@ -9413,7 +9413,7 @@ gdk_window_set_type_hint (GdkWindow        *window,
  *
  * This function returns the type hint set for a window.
  *
- * Return value: The type hint set for @window
+ * Returns: The type hint set for @window
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -9755,7 +9755,7 @@ gdk_window_set_event_compression (GdkWindow *window,
  *
  * Get the current event compression setting for this window.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if motion events will be compressed
+ * Returns: %TRUE if motion events will be compressed
  *
  * Since: 3.12
  **/
@@ -10090,7 +10090,7 @@ gdk_window_set_keep_below (GdkWindow *window, gboolean setting)
  *
  * Returns the group leader window for @window. See gdk_window_set_group().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the group leader window for @window
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the group leader window for @window
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -10444,7 +10444,7 @@ gdk_window_get_drag_protocol (GdkWindow  *window,
  *
  * This function is called by the drag source.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a newly created #GdkDragContext
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a newly created #GdkDragContext
  */
 GdkDragContext *
 gdk_drag_begin (GdkWindow     *window,
@@ -10470,7 +10470,7 @@ gdk_drag_begin (GdkWindow     *window,
  *
  * This function is called by the drag source.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a newly created #GdkDragContext
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a newly created #GdkDragContext
  */
 GdkDragContext *
 gdk_drag_begin_for_device (GdkWindow     *window,
@@ -10789,7 +10789,7 @@ gdk_window_set_frame_clock (GdkWindow     *window,
  * window.
  *
  * Since: 3.8
- * Return value: (transfer none): the frame clock
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the frame clock
  */
 GdkFrameClock*
 gdk_window_get_frame_clock (GdkWindow *window)
@@ -10821,7 +10821,7 @@ gdk_window_get_frame_clock (GdkWindow *window)
  * a configure event will be sent to the toplevel window.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
- * Return value: the scale factor
+ * Returns: the scale factor
  */
 gint
 gdk_window_get_scale_factor (GdkWindow *window)
diff --git a/gdk/quartz/gdkeventloop-quartz.c b/gdk/quartz/gdkeventloop-quartz.c
index 7ef4f2a46a..89d9e1ee36 100644
--- a/gdk/quartz/gdkeventloop-quartz.c
+++ b/gdk/quartz/gdkeventloop-quartz.c
@@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ pollfds_equal (GPollFD *old_pollfds,
  * timeout is used only to tell if the polling operation is blocking
  * or non-blocking.
  *
- * Return value:
+ * Returns:
  *  -1: No file descriptors ready, began asynchronous poll
  *   0: No file descriptors ready, asynchronous poll not needed
  * > 0: Number of file descriptors ready
@@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ select_thread_start_poll (GPollFD *ufds,
  *
  * The results of the poll are written into the GPollFD array passed in.
  *
- * Return Value: number of file descriptors ready
+ * Returns: number of file descriptors ready
  */
 static int
 select_thread_collect_poll (GPollFD *ufds, guint nfds)
diff --git a/gdk/win32/gdkwindow-win32.c b/gdk/win32/gdkwindow-win32.c
index bf32dbe73e..18e35cddb2 100644
--- a/gdk/win32/gdkwindow-win32.c
+++ b/gdk/win32/gdkwindow-win32.c
@@ -3320,7 +3320,7 @@ gdk_win32_window_is_win32 (GdkWindow *window)
  * 
  * Gets a DC with the given drawable selected into it.
  *
- * Return value: The DC, on success. Otherwise
+ * Returns: The DC, on success. Otherwise
  *  %NULL. If this function succeeded
  *  _gdk_win32_impl_release_dc()  must be called
  *  release the DC when you are done using it.
diff --git a/gdk/x11/gdkcursor-x11.c b/gdk/x11/gdkcursor-x11.c
index b12a80d10f..43ae9fc695 100644
--- a/gdk/x11/gdkcursor-x11.c
+++ b/gdk/x11/gdkcursor-x11.c
@@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ _gdk_x11_display_get_cursor_for_type (GdkDisplay    *display,
  * 
  * Returns the display of a #GdkCursor.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): an Xlib Display*.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): an Xlib Display*.
  **/
 Display *
 gdk_x11_cursor_get_xdisplay (GdkCursor *cursor)
@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ gdk_x11_cursor_get_xdisplay (GdkCursor *cursor)
  * 
  * Returns the X cursor belonging to a #GdkCursor.
  * 
- * Return value: an Xlib Cursor.
+ * Returns: an Xlib Cursor.
  **/
 Cursor
 gdk_x11_cursor_get_xcursor (GdkCursor *cursor)
diff --git a/gdk/x11/gdkdisplay-x11.c b/gdk/x11/gdkdisplay-x11.c
index 1465930069..0953fcf032 100644
--- a/gdk/x11/gdkdisplay-x11.c
+++ b/gdk/x11/gdkdisplay-x11.c
@@ -1950,7 +1950,7 @@ gdk_x11_display_finalize (GObject *object)
  * 
  * Find the #GdkDisplay corresponding to @xdisplay, if any exists.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none) (type GdkX11Display): the #GdkDisplay, if found, otherwise %NULL.
+ * Returns: (transfer none) (type GdkX11Display): the #GdkDisplay, if found, otherwise %NULL.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -1986,7 +1986,7 @@ gdk_x11_lookup_xdisplay (Display *xdisplay)
  * Given the root window ID of one of the screen’s of a #GdkDisplay,
  * finds the screen.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkScreen corresponding to
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GdkScreen corresponding to
  *     @xrootwin, or %NULL.
  **/
 GdkScreen *
@@ -2751,7 +2751,7 @@ gdk_x11_display_set_window_scale (GdkDisplay *display,
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  *
- * Return value: X error code or 0 on success
+ * Returns: X error code or 0 on success
  */
 gint
 gdk_x11_display_error_trap_pop (GdkDisplay *display)
diff --git a/gdk/x11/gdkmain-x11.c b/gdk/x11/gdkmain-x11.c
index 9d28b16c82..22c7b95519 100644
--- a/gdk/x11/gdkmain-x11.c
+++ b/gdk/x11/gdkmain-x11.c
@@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ gdk_x11_ungrab_server (void)
  * 
  * Gets the default GTK+ screen number.
  * 
- * Return value: returns the screen number specified by
+ * Returns: returns the screen number specified by
  *   the --display command line option or the DISPLAY environment
  *   variable when gdk_init() calls XOpenDisplay().
  **/
@@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ gdk_x11_get_default_screen (void)
  * Gets the root window of the default screen 
  * (see gdk_x11_get_default_screen()).  
  * 
- * Return value: an Xlib Window.
+ * Returns: an Xlib Window.
  **/
 Window
 gdk_x11_get_default_root_xwindow (void)
@@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ gdk_x11_get_default_root_xwindow (void)
  * 
  * Gets the default GTK+ display.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the Xlib Display* for
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the Xlib Display* for
  * the display specified in the `--display` command
  * line option or the `DISPLAY` environment variable.
  **/
diff --git a/gdk/x11/gdkproperty-x11.c b/gdk/x11/gdkproperty-x11.c
index 01f9e3bc3b..00bf0984b4 100644
--- a/gdk/x11/gdkproperty-x11.c
+++ b/gdk/x11/gdkproperty-x11.c
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ lookup_cached_xatom (GdkDisplay *display,
  * with the same string value. The special value %GDK_NONE
  * is converted to %None.
  *
- * Return value: the X atom corresponding to @atom, or %None
+ * Returns: the X atom corresponding to @atom, or %None
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ _gdk_x11_precache_atoms (GdkDisplay          *display,
  * Converts from a #GdkAtom to the X atom for the default GDK display
  * with the same string value.
  * 
- * Return value: the X atom corresponding to @atom.
+ * Returns: the X atom corresponding to @atom.
  **/
 Atom
 gdk_x11_atom_to_xatom (GdkAtom atom)
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ gdk_x11_atom_to_xatom (GdkAtom atom)
  * Convert from an X atom for a #GdkDisplay to the corresponding
  * #GdkAtom.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the corresponding #GdkAtom.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the corresponding #GdkAtom.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ gdk_x11_xatom_to_atom_for_display (GdkDisplay *display,
  * Convert from an X atom for the default display to the corresponding
  * #GdkAtom.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the corresponding G#dkAtom.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the corresponding G#dkAtom.
  **/
 GdkAtom
 gdk_x11_xatom_to_atom (Atom xatom)
@@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ gdk_x11_xatom_to_atom (Atom xatom)
  * This function caches the result, so if called repeatedly it is much
  * faster than XInternAtom(), which is a round trip to the server each time.
  * 
- * Return value: a X atom for a #GdkDisplay
+ * Returns: a X atom for a #GdkDisplay
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ _gdk_x11_get_xatom_for_display_printf (GdkDisplay    *display,
  * This function caches the result, so if called repeatedly it is much
  * faster than XInternAtom(), which is a round trip to the server each time.
  * 
- * Return value: a X atom for GDK’s default display.
+ * Returns: a X atom for GDK’s default display.
  **/
 Atom
 gdk_x11_get_xatom_by_name (const gchar *atom_name)
@@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ gdk_x11_get_xatom_by_name (const gchar *atom_name)
  * XAtomName() and gdk_atom_name(), the result doesn’t need to
  * be freed. 
  *
- * Return value: name of the X atom; this string is owned by GDK,
+ * Returns: name of the X atom; this string is owned by GDK,
  *   so it shouldn’t be modifed or freed. 
  *
  * Since: 2.2
@@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ gdk_x11_get_xatom_name_for_display (GdkDisplay *display,
  * doesn’t need to be freed. Also, this function will never return %NULL, 
  * even if @xatom is invalid.
  * 
- * Return value: name of the X atom; this string is owned by GTK+,
+ * Returns: name of the X atom; this string is owned by GTK+,
  *   so it shouldn’t be modifed or freed. 
  **/
 const gchar *
diff --git a/gdk/x11/gdkscreen-x11.c b/gdk/x11/gdkscreen-x11.c
index 3bab765f7f..c9c2d81ee5 100644
--- a/gdk/x11/gdkscreen-x11.c
+++ b/gdk/x11/gdkscreen-x11.c
@@ -1554,7 +1554,7 @@ fetch_net_wm_check_window (GdkScreen *screen)
  * You can monitor the window_manager_changed signal on #GdkScreen to detect
  * a window manager change.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the window manager supports @property
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the window manager supports @property
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -1635,7 +1635,7 @@ gdk_x11_screen_supports_net_wm_hint (GdkScreen *screen,
  *
  * Returns the name of the window manager for @screen.
  *
- * Return value: the name of the window manager screen @screen, or
+ * Returns: the name of the window manager screen @screen, or
  * "unknown" if the window manager is unknown. The string is owned by GDK
  * and should not be freed.
  *
diff --git a/gdk/x11/gdkselection-x11.c b/gdk/x11/gdkselection-x11.c
index b8a682eeaa..b84be26664 100644
--- a/gdk/x11/gdkselection-x11.c
+++ b/gdk/x11/gdkselection-x11.c
@@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ _gdk_x11_display_utf8_to_string_target (GdkDisplay  *display,
  *
  * Converts from UTF-8 to compound text.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the conversion succeeded,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the conversion succeeded,
  *     otherwise %FALSE
  *
  * Since: 2.24
diff --git a/gdk/x11/gdkvisual-x11.c b/gdk/x11/gdkvisual-x11.c
index 865f67c439..a88882fe73 100644
--- a/gdk/x11/gdkvisual-x11.c
+++ b/gdk/x11/gdkvisual-x11.c
@@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ _gdk_visual_get_x11_colormap (GdkVisual *visual)
  *
  * Returns the X visual belonging to a #GdkVisual.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): an Xlib Visual*.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): an Xlib Visual*.
  **/
 Visual *
 gdk_x11_visual_get_xvisual (GdkVisual *visual)
diff --git a/gdk/x11/gdkwindow-x11.c b/gdk/x11/gdkwindow-x11.c
index 796c082f14..c9328133c1 100644
--- a/gdk/x11/gdkwindow-x11.c
+++ b/gdk/x11/gdkwindow-x11.c
@@ -1185,7 +1185,7 @@ x_event_mask_to_gdk_event_mask (long mask)
  * was already known to GDK, a new reference to the existing
  * #GdkWindow is returned.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GdkWindow wrapper for the native
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GdkWindow wrapper for the native
  *   window, or %NULL if the window has been destroyed. The wrapper
  *   will be newly created, if one doesn’t exist already.
  *
@@ -5485,7 +5485,7 @@ timestamp_predicate (Display *display,
  *
  * Routine to get the current X server time stamp.
  *
- * Return value: the time stamp.
+ * Returns: the time stamp.
  **/
 guint32
 gdk_x11_get_server_time (GdkWindow *window)
@@ -5521,7 +5521,7 @@ gdk_x11_get_server_time (GdkWindow *window)
  * 
  * Returns the X resource (window) belonging to a #GdkWindow.
  * 
- * Return value: the ID of @drawable’s X resource.
+ * Returns: the ID of @drawable’s X resource.
  **/
 XID
 gdk_x11_window_get_xid (GdkWindow *window)
diff --git a/gdk/x11/gdkxid.c b/gdk/x11/gdkxid.c
index d3029e4d84..8302e74b4e 100644
--- a/gdk/x11/gdkxid.c
+++ b/gdk/x11/gdkxid.c
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ _gdk_x11_display_remove_window (GdkDisplay *display,
  *
  * Looks up the #GdkWindow that wraps the given native window handle.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none) (type GdkX11Window): the #GdkWindow wrapper for the native
+ * Returns: (transfer none) (type GdkX11Window): the #GdkWindow wrapper for the native
  *    window, or %NULL if there is none.
  *
  * Since: 2.24
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkaction.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkaction.c
index 859f29ab52..44e7f3c019 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkaction.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkaction.c
@@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ gtk_action_buildable_get_name (GtkBuildable *buildable)
  * See the [UI Definition section][XML-UI] for information on allowed action
  * names.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkAction
+ * Returns: a new #GtkAction
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -1105,7 +1105,7 @@ _gtk_action_remove_from_proxy_list (GtkAction     *action,
  * Returns the proxy widgets for an action.
  * See also gtk_activatable_get_related_action().
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer none): a #GSList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer none): a #GSList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
  * and must not be modified.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1126,7 +1126,7 @@ gtk_action_get_proxies (GtkAction *action)
  * 
  * Returns the name of the action.
  * 
- * Return value: the name of the action. The string belongs to GTK+ and should not
+ * Returns: the name of the action. The string belongs to GTK+ and should not
  *   be freed.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1147,7 +1147,7 @@ gtk_action_get_name (GtkAction *action)
  * 
  * Returns whether the action is effectively sensitive.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the action and its associated action group 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the action and its associated action group 
  * are both sensitive.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1175,7 +1175,7 @@ gtk_action_is_sensitive (GtkAction *action)
  * necessarily mean effective sensitivity. See gtk_action_is_sensitive() 
  * for that.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the action itself is sensitive.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the action itself is sensitive.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -1227,7 +1227,7 @@ gtk_action_set_sensitive (GtkAction *action,
  * 
  * Returns whether the action is effectively visible.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the action and its associated action group 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the action and its associated action group 
  * are both visible.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1255,7 +1255,7 @@ gtk_action_is_visible (GtkAction *action)
  * necessarily mean effective visibility. See gtk_action_is_sensitive() 
  * for that.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the action itself is visible.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the action itself is visible.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -2060,7 +2060,7 @@ gtk_action_disconnect_accelerator (GtkAction *action)
  * item or the toolbar item it creates, this function returns an
  * instance of that menu.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the menu item provided by the
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the menu item provided by the
  *               action, or %NULL.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkactiongroup.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkactiongroup.c
index 44bc6d5b22..113b3ee1da 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkactiongroup.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkactiongroup.c
@@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ gtk_action_group_get_name (GtkActionGroup *action_group)
  * they are sensitive (see gtk_action_get_sensitive()) and their group
  * is sensitive.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the group is sensitive.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the group is sensitive.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -741,7 +741,7 @@ gtk_action_group_set_sensitive (GtkActionGroup *action_group,
  * they are visible (see gtk_action_get_visible()) and their group
  * is visible.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the group is visible.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the group is visible.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  *
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkcolorsel.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkcolorsel.c
index 7a0206807a..b07211c665 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkcolorsel.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkcolorsel.c
@@ -2371,7 +2371,7 @@ default_change_palette_func (GdkScreen      *screen,
  *
  * Creates a new GtkColorSelection.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkColorSelection
+ * Returns: a new #GtkColorSelection
  */
 GtkWidget *
 gtk_color_selection_new (void)
@@ -2404,7 +2404,7 @@ gtk_color_selection_new (void)
  *
  * Determines whether the colorsel has an opacity control.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the @colorsel has an opacity control,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the @colorsel has an opacity control,
  *     %FALSE if it does't
  */
 gboolean
@@ -2464,7 +2464,7 @@ gtk_color_selection_set_has_opacity_control (GtkColorSelection *colorsel,
  *
  * Determines whether the color selector has a color palette.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the selector has a palette, %FALSE if it hasn't
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the selector has a palette, %FALSE if it hasn't
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_color_selection_get_has_palette (GtkColorSelection *colorsel)
@@ -2612,7 +2612,7 @@ gtk_color_selection_get_current_color (GtkColorSelection *colorsel,
  *
  * Returns the current alpha value.
  *
- * Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535
+ * Returns: an integer between 0 and 65535
  */
 guint16
 gtk_color_selection_get_current_alpha (GtkColorSelection *colorsel)
@@ -2721,7 +2721,7 @@ gtk_color_selection_get_previous_color (GtkColorSelection *colorsel,
  *
  * Returns the previous alpha value.
  *
- * Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535
+ * Returns: an integer between 0 and 65535
  */
 guint16
 gtk_color_selection_get_previous_alpha (GtkColorSelection *colorsel)
@@ -2911,7 +2911,7 @@ gtk_color_selection_set_palette_color (GtkColorSelection *colorsel,
  *
  * Gets the current state of the @colorsel.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the user is currently dragging
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the user is currently dragging
  *     a color around, and %FALSE if the selection has stopped
  */
 gboolean
@@ -2937,7 +2937,7 @@ gtk_color_selection_is_adjusting (GtkColorSelection *colorsel)
  * Parses a color palette string; the string is a colon-separated
  * list of color names readable by gdk_color_parse().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if a palette was successfully parsed
+ * Returns: %TRUE if a palette was successfully parsed
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_color_selection_palette_from_string (const gchar  *str,
@@ -3021,7 +3021,7 @@ gtk_color_selection_palette_from_string (const gchar  *str,
  *
  * Encodes a palette as a string, useful for persistent storage.
  *
- * Return value: allocated string encoding the palette
+ * Returns: allocated string encoding the palette
  */
 gchar*
 gtk_color_selection_palette_to_string (const GdkColor *colors,
@@ -3072,7 +3072,7 @@ gtk_color_selection_palette_to_string (const GdkColor *colors,
  * the #GtkSettings:gtk-color-palette GtkSettings property so all
  * GtkColorSelection widgets will be modified.
  *
- * Return value: the previous change palette hook (that was replaced)
+ * Returns: the previous change palette hook (that was replaced)
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  */
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkfontsel.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkfontsel.c
index 83e520ca34..d7b5154af9 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkfontsel.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkfontsel.c
@@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_init (GtkFontSelection *fontsel)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkFontSelection.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkFontSelection
+ * Returns: a new #GtkFontSelection
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooserWidget instead
  */
@@ -1208,7 +1208,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_update_preview (GtkFontSelection *fontsel)
  * This returns the #GtkTreeView that lists font families, for
  * example, “Sans”, “Serif”, etc.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  *
@@ -1229,7 +1229,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_get_family_list (GtkFontSelection *fontsel)
  * This returns the #GtkTreeView which lists all styles available for
  * the selected font. For example, “Regular”, “Bold”, etc.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  *
@@ -1250,7 +1250,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_get_face_list (GtkFontSelection *fontsel)
  * This returns the #GtkEntry used to allow the user to edit the font
  * number manually instead of selecting it from the list of font sizes.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  *
@@ -1270,7 +1270,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_get_size_entry (GtkFontSelection *fontsel)
  *
  * This returns the #GtkTreeView used to list font sizes.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  *
@@ -1290,7 +1290,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_get_size_list (GtkFontSelection *fontsel)
  *
  * This returns the #GtkEntry used to display the font as a preview.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  *
@@ -1310,7 +1310,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_get_preview_entry (GtkFontSelection *fontsel)
  *
  * Gets the #PangoFontFamily representing the selected font family.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #PangoFontFamily representing the
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #PangoFontFamily representing the
  *     selected font family. Font families are a collection of font
  *     faces. The returned object is owned by @fontsel and must not
  *     be modified or freed.
@@ -1334,7 +1334,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_get_family (GtkFontSelection *fontsel)
  * Gets the #PangoFontFace representing the selected font group
  * details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #PangoFontFace representing the
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #PangoFontFace representing the
  *     selected font group details. The returned object is owned by
  *     @fontsel and must not be modified or freed.
  *
@@ -1356,7 +1356,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_get_face (GtkFontSelection *fontsel)
  *
  * The selected font size.
  *
- * Return value: A n integer representing the selected font size,
+ * Returns: A n integer representing the selected font size,
  *     or -1 if no font size is selected.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
@@ -1384,7 +1384,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_get_size (GtkFontSelection *fontsel)
  * “Helvetica Bold Italic 12”. Use pango_font_description_equal()
  * if you want to compare two font descriptions.
  * 
- * Return value: A string with the name of the current font, or %NULL if 
+ * Returns: A string with the name of the current font, or %NULL if 
  *     no font is selected. You must free this string with g_free().
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooser
@@ -1518,7 +1518,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_select_font_desc (GtkFontSelection      *fontsel,
  * for this to work; this can be guaranteed by simply making sure that the 
  * @fontsel is inserted in a toplevel window before you call this function.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the font could be set successfully; %FALSE if no 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the font could be set successfully; %FALSE if no 
  *     such font exists or if the @fontsel doesn’t belong to a particular 
  *     screen yet.
  *
@@ -1563,7 +1563,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_set_font_name (GtkFontSelection *fontsel,
  *
  * Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
  * 
- * Return value: the text displayed in the preview area. 
+ * Returns: the text displayed in the preview area. 
  *     This string is owned by the widget and should not be 
  *     modified or freed 
  *
@@ -1717,7 +1717,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_dialog_init (GtkFontSelectionDialog *fontseldiag)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkFontSelectionDialog.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+ * Returns: a new #GtkFontSelectionDialog
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooserDialog
  */
@@ -1761,7 +1761,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_selection (GtkFontSelectionDialog *fsd)
  *
  * Gets the “OK” button.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkWidget used in the dialog
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GtkWidget used in the dialog
  *     for the “OK” button.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
@@ -1782,7 +1782,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_ok_button (GtkFontSelectionDialog *fsd)
  *
  * Gets the “Cancel” button.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkWidget used in the dialog
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GtkWidget used in the dialog
  *     for the “Cancel” button.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
@@ -1838,7 +1838,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_dialog_buildable_get_internal_child (GtkBuildable *buildable,
  * to “Helvetica Bold Italic 12”.  Use pango_font_description_equal()
  * if you want to compare two font descriptions.
  * 
- * Return value: A string with the name of the current font, or %NULL if no 
+ * Returns: A string with the name of the current font, or %NULL if no 
  *     font is selected. You must free this string with g_free().
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooserDialog
@@ -1862,7 +1862,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name (GtkFontSelectionDialog *fsd)
  *
  * Sets the currently selected font. 
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the font selected in @fsd is now the
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the font selected in @fsd is now the
  *     @fontname specified, %FALSE otherwise. 
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.2: Use #GtkFontChooserDialog
@@ -1887,7 +1887,7 @@ gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name (GtkFontSelectionDialog *fsd,
  *
  * Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
  * 
- * Return value: the text displayed in the preview area. 
+ * Returns: the text displayed in the preview area. 
  *     This string is owned by the widget and should not be 
  *     modified or freed 
  *
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkhandlebox.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkhandlebox.c
index 3987c19106..3fb37c3399 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkhandlebox.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkhandlebox.c
@@ -930,7 +930,7 @@ gtk_handle_box_set_shadow_type (GtkHandleBox  *handle_box,
  * Gets the type of shadow drawn around the handle box. See
  * gtk_handle_box_set_shadow_type().
  *
- * Return value: the type of shadow currently drawn around the handle box.
+ * Returns: the type of shadow currently drawn around the handle box.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkHandleBox has been deprecated.
  **/
@@ -976,7 +976,7 @@ gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position  (GtkHandleBox    *handle_box,
  * Gets the handle position of the handle box. See
  * gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position().
  *
- * Return value: the current handle position.
+ * Returns: the current handle position.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkHandleBox has been deprecated.
  **/
@@ -1039,7 +1039,7 @@ gtk_handle_box_set_snap_edge        (GtkHandleBox    *handle_box,
  * Gets the edge used for determining reattachment of the handle box.
  * See gtk_handle_box_set_snap_edge().
  *
- * Return value: the edge used for determining reattachment, or
+ * Returns: the edge used for determining reattachment, or
  *   (GtkPositionType)-1 if this is determined (as per default)
  *   from the handle position.
  *
@@ -1059,7 +1059,7 @@ gtk_handle_box_get_snap_edge (GtkHandleBox *handle_box)
  *
  * Whether the handlebox’s child is currently detached.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the child is currently detached, otherwise %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the child is currently detached, otherwise %FALSE
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  *
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkhscale.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkhscale.c
index 58aa6e8b10..557287488e 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkhscale.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkhscale.c
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ gtk_hscale_new (GtkAdjustment *adjustment)
  * is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
  * needs, use gtk_scale_set_digits() to correct it.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkHScale
+ * Returns: a new #GtkHScale
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.2: Use gtk_scale_new_with_range() with %GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL instead
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkhsv.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkhsv.c
index fa5a9b7b59..eb7de5f231 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkhsv.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkhsv.c
@@ -1209,7 +1209,7 @@ gtk_hsv_focus (GtkWidget       *widget,
  *
  * Creates a new HSV color selector.
  *
- * Return value: A newly-created HSV color selector.
+ * Returns: A newly-created HSV color selector.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
@@ -1362,7 +1362,7 @@ gtk_hsv_get_metrics (GtkHSV *hsv,
  * adjusting the value with the mouse. This function queries whether 
  * the HSV color selector is being adjusted or not.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value,
  *     since they may be transitory, or %FALSE if they should consider
  *     the color value status to be final.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkiconfactory.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkiconfactory.c
index 4ee94c7541..0bb8d4d87d 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkiconfactory.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkiconfactory.c
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ gtk_icon_factory_finalize (GObject *object)
  * add a default icon factory with their icons, which will allow
  * themes to override the icons for the application.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkIconFactory
+ * Returns: a new #GtkIconFactory
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ gtk_icon_factory_add (GtkIconFactory *factory,
  * widget that will display the icon, instead of using this
  * function directly, so that themes are taken into account.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): icon set of @stock_id.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): icon set of @stock_id.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ _gtk_icon_factory_get_default_icons (void)
  * using this function directly, so that themes are taken into
  * account.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GtkIconSet, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GtkIconSet, or %NULL
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -761,7 +761,7 @@ icon_size_lookup_intern (GtkIconSize  size,
  * are free to render the pixbuf however they like, including changing
  * the usual size.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @size was a valid size
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @size was a valid size
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  *
@@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ gtk_icon_size_lookup_for_settings (GtkSettings *settings,
  * are free to render the pixbuf however they like, including changing
  * the usual size.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @size was a valid size
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @size was a valid size
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_icon_size_lookup (GtkIconSize  size,
@@ -927,7 +927,7 @@ gtk_icon_size_register_alias (const gchar *alias,
  *
  * Looks up the icon size associated with @name.
  *
- * Return value: (type int): the icon size
+ * Returns: (type int): the icon size
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -1029,7 +1029,7 @@ static guint cache_serial = 0;
  * #GtkIconSet is to create application-specific icon sets to place in
  * a #GtkIconFactory.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkIconSet
+ * Returns: a new #GtkIconSet
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -1059,7 +1059,7 @@ gtk_icon_set_new (void)
  * using scaling, pixelation, etc. as required to adjust the icon size
  * or make the icon look insensitive/prelighted.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkIconSet
+ * Returns: a new #GtkIconSet
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -1088,7 +1088,7 @@ gtk_icon_set_new_from_pixbuf (GdkPixbuf *pixbuf)
  *
  * Increments the reference count on @icon_set.
  *
- * Return value: @icon_set.
+ * Returns: @icon_set.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -1147,7 +1147,7 @@ G_DEFINE_BOXED_TYPE (GtkIconSet, gtk_icon_set,
  *
  * Copies @icon_set by value.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkIconSet identical to the first.
+ * Returns: a new #GtkIconSet identical to the first.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  **/
@@ -1550,7 +1550,7 @@ G_GNUC_END_IGNORE_DEPRECATIONS;
  * (perhaps because an image file fails to load), a default "missing
  * image" icon will be returned instead.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GdkPixbuf to be displayed
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GdkPixbuf to be displayed
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  *
@@ -1583,7 +1583,7 @@ gtk_icon_set_render_icon_pixbuf (GtkIconSet        *icon_set,
  * (perhaps because an image file fails to load), a default "missing
  * image" icon will be returned instead.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #cairo_surface_t to be displayed
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #cairo_surface_t to be displayed
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  *
@@ -1629,7 +1629,7 @@ gtk_icon_set_render_icon_surface  (GtkIconSet      *icon_set,
  * (perhaps because an image file fails to load), a default "missing
  * image" icon will be returned instead.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GdkPixbuf to be displayed
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GdkPixbuf to be displayed
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use gtk_icon_set_render_icon_pixbuf() instead
  */
@@ -1885,7 +1885,7 @@ gtk_icon_set_get_sizes (GtkIconSet   *icon_set,
  * the icon source will be used as the base icon for any desired text
  * direction, widget state, or icon size.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkIconSource
+ * Returns: a new #GtkIconSource
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -1913,7 +1913,7 @@ gtk_icon_source_new (void)
  *
  * Creates a copy of @source; mostly useful for language bindings.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkIconSource
+ * Returns: a new #GtkIconSource
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -2101,7 +2101,7 @@ gtk_icon_source_set_pixbuf (GtkIconSource *source,
  * filename is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
  * persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
  *
- * Return value: (type filename): image filename. This string must not
+ * Returns: (type filename): image filename. This string must not
  * be modified or freed.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
@@ -2125,7 +2125,7 @@ gtk_icon_source_get_filename (const GtkIconSource *source)
  * icon_name is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
  * persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
  *
- * Return value: icon name. This string must not be modified or freed.
+ * Returns: icon name. This string must not be modified or freed.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -2153,7 +2153,7 @@ gtk_icon_source_get_icon_name (const GtkIconSource *source)
  * virtual function. The reference count on the pixbuf is
  * not incremented.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): source pixbuf
+ * Returns: (transfer none): source pixbuf
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -2262,7 +2262,7 @@ gtk_icon_source_set_size_wildcarded (GtkIconSource *source,
  *
  * Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_size_wildcarded().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any icon size variant
+ * Returns: %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any icon size variant
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -2280,7 +2280,7 @@ gtk_icon_source_get_size_wildcarded (const GtkIconSource *source)
  *
  * Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_state_wildcarded().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any widget state variant
+ * Returns: %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any widget state variant
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -2298,7 +2298,7 @@ gtk_icon_source_get_state_wildcarded (const GtkIconSource *source)
  *
  * Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any text direction variant
+ * Returns: %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any text direction variant
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -2390,7 +2390,7 @@ gtk_icon_source_set_size (GtkIconSource *source,
  * value is only useful/meaningful if the text direction is not
  * wildcarded.
  *
- * Return value: text direction this source matches
+ * Returns: text direction this source matches
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -2410,7 +2410,7 @@ gtk_icon_source_get_direction (const GtkIconSource *source)
  * value is only useful/meaningful if the widget state is not
  * wildcarded.
  *
- * Return value: widget state this source matches
+ * Returns: widget state this source matches
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -2429,7 +2429,7 @@ gtk_icon_source_get_state (const GtkIconSource *source)
  * Obtains the icon size this source applies to. The return value
  * is only useful/meaningful if the icon size is not wildcarded.
  *
- * Return value: (type int): icon size this source matches.
+ * Returns: (type int): icon size this source matches.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
@@ -2722,7 +2722,7 @@ _gtk_icon_set_invalidate_caches (void)
  * The strings in the returned list aren’t copied.
  * The list itself should be freed.
  *
- * Return value: List of ids in icon factories
+ * Returns: List of ids in icon factories
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use #GtkIconTheme instead.
  */
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkimagemenuitem.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkimagemenuitem.c
index 02545072ba..73debc9d6a 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkimagemenuitem.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkimagemenuitem.c
@@ -1109,7 +1109,7 @@ gtk_image_menu_item_set_image (GtkImageMenuItem *image_menu_item,
  * Gets the widget that is currently set as the image of @image_menu_item.
  * See gtk_image_menu_item_set_image().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the widget set as image of @image_menu_item
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the widget set as image of @image_menu_item
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkradioaction.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkradioaction.c
index b82a5c3dd3..b4c724e45a 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkradioaction.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkradioaction.c
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ gtk_radio_action_init (GtkRadioAction *action)
  * a #GtkActionGroup and set the accelerator for the action,
  * call gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel().
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkRadioAction
+ * Returns: a new #GtkRadioAction
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -544,7 +544,7 @@ gtk_radio_action_join_group (GtkRadioAction *action,
  * Obtains the value property of the currently active member of 
  * the group to which @action belongs.
  * 
- * Return value: The value of the currently active group member
+ * Returns: The value of the currently active group member
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  *
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkrc.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkrc.c
index 4e7a0b7f5a..7239527194 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkrc.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkrc.c
@@ -948,7 +948,7 @@ gtk_rc_set_default_files (gchar **filenames)
  * Retrieves the current list of RC files that will be parsed
  * at the end of gtk_init().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none) (array zero-terminated=1) (element-type filename):
+ * Returns: (transfer none) (array zero-terminated=1) (element-type filename):
  *      A %NULL-terminated array of filenames.  This memory is owned
  *     by GTK+ and must not be freed by the application.  If you want
  *     to store this information, you should make a copy.
@@ -1140,7 +1140,7 @@ gtk_rc_style_new (void)
  * will correctly copy an RC style that is a member of a class
  * derived from #GtkRcStyle.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the resulting #GtkRcStyle
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the resulting #GtkRcStyle
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use #GtkCssProvider instead.
  **/
@@ -1329,7 +1329,7 @@ gtk_rc_reset_styles (GtkSettings *settings)
  * for the given #GtkSettings has changed, discard all style information
  * and then reread all previously read RC files.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the files were reread.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the files were reread.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use #GtkCssProvider instead.
  **/
@@ -1347,7 +1347,7 @@ gtk_rc_reparse_all_for_settings (GtkSettings *settings,
  * default #GtkSettings has changed, discard all style information
  * and then reread all previously read RC files.
  *
- * Return value:  %TRUE if the files were reread.
+ * Returns:  %TRUE if the files were reread.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use #GtkCssProvider instead.
  **/
@@ -1409,7 +1409,7 @@ gtk_rc_get_style (GtkWidget *widget)
  *                             G_OBJECT_TYPE (widget));
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A style created by matching with the
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A style created by matching with the
  *     supplied paths, or %NULL if nothing matching was specified and the
  *     default style should be used. The returned value is owned by GTK+
  *     as part of an internal cache, so you must call g_object_ref() on
@@ -1553,7 +1553,7 @@ lookup_color (GtkRcStyle *style,
  * If the file is not found, it outputs a warning message using
  * g_warning() and returns %NULL.
  *
- * Return value: (type filename): the filename.
+ * Returns: (type filename): the filename.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use #GtkCssProvider instead.
  **/
@@ -1574,7 +1574,7 @@ gtk_rc_find_pixmap_in_path (GtkSettings  *settings,
  * Searches for a theme engine in the GTK+ search path. This function
  * is not useful for applications and should not be used.
  *
- * Return value: (type filename): The filename, if found (must be
+ * Returns: (type filename): The filename, if found (must be
  *   freed with g_free()), otherwise %NULL.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use #GtkCssProvider instead.
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkrecentaction.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkrecentaction.c
index d021e34da6..309140ceb0 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkrecentaction.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkrecentaction.c
@@ -688,7 +688,7 @@ gtk_recent_action_init (GtkRecentAction *action)
  * a #GtkActionGroup and set the accelerator for the action,
  * call gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel().
  *
- * Return value: the newly created #GtkRecentAction.
+ * Returns: the newly created #GtkRecentAction.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  *
@@ -725,7 +725,7 @@ gtk_recent_action_new (const gchar *name,
  * a #GtkActionGroup and set the accelerator for the action,
  * call gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel().
  *
- * Return value: the newly created #GtkRecentAction
+ * Returns: the newly created #GtkRecentAction
  * 
  * Since: 2.12
  *
@@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ gtk_recent_action_new_for_manager (const gchar      *name,
  *
  * Returns the value set by gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if numbers should be shown.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if numbers should be shown.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  *
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkstock.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkstock.c
index 874dbc7f47..3415f6e24c 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkstock.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkstock.c
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ gtk_stock_add_static (const GtkStockItem *items,
  * Fills @item with the registered values for @stock_id, returning %TRUE
  * if @stock_id was known.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @item was initialized
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @item was initialized
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10
  **/
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ gtk_stock_lookup (const gchar  *stock_id,
  * or registered with gtk_stock_add(). The list must be freed with g_slist_free(),
  * and each string in the list must be freed with g_free().
  *
- * Return value: (element-type utf8) (transfer full): a list of known stock IDs
+ * Returns: (element-type utf8) (transfer full): a list of known stock IDs
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10
  **/
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ gtk_stock_list_ids (void)
  * 
  * Copies a stock item, mostly useful for language bindings and not in applications.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkStockItem
+ * Returns: a new #GtkStockItem
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkstyle.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkstyle.c
index ab9464f23e..6b759deea0 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkstyle.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkstyle.c
@@ -960,7 +960,7 @@ gtk_style_detach (GtkStyle *style)
  * and the default icon factory, returning an icon set if found,
  * otherwise %NULL.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): icon set of @stock_id
+ * Returns: (transfer none): icon set of @stock_id
  *
  * Deprecated:3.0: Use gtk_style_context_lookup_icon_set() instead
  */
@@ -993,7 +993,7 @@ gtk_style_lookup_icon_set (GtkStyle   *style,
  * it depends on the #GtkStyle and might change when a theme
  * switch occurs.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the mapping was found.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the mapping was found.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  *
@@ -1290,7 +1290,7 @@ gtk_style_real_set_background (GtkStyle    *style,
  * according to the given parameters and returns the result in a
  * pixbuf.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a newly-created #GdkPixbuf
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a newly-created #GdkPixbuf
  *     containing the rendered icon
  *
  * Deprecated:3.0: Use gtk_render_icon_pixbuf() instead
@@ -4160,7 +4160,7 @@ gtk_widget_ensure_style (GtkWidget *widget)
  *
  * Simply an accessor function that returns @widget->style.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the widget’s #GtkStyle
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the widget’s #GtkStyle
  *
  * Deprecated:3.0: Use #GtkStyleContext instead
  */
@@ -4239,7 +4239,7 @@ gtk_widget_modify_style (GtkWidget      *widget,
  * thus dropping any reference to the old modifier style. Add a reference
  * to the modifier style if you want to keep it alive.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the modifier style for the widget.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the modifier style for the widget.
  *     This rc style is owned by the widget. If you want to keep a
  *     pointer to value this around, you must add a refcount using
  *     g_object_ref().
@@ -4749,7 +4749,7 @@ gtk_widget_class_path (GtkWidget *widget,
  * the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be
  * freed after use with g_object_unref().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the
  *     stock ID wasn’t known
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use gtk_widget_render_icon_pixbuf() instead.
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtktable.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtktable.c
index 23b98bdaa2..94fa5baa98 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtktable.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtktable.c
@@ -866,7 +866,7 @@ gtk_table_set_row_spacing (GtkTable *table,
  * Gets the amount of space between row @row, and
  * row @row + 1. See gtk_table_set_row_spacing().
  *
- * Return value: the row spacing
+ * Returns: the row spacing
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkGrid does not offer a replacement for this
  *     functionality.
@@ -929,7 +929,7 @@ gtk_table_set_col_spacing (GtkTable *table,
  * Gets the amount of space between column @col, and
  * column @col + 1. See gtk_table_set_col_spacing().
  *
- * Return value: the column spacing
+ * Returns: the column spacing
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.4: #GtkGrid does not offer a replacement for this
  *     functionality.
@@ -987,7 +987,7 @@ gtk_table_set_row_spacings (GtkTable *table,
  * the spacing that will be used for newly added rows.
  * (See gtk_table_set_row_spacings())
  *
- * Return value: the default row spacing
+ * Returns: the default row spacing
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_grid_get_row_spacing() with #GtkGrid.
  **/
@@ -1038,7 +1038,7 @@ gtk_table_set_col_spacings (GtkTable *table,
  * the spacing that will be used for newly added columns.
  * (See gtk_table_set_col_spacings())
  *
- * Return value: the default column spacing
+ * Returns: the default column spacing
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_grid_get_column_spacing() with #GtkGrid.
  **/
@@ -1091,7 +1091,7 @@ gtk_table_set_homogeneous (GtkTable *table,
  * Returns whether the table cells are all constrained to the same
  * width and height. (See gtk_table_set_homogeneous ())
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the cells are all constrained to the same size
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the cells are all constrained to the same size
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.4: Use gtk_grid_get_row_homogeneous() and
  *     gtk_grid_get_column_homogeneous() with #GtkGrid.
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtktoggleaction.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtktoggleaction.c
index 82ebc91ba1..71bb0367da 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtktoggleaction.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtktoggleaction.c
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ gtk_toggle_action_init (GtkToggleAction *action)
  * a #GtkActionGroup and set the accelerator for the action,
  * call gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel().
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkToggleAction
+ * Returns: a new #GtkToggleAction
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  *
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkuimanager.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkuimanager.c
index 9ae6c785d1..35da0dbc16 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkuimanager.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkuimanager.c
@@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ gtk_ui_manager_real_get_action (GtkUIManager *manager,
  * 
  * Creates a new ui manager object.
  * 
- * Return value: a new ui manager object.
+ * Returns: a new ui manager object.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -849,7 +849,7 @@ gtk_ui_manager_new (void)
  * Returns whether menus generated by this #GtkUIManager
  * will have tearoff menu items. 
  * 
- * Return value: whether tearoff menu items are added
+ * Returns: whether tearoff menu items are added
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -1049,7 +1049,7 @@ gtk_ui_manager_remove_action_group (GtkUIManager   *manager,
  * 
  * Returns the list of action groups associated with @manager.
  *
- * Return value:  (element-type GtkActionGroup) (transfer none): a #GList of
+ * Returns:  (element-type GtkActionGroup) (transfer none): a #GList of
  *   action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
  *   and should not be modified.
  *
@@ -1071,7 +1071,7 @@ gtk_ui_manager_get_action_groups (GtkUIManager *manager)
  * 
  * Returns the #GtkAccelGroup associated with @manager.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkAccelGroup.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GtkAccelGroup.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -1105,7 +1105,7 @@ gtk_ui_manager_get_accel_group (GtkUIManager *manager)
  * function to some container or explicitly ref them, they will survive the
  * destruction of the ui manager.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the widget found by following the path,
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the widget found by following the path,
  *     or %NULL if no widget was found
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1163,7 +1163,7 @@ collect_toplevels (GNode   *node,
  * 
  * Obtains a list of all toplevel widgets of the requested types.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer container): a newly-allocated #GSList of
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer container): a newly-allocated #GSList of
  * all toplevel widgets of the requested types.  Free the returned list with g_slist_free().
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1201,7 +1201,7 @@ gtk_ui_manager_get_toplevels (GtkUIManager         *manager,
  * Looks up an action by following a path. See gtk_ui_manager_get_widget()
  * for more information about paths.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the action whose proxy widget is found by following the path, 
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the action whose proxy widget is found by following the path, 
  *     or %NULL if no widget was found.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1413,7 +1413,7 @@ free_node (GNode *node)
  * Returns an unused merge id, suitable for use with 
  * gtk_ui_manager_add_ui().
  * 
- * Return value: an unused merge id.
+ * Returns: an unused merge id.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -1937,7 +1937,7 @@ add_ui_from_string (GtkUIManager *manager,
  * the current contents of @manager. An enclosing <ui> element is added if
  * it is missing.
  * 
- * Return value: The merge id for the merged UI. The merge id can be used
+ * Returns: The merge id for the merged UI. The merge id can be used
  *   to unmerge the UI with gtk_ui_manager_remove_ui(). If an error occurred,
  *   the return value is 0.
  *
@@ -1981,7 +1981,7 @@ gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_string (GtkUIManager *manager,
  * Parses a file containing a [UI definition][XML-UI] and 
  * merges it with the current contents of @manager. 
  * 
- * Return value: The merge id for the merged UI. The merge id can be used
+ * Returns: The merge id for the merged UI. The merge id can be used
  *   to unmerge the UI with gtk_ui_manager_remove_ui(). If an error occurred,
  *   the return value is 0.
  *
@@ -2018,7 +2018,7 @@ gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_file (GtkUIManager *manager,
  * Parses a resource file containing a [UI definition][XML-UI] and
  * merges it with the current contents of @manager.
  *
- * Return value: The merge id for the merged UI. The merge id can be used
+ * Returns: The merge id for the merged UI. The merge id can be used
  *   to unmerge the UI with gtk_ui_manager_remove_ui(). If an error occurred,
  *   the return value is 0.
  *
@@ -3343,7 +3343,7 @@ gtk_ui_manager_buildable_custom_tag_end (GtkBuildable *buildable,
  * 
  * Creates a [UI definition][XML-UI] of the merged UI.
  * 
- * Return value: A newly allocated string containing an XML representation of 
+ * Returns: A newly allocated string containing an XML representation of 
  * the merged UI.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
diff --git a/gtk/deprecated/gtkvscale.c b/gtk/deprecated/gtkvscale.c
index 3944383b84..4cbcf5eed4 100644
--- a/gtk/deprecated/gtkvscale.c
+++ b/gtk/deprecated/gtkvscale.c
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ gtk_vscale_new (GtkAdjustment *adjustment)
  * is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
  * needs, use gtk_scale_set_digits() to correct it.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkVScale
+ * Returns: a new #GtkVScale
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.2: Use gtk_scale_new_with_range() with %GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL instead
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkaboutdialog.c b/gtk/gtkaboutdialog.c
index 82f721406e..13f37aabaf 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkaboutdialog.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkaboutdialog.c
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ gtk_about_dialog_show (GtkWidget *widget)
  *
  * Returns the program name displayed in the about dialog.
  *
- * Return value: The program name. The string is owned by the about
+ * Returns: The program name. The string is owned by the about
  *  dialog and must not be modified.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
@@ -1083,7 +1083,7 @@ gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name (GtkAboutDialog *about,
  *
  * Returns the version string.
  *
- * Return value: The version string. The string is owned by the about
+ * Returns: The version string. The string is owned by the about
  *  dialog and must not be modified.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
@@ -1131,7 +1131,7 @@ gtk_about_dialog_set_version (GtkAboutDialog *about,
  *
  * Returns the copyright string.
  *
- * Return value: The copyright string. The string is owned by the about
+ * Returns: The copyright string. The string is owned by the about
  *  dialog and must not be modified.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
@@ -1190,7 +1190,7 @@ gtk_about_dialog_set_copyright (GtkAboutDialog *about,
  *
  * Returns the comments string.
  *
- * Return value: The comments. The string is owned by the about
+ * Returns: The comments. The string is owned by the about
  *  dialog and must not be modified.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
@@ -1247,7 +1247,7 @@ gtk_about_dialog_set_comments (GtkAboutDialog *about,
  *
  * Returns the license information.
  *
- * Return value: The license information. The string is owned by the about
+ * Returns: The license information. The string is owned by the about
  *  dialog and must not be modified.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
@@ -1358,7 +1358,7 @@ gtk_about_dialog_set_wrap_license (GtkAboutDialog *about,
  *
  * Returns the website URL.
  *
- * Return value: The website URL. The string is owned by the about
+ * Returns: The website URL. The string is owned by the about
  *  dialog and must not be modified.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
@@ -1410,7 +1410,7 @@ gtk_about_dialog_set_website (GtkAboutDialog *about,
  *
  * Returns the label used for the website link.
  *
- * Return value: The label used for the website link. The string is
+ * Returns: The label used for the website link. The string is
  *     owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
@@ -1463,7 +1463,7 @@ gtk_about_dialog_set_website_label (GtkAboutDialog *about,
  * Returns the string which are displayed in the authors tab
  * of the secondary credits dialog.
  *
- * Return value: (array zero-terminated=1) (transfer none): A
+ * Returns: (array zero-terminated=1) (transfer none): A
  *  %NULL-terminated string array containing the authors. The array is
  *  owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
  *
@@ -1518,7 +1518,7 @@ gtk_about_dialog_set_authors (GtkAboutDialog  *about,
  * Returns the string which are displayed in the documenters
  * tab of the secondary credits dialog.
  *
- * Return value: (array zero-terminated=1) (transfer none): A
+ * Returns: (array zero-terminated=1) (transfer none): A
  *  %NULL-terminated string array containing the documenters. The
  *  array is owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
  *
@@ -1573,7 +1573,7 @@ gtk_about_dialog_set_documenters (GtkAboutDialog *about,
  * Returns the string which are displayed in the artists tab
  * of the secondary credits dialog.
  *
- * Return value: (array zero-terminated=1) (transfer none): A
+ * Returns: (array zero-terminated=1) (transfer none): A
  *  %NULL-terminated string array containing the artists. The array is
  *  owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
  *
@@ -1628,7 +1628,7 @@ gtk_about_dialog_set_artists (GtkAboutDialog *about,
  * Returns the translator credits string which is displayed
  * in the translators tab of the secondary credits dialog.
  *
- * Return value: The translator credits string. The string is
+ * Returns: The translator credits string. The string is
  *   owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
@@ -1690,7 +1690,7 @@ gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits (GtkAboutDialog *about,
  *
  * Returns the pixbuf displayed as logo in the about dialog.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the pixbuf displayed as logo. The
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the pixbuf displayed as logo. The
  *   pixbuf is owned by the about dialog. If you want to keep a
  *   reference to it, you have to call g_object_ref() on it.
  *
@@ -1763,7 +1763,7 @@ gtk_about_dialog_set_logo (GtkAboutDialog *about,
  *
  * Returns the icon name displayed as logo in the about dialog.
  *
- * Return value: the icon name displayed as logo. The string is
+ * Returns: the icon name displayed as logo. The string is
  *   owned by the dialog. If you want to keep a reference
  *   to it, you have to call g_strdup() on it.
  *
@@ -2512,7 +2512,7 @@ gtk_about_dialog_set_license_type (GtkAboutDialog *about,
  *
  * Retrieves the license set using gtk_about_dialog_set_license_type()
  *
- * Return value: a #GtkLicense value
+ * Returns: a #GtkLicense value
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkaccelmap.c b/gtk/gtkaccelmap.c
index 0cfef38992..791a593c7c 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkaccelmap.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkaccelmap.c
@@ -1032,7 +1032,7 @@ gtk_accel_map_init (GtkAccelMap *accel_map)
  * map via the ::changed signal; it isn’t a parameter to the
  * other accelerator map functions.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the global #GtkAccelMap object
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the global #GtkAccelMap object
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkactionbar.c b/gtk/gtkactionbar.c
index 994a078be6..b951b37ce4 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkactionbar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkactionbar.c
@@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ gtk_action_bar_set_center_widget (GtkActionBar *action_bar,
  *
  * Retrieves the center bar widget of the bar.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the center #GtkWidget.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the center #GtkWidget.
  *
  * Since: 3.12
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkadjustment.c b/gtk/gtkadjustment.c
index f550500a8f..9a5087dd23 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkadjustment.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkadjustment.c
@@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ gtk_adjustment_new (gdouble value,
  * Gets the current value of the adjustment. See
  * gtk_adjustment_set_value ().
  *
- * Return value: The current value of the adjustment.
+ * Returns: The current value of the adjustment.
  **/
 gdouble
 gtk_adjustment_get_value (GtkAdjustment *adjustment)
@@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ gtk_adjustment_set_value (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
  *
  * Retrieves the minimum value of the adjustment.
  *
- * Return value: The current minimum value of the adjustment.
+ * Returns: The current minimum value of the adjustment.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ gtk_adjustment_set_lower (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
  *
  * Retrieves the maximum value of the adjustment.
  *
- * Return value: The current maximum value of the adjustment.
+ * Returns: The current maximum value of the adjustment.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ gtk_adjustment_set_upper (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
  *
  * Retrieves the step increment of the adjustment.
  *
- * Return value: The current step increment of the adjustment.
+ * Returns: The current step increment of the adjustment.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ gtk_adjustment_set_step_increment (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
  *
  * Retrieves the page increment of the adjustment.
  *
- * Return value: The current page increment of the adjustment.
+ * Returns: The current page increment of the adjustment.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -622,7 +622,7 @@ gtk_adjustment_set_page_increment (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
  *
  * Retrieves the page size of the adjustment.
  *
- * Return value: The current page size of the adjustment.
+ * Returns: The current page size of the adjustment.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkassistant.c b/gtk/gtkassistant.c
index 5a2c9b7777..8b997c2be0 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkassistant.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkassistant.c
@@ -1457,7 +1457,7 @@ gtk_assistant_remove (GtkContainer *container,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkAssistant.
  *
- * Return value: a newly created #GtkAssistant
+ * Returns: a newly created #GtkAssistant
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1477,7 +1477,7 @@ gtk_assistant_new (void)
  *
  * Returns the page number of the current page.
  *
- * Return value: The index (starting from 0) of the current
+ * Returns: The index (starting from 0) of the current
  *     page in the @assistant, or -1 if the @assistant has no pages,
  *     or no current page.
  *
@@ -1622,7 +1622,7 @@ gtk_assistant_previous_page (GtkAssistant *assistant)
  *
  * Returns the number of pages in the @assistant
  *
- * Return value: the number of pages in the @assistant
+ * Returns: the number of pages in the @assistant
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1646,7 +1646,7 @@ gtk_assistant_get_n_pages (GtkAssistant *assistant)
  *
  * Returns the child widget contained in page number @page_num.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the child widget, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the child widget, or %NULL
  *     if @page_num is out of bounds
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1684,7 +1684,7 @@ gtk_assistant_get_nth_page (GtkAssistant *assistant,
  *
  * Prepends a page to the @assistant.
  *
- * Return value: the index (starting at 0) of the inserted page
+ * Returns: the index (starting at 0) of the inserted page
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1705,7 +1705,7 @@ gtk_assistant_prepend_page (GtkAssistant *assistant,
  *
  * Appends a page to the @assistant.
  *
- * Return value: the index (starting at 0) of the inserted page
+ * Returns: the index (starting at 0) of the inserted page
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1728,7 +1728,7 @@ gtk_assistant_append_page (GtkAssistant *assistant,
  *
  * Inserts a page in the @assistant at a given position.
  *
- * Return value: the index (starting from 0) of the inserted page
+ * Returns: the index (starting from 0) of the inserted page
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -2000,7 +2000,7 @@ gtk_assistant_set_page_title (GtkAssistant *assistant,
  *
  * Gets the title for @page.
  *
- * Return value: the title for @page
+ * Returns: the title for @page
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -2079,7 +2079,7 @@ gtk_assistant_set_page_type (GtkAssistant         *assistant,
  *
  * Gets the page type of @page.
  *
- * Return value: the page type of @page
+ * Returns: the page type of @page
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -2163,7 +2163,7 @@ gtk_assistant_do_set_page_header_image (GtkAssistant *assistant,
  *
  * Gets the header image for @page.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the header image for @page,
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the header image for @page,
  *     or %NULL if there’s no header image for the page
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -2254,7 +2254,7 @@ gtk_assistant_do_set_page_side_image (GtkAssistant *assistant,
  *
  * Gets the side image for @page.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the side image for @page,
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the side image for @page,
  *     or %NULL if there’s no side image for the page
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -2332,7 +2332,7 @@ gtk_assistant_set_page_complete (GtkAssistant *assistant,
  *
  * Gets whether @page is complete.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @page is complete.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @page is complete.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkbbox.c b/gtk/gtkbbox.c
index fafcea74ca..02d0b0e279 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkbbox.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkbbox.c
@@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ gtk_button_box_get_layout (GtkButtonBox *widget)
  *
  * Returns whether @child should appear in a secondary group of children.
  *
- * Return value: whether @child should appear in a secondary group of children.
+ * Returns: whether @child should appear in a secondary group of children.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -1136,7 +1136,7 @@ gtk_button_box_size_allocate (GtkWidget     *widget,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkButtonBox.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkButtonBox.
+ * Returns: a new #GtkButtonBox.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkbin.c b/gtk/gtkbin.c
index 86d1742cb8..9d7a0502e6 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkbin.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkbin.c
@@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ gtk_bin_size_allocate (GtkWidget     *widget,
  * no child widget. The returned widget does not have a reference
  * added, so you do not need to unref it.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): pointer to child of the #GtkBin
+ * Returns: (transfer none): pointer to child of the #GtkBin
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_bin_get_child (GtkBin *bin)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkbindings.c b/gtk/gtkbindings.c
index 1741bc1e30..11ce5d3813 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkbindings.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkbindings.c
@@ -684,7 +684,7 @@ gtk_binding_entry_activate (GtkBindingEntry *entry,
  * GTK+ maintains a global list of binding sets. Each binding set has
  * a unique name which needs to be specified upon creation.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): new binding set
+ * Returns: (transfer full): new binding set
  */
 GtkBindingSet*
 gtk_binding_set_new (const gchar *set_name)
@@ -715,7 +715,7 @@ gtk_binding_set_new (const gchar *set_name)
  * the passed in class structure. New binding sets are created on
  * demand by this function.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the binding set corresponding to
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the binding set corresponding to
  *     @object_class
  */
 GtkBindingSet*
@@ -766,7 +766,7 @@ gtk_binding_set_find_interned (const gchar *set_name)
  * The @set_name can either be a name used for gtk_binding_set_new()
  * or the type name of a class used in gtk_binding_set_by_class().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): %NULL or the specified binding set
+ * Returns: (transfer none): %NULL or the specified binding set
  */
 GtkBindingSet*
 gtk_binding_set_find (const gchar *set_name)
@@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ gtk_binding_set_find (const gchar *set_name)
  * Find a key binding matching @keyval and @modifiers within
  * @binding_set and activate the binding on @object.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if a binding was found and activated
+ * Returns: %TRUE if a binding was found and activated
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_binding_set_activate (GtkBindingSet  *binding_set,
@@ -1605,7 +1605,7 @@ gtk_bindings_activate_list (GObject  *object,
  * Find a key binding matching @keyval and @modifiers and activate the
  * binding on @object.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if a binding was found and activated
+ * Returns: %TRUE if a binding was found and activated
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_bindings_activate (GObject         *object,
@@ -1644,7 +1644,7 @@ gtk_bindings_activate (GObject         *object,
  * Looks up key bindings for @object to find one matching
  * @event, and if one was found, activate it.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if a matching key binding was found
+ * Returns: %TRUE if a matching key binding was found
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkbox.c b/gtk/gtkbox.c
index 9fa7f32d40..6b9391eb8c 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkbox.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkbox.c
@@ -2000,7 +2000,7 @@ gtk_box_get_preferred_height_for_width (GtkWidget *widget,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkBox.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkBox.
+ * Returns: a new #GtkBox.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
@@ -2113,7 +2113,7 @@ gtk_box_set_homogeneous (GtkBox  *box,
  * Returns whether the box is homogeneous (all children are the
  * same size). See gtk_box_set_homogeneous().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the box is homogeneous.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the box is homogeneous.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_box_get_homogeneous (GtkBox *box)
@@ -2158,7 +2158,7 @@ gtk_box_set_spacing (GtkBox *box,
  *
  * Gets the value set by gtk_box_set_spacing().
  *
- * Return value: spacing between children
+ * Returns: spacing between children
  **/
 gint
 gtk_box_get_spacing (GtkBox *box)
@@ -2208,7 +2208,7 @@ gtk_box_set_baseline_position (GtkBox             *box,
  *
  * Gets the value set by gtk_box_set_baseline_position().
  *
- * Return value: the baseline position
+ * Returns: the baseline position
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  **/
@@ -2614,7 +2614,7 @@ gtk_box_set_center_widget (GtkBox    *box,
  *
  * Retrieves the center widget of the box.
  *
- * Return value: the center widget
+ * Returns: the center widget
  *
  * Since: 3.12
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkbuilder.c b/gtk/gtkbuilder.c
index 3efe9e925d..fe15875d17 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkbuilder.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkbuilder.c
@@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ _gtk_builder_finish (GtkBuilder *builder)
  * Most users will probably want to use gtk_builder_new_from_file(),
  * gtk_builder_new_from_resource() or gtk_builder_new_from_string().
  *
- * Return value: a new (empty) #GtkBuilder object
+ * Returns: a new (empty) #GtkBuilder object
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  **/
@@ -1391,7 +1391,7 @@ gtk_builder_add_objects_from_string (GtkBuilder   *builder,
  * Gets the object named @name. Note that this function does not
  * increment the reference count of the returned object. 
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the object named @name or %NULL if
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the object named @name or %NULL if
  *    it could not be found in the object tree.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
@@ -1422,7 +1422,7 @@ object_add_to_list (gchar    *object_id,
  * this function does not increment the reference counts of the returned
  * objects.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GObject) (transfer container): a newly-allocated #GSList containing all the objects
+ * Returns: (element-type GObject) (transfer container): a newly-allocated #GSList containing all the objects
  *   constructed by the #GtkBuilder instance. It should be freed by
  *   g_slist_free()
  *
@@ -1471,7 +1471,7 @@ gtk_builder_set_translation_domain (GtkBuilder  *builder,
  *
  * Gets the translation domain of @builder.
  *
- * Return value: the translation domain. This string is owned
+ * Returns: the translation domain. This string is owned
  * by the builder object and must not be modified or freed.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
diff --git a/gtk/gtkbutton.c b/gtk/gtkbutton.c
index 8cfdf39ad3..4c17f90bb0 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkbutton.c
@@ -2345,7 +2345,7 @@ gtk_button_set_label (GtkButton   *button,
  * case if you create an empty button with gtk_button_new() to 
  * use as a container.
  *
- * Return value: The text of the label widget. This string is owned
+ * Returns: The text of the label widget. This string is owned
  * by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
  **/
 const gchar *
@@ -2393,7 +2393,7 @@ gtk_button_set_use_underline (GtkButton *button,
  * Returns whether an embedded underline in the button label indicates a
  * mnemonic. See gtk_button_set_use_underline ().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if an embedded underline in the button label
+ * Returns: %TRUE if an embedded underline in the button label
  *               indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -2442,7 +2442,7 @@ gtk_button_set_use_stock (GtkButton *button,
  *
  * Returns whether the button label is a stock item.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the button label is used to
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the button label is used to
  *               select a stock item instead of being
  *               used directly as the label text.
  *
@@ -2495,7 +2495,7 @@ gtk_button_set_focus_on_click (GtkButton *button,
  * Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
  * See gtk_button_set_focus_on_click().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
  *               the mouse.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -2771,7 +2771,7 @@ gtk_button_set_image (GtkButton *button,
  * This may have been explicitly set by gtk_button_set_image()
  * or constructed by gtk_button_new_from_stock().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GtkWidget or %NULL in case there is no image
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GtkWidget or %NULL in case there is no image
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -2821,7 +2821,7 @@ gtk_button_set_image_position (GtkButton       *button,
  * Gets the position of the image relative to the text 
  * inside the button.
  *
- * Return value: the position
+ * Returns: the position
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -2898,7 +2898,7 @@ gtk_button_get_always_show_image (GtkButton *button)
  * Returns the button’s event window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise.
  * This function should be rarely needed.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): @button’s event window.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): @button’s event window.
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcalendar.c b/gtk/gtkcalendar.c
index 8e3f807971..00e6a9bfd5 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcalendar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcalendar.c
@@ -3546,7 +3546,7 @@ gtk_calendar_drag_data_received (GtkWidget        *widget,
  *
  * Creates a new calendar, with the current date being selected.
  *
- * Return value: a newly #GtkCalendar widget
+ * Returns: a newly #GtkCalendar widget
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_calendar_new (void)
@@ -3560,7 +3560,7 @@ gtk_calendar_new (void)
  *
  * Returns the current display options of @calendar.
  *
- * Return value: the display options.
+ * Returns: the display options.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -3996,7 +3996,7 @@ gtk_calendar_set_detail_height_rows (GtkCalendar *calendar,
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  *
- * Return value: The width of detail cells, in characters.
+ * Returns: The width of detail cells, in characters.
  */
 gint
 gtk_calendar_get_detail_width_chars (GtkCalendar *calendar)
@@ -4015,7 +4015,7 @@ gtk_calendar_get_detail_width_chars (GtkCalendar *calendar)
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  *
- * Return value: The height of detail cells, in rows.
+ * Returns: The height of detail cells, in rows.
  */
 gint
 gtk_calendar_get_detail_height_rows (GtkCalendar *calendar)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcalendar.h b/gtk/gtkcalendar.h
index 23c50f761d..ad4efcdfc2 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcalendar.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkcalendar.h
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ typedef enum
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  *
- * Return value: Newly allocated string with Pango markup with details
+ * Returns: Newly allocated string with Pango markup with details
  * for the specified day, or %NULL.
  */
 typedef gchar* (*GtkCalendarDetailFunc) (GtkCalendar *calendar,
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellarea.c b/gtk/gtkcellarea.c
index 7b283d6fc0..09d7654d85 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellarea.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellarea.c
@@ -1701,7 +1701,7 @@ get_has_renderer (GtkCellRenderer  *renderer,
  *
  * Checks if @area contains @renderer.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @renderer is in the @area.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @renderer is in the @area.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1786,7 +1786,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_foreach_alloc (GtkCellArea          *area,
  *
  * Delegates event handling to a #GtkCellArea.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the event was handled by @area.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the event was handled by @area.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1941,7 +1941,7 @@ get_cell_by_position (GtkCellRenderer     *renderer,
  * Gets the #GtkCellRenderer at @x and @y coordinates inside @area and optionally
  * returns the full cell allocation for it inside @cell_area.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkCellRenderer at @x and @y.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GtkCellRenderer at @x and @y.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1986,7 +1986,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_get_cell_at_position (GtkCellArea          *area,
  * one should render and handle events with the same #GtkCellAreaContext
  * which was used to request the size of those rows of data).
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a newly created #GtkCellAreaContext which can be used with @area.
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a newly created #GtkCellAreaContext which can be used with @area.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -2015,7 +2015,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_create_context (GtkCellArea *area)
  * was already used to request all the row widths that are
  * to be displayed.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a newly created #GtkCellAreaContext copy of @context.
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a newly created #GtkCellAreaContext copy of @context.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -2036,7 +2036,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_copy_context (GtkCellArea        *area,
  * Gets whether the area prefers a height-for-width layout
  * or a width-for-height layout.
  *
- * Return value: The #GtkSizeRequestMode preferred by @area.
+ * Returns: The #GtkSizeRequestMode preferred by @area.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -2357,7 +2357,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (GtkCellArea  *area,
  * used to interact with renderers from #GtkCellArea
  * subclasses.
  *
- * Return value: The current #GtkTreePath string for the current
+ * Returns: The current #GtkTreePath string for the current
  * attributes applied to @area. This string belongs to the area and
  * should not be freed.
  *
@@ -2423,7 +2423,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_class_install_cell_property (GtkCellAreaClass   *aclass,
  *
  * Finds a cell property of a cell area class by name.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GParamSpec of the child property
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GParamSpec of the child property
  *   or %NULL if @aclass has no child property with that name.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -2448,7 +2448,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_class_find_cell_property (GtkCellAreaClass   *aclass,
  *
  * Returns all cell properties of a cell area class.
  *
- * Return value: (array length=n_properties) (transfer container): a newly
+ * Returns: (array length=n_properties) (transfer container): a newly
  *     allocated %NULL-terminated array of #GParamSpec*.  The array
  *     must be freed with g_free().
  *
@@ -2852,7 +2852,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_cell_get_property (GtkCellArea        *area,
  * Returns whether the area can do anything when activated,
  * after applying new attributes to @area.
  *
- * Return value: whether @area can do anything when activated.
+ * Returns: whether @area can do anything when activated.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -2877,7 +2877,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_is_activatable (GtkCellArea *area)
  * method to receive and navigate focus in its own way particular
  * to how it lays out cells.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if focus remains inside @area as a result of this call.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if focus remains inside @area as a result of this call.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -2904,7 +2904,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_focus (GtkCellArea      *area,
  * cell, however some subclasses which embed widgets in the area
  * can also activate a widget if it currently has the focus.
  *
- * Return value: Whether @area was successfully activated.
+ * Returns: Whether @area was successfully activated.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -2974,7 +2974,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_set_focus_cell (GtkCellArea     *area,
  *
  * Retrieves the currently focused cell for @area
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the currently focused cell in @area.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the currently focused cell in @area.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -3090,7 +3090,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_remove_focus_sibling (GtkCellArea     *area,
  * Returns whether @sibling is one of @renderer’s focus siblings
  * (see gtk_cell_area_add_focus_sibling()).
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @sibling is a focus sibling of @renderer
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @sibling is a focus sibling of @renderer
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -3128,7 +3128,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_is_focus_sibling (GtkCellArea     *area,
  *
  * Gets the focus sibling cell renderers for @renderer.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkCellRenderer) (transfer none): A #GList of #GtkCellRenderers.
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkCellRenderer) (transfer none): A #GList of #GtkCellRenderers.
  *       The returned list is internal and should not be freed.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -3160,7 +3160,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_get_focus_siblings (GtkCellArea     *area,
  * then chose to activate the focus cell for which the event
  * cell may have been a sibling.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkCellRenderer for which @renderer
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GtkCellRenderer for which @renderer
  *    is a sibling, or %NULL.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -3304,7 +3304,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_set_edit_widget (GtkCellArea     *area,
  * Gets the #GtkCellRenderer in @area that is currently
  * being edited.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The currently edited #GtkCellRenderer
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The currently edited #GtkCellRenderer
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -3327,7 +3327,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_get_edited_cell (GtkCellArea *area)
  * Gets the #GtkCellEditable widget currently used
  * to edit the currently edited cell.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The currently active #GtkCellEditable widget
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The currently active #GtkCellEditable widget
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -3358,7 +3358,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_get_edit_widget (GtkCellArea *area)
  * for keyboard events for free in its own GtkCellArea->activate()
  * implementation.
  *
- * Return value: whether cell activation was successful
+ * Returns: whether cell activation was successful
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellarea.h b/gtk/gtkcellarea.h
index d82b2cf842..ed73d99da0 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellarea.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellarea.h
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ typedef struct _GtkCellAreaContext       GtkCellAreaContext;
  * The type of the callback functions used for iterating over
  * the cell renderers of a #GtkCellArea, see gtk_cell_area_foreach().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE to stop iterating over cells.
+ * Returns: %TRUE to stop iterating over cells.
  */
 typedef gboolean    (*GtkCellCallback) (GtkCellRenderer  *renderer,
                                         gpointer          data);
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ typedef gboolean    (*GtkCellCallback) (GtkCellRenderer  *renderer,
  * cell renderers and their allocated areas inside a #GtkCellArea,
  * see gtk_cell_area_foreach_alloc().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE to stop iterating over cells.
+ * Returns: %TRUE to stop iterating over cells.
  */
 typedef gboolean    (*GtkCellAllocCallback) (GtkCellRenderer    *renderer,
                                              const GdkRectangle *cell_area,
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellareabox.c b/gtk/gtkcellareabox.c
index ec1f89d0b7..05ec4bb957 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellareabox.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellareabox.c
@@ -2117,7 +2117,7 @@ _gtk_cell_area_box_group_visible (GtkCellAreaBox  *box,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkCellAreaBox.
  *
- * Return value: a newly created #GtkCellAreaBox
+ * Returns: a newly created #GtkCellAreaBox
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -2223,7 +2223,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_box_pack_end (GtkCellAreaBox  *box,
  *
  * Gets the spacing added between cell renderers.
  *
- * Return value: the space added between cell renderers in @box.
+ * Returns: the space added between cell renderers in @box.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellareacontext.c b/gtk/gtkcellareacontext.c
index f704e953a2..fcdedeee16 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellareacontext.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellareacontext.c
@@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ gtk_cell_area_context_real_allocate (GtkCellAreaContext *context,
  * that the #GtkCellArea is configured with in order to
  * compute a proper allocation.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkCellArea this context was created by.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GtkCellArea this context was created by.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcelllayout.c b/gtk/gtkcelllayout.c
index a666cd8e34..af9cee5be3 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcelllayout.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcelllayout.c
@@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ gtk_cell_layout_reorder (GtkCellLayout   *cell_layout,
  *
  * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to @cell_layout.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkCellRenderer) (transfer container):
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkCellRenderer) (transfer container):
  *     a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the renderers has
  *     been newly allocated and should be freed with g_list_free()
  *     when no longer needed.
@@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ gtk_cell_layout_get_cells (GtkCellLayout *cell_layout)
  * if called on a #GtkCellArea or might be %NULL if no #GtkCellArea
  * is used by @cell_layout.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the cell area used by @cell_layout.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the cell area used by @cell_layout.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellrenderer.c b/gtk/gtkcellrenderer.c
index 3afcabc32e..67b6909e70 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellrenderer.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellrenderer.c
@@ -799,7 +799,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_render (GtkCellRenderer      *cell,
  * Some cell renderers may use events; for example, #GtkCellRendererToggle 
  * toggles when it gets a mouse click.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the event was consumed/handled
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the event was consumed/handled
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_cell_renderer_activate (GtkCellRenderer      *cell,
@@ -844,7 +844,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_activate (GtkCellRenderer      *cell,
  *
  * Passes an activate event to the cell renderer for possible processing.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A new #GtkCellEditable, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A new #GtkCellEditable, or %NULL
  **/
 GtkCellEditable *
 gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing (GtkCellRenderer      *cell,
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellrendererpixbuf.c b/gtk/gtkcellrendererpixbuf.c
index d4c1b025b8..2271457d7f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellrendererpixbuf.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellrendererpixbuf.c
@@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_pixbuf_set_property (GObject      *object,
  * in the model, thus rendering a different image in each row of the
  * #GtkTreeView.
  * 
- * Return value: the new cell renderer
+ * Returns: the new cell renderer
  **/
 GtkCellRenderer *
 gtk_cell_renderer_pixbuf_new (void)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellrendererprogress.c b/gtk/gtkcellrendererprogress.c
index 331254c8c2..6c011768ad 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellrendererprogress.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellrendererprogress.c
@@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_progress_init (GtkCellRendererProgress *cellprogress)
  * 
  * Creates a new #GtkCellRendererProgress. 
  *
- * Return value: the new cell renderer
+ * Returns: the new cell renderer
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellrendererspinner.c b/gtk/gtkcellrendererspinner.c
index f38fce15d9..a9a50af820 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellrendererspinner.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellrendererspinner.c
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_spinner_init (GtkCellRendererSpinner *cell)
  * Returns a new cell renderer which will show a spinner to indicate
  * activity.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkCellRenderer
+ * Returns: a new #GtkCellRenderer
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellrenderertext.c b/gtk/gtkcellrenderertext.c
index 34c594340c..fc17b38014 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellrenderertext.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellrenderertext.c
@@ -1553,7 +1553,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_text_set_property (GObject      *object,
  * value in the model, thus rendering a different string in each row
  * of the #GtkTreeView
  * 
- * Return value: the new cell renderer
+ * Returns: the new cell renderer
  **/
 GtkCellRenderer *
 gtk_cell_renderer_text_new (void)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellrenderertoggle.c b/gtk/gtkcellrenderertoggle.c
index e0b7f92108..57f263cb31 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellrenderertoggle.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellrenderertoggle.c
@@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_property (GObject      *object,
  * in the model, thus causing the check button to reflect the state of
  * the model.
  *
- * Return value: the new cell renderer
+ * Returns: the new cell renderer
  **/
 GtkCellRenderer *
 gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_new (void)
@@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_radio (GtkCellRendererToggle *toggle,
  *
  * Returns whether we’re rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes. 
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if we’re rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
+ * Returns: %TRUE if we’re rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_radio (GtkCellRendererToggle *toggle)
@@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_radio (GtkCellRendererToggle *toggle)
  * Returns whether the cell renderer is active. See
  * gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_active().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_active (GtkCellRendererToggle *toggle)
@@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_active (GtkCellRendererToggle *toggle,
  * Returns whether the cell renderer is activatable. See
  * gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_activatable().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the cell renderer is activatable.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the cell renderer is activatable.
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcellview.c b/gtk/gtkcellview.c
index f577dcd14b..5870f1031f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcellview.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcellview.c
@@ -936,7 +936,7 @@ row_changed_cb (GtkTreeModel         *model,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkCellView widget.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ gtk_cell_view_new (void)
  * in this way alignments with cellviews for other rows are
  * possible.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -988,7 +988,7 @@ gtk_cell_view_new_with_context (GtkCellArea        *area,
  * Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererText 
  * to it, and makes it show @text.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -1021,7 +1021,7 @@ gtk_cell_view_new_with_text (const gchar *text)
  * to it, and makes it show @markup. The text can be
  * marked up with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -1053,7 +1053,7 @@ gtk_cell_view_new_with_markup (const gchar *markup)
  * Creates a new #GtkCellView widget, adds a #GtkCellRendererPixbuf
  * to it, and makes it show @pixbuf.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkCellView widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -1234,7 +1234,7 @@ gtk_cell_view_get_displayed_row (GtkCellView *cell_view)
  * Sets @requisition to the size needed by @cell_view to display 
  * the model row pointed to by @path.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE
+ * Returns: %TRUE
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  * 
@@ -1356,7 +1356,7 @@ gtk_cell_view_set_background_rgba (GtkCellView   *cell_view,
  * Gets whether @cell_view is configured to draw all of its
  * cells in a sensitive state.
  *
- * Return value: whether @cell_view draws all of its
+ * Returns: whether @cell_view draws all of its
  * cells in a sensitive state
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -1410,7 +1410,7 @@ gtk_cell_view_set_draw_sensitive (GtkCellView     *cell_view,
  * Gets whether @cell_view is configured to request space
  * to fit the entire #GtkTreeModel.
  *
- * Return value: whether @cell_view requests space to fit
+ * Returns: whether @cell_view requests space to fit
  * the entire #GtkTreeModel.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcheckmenuitem.c b/gtk/gtkcheckmenuitem.c
index 7137bc7a42..d79088ccaf 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcheckmenuitem.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcheckmenuitem.c
@@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ gtk_check_menu_item_set_active (GtkCheckMenuItem *check_menu_item,
  * Returns whether the check menu item is active. See
  * gtk_check_menu_item_set_active ().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the menu item is checked.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the menu item is checked.
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_check_menu_item_get_active (GtkCheckMenuItem *check_menu_item)
@@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent (GtkCheckMenuItem *check_menu_item,
  * 
  * Retrieves the value set by gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if inconsistent
+ * Returns: %TRUE if inconsistent
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_check_menu_item_get_inconsistent (GtkCheckMenuItem *check_menu_item)
@@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ gtk_check_menu_item_set_draw_as_radio (GtkCheckMenuItem *check_menu_item,
  * 
  * Returns whether @check_menu_item looks like a #GtkRadioMenuItem
  * 
- * Return value: Whether @check_menu_item looks like a #GtkRadioMenuItem
+ * Returns: Whether @check_menu_item looks like a #GtkRadioMenuItem
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkclipboard.c b/gtk/gtkclipboard.c
index b7611c53d2..9c8bc1eb75 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkclipboard.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkclipboard.c
@@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ clipboard_display_closed (GdkDisplay   *display,
  * if your application called “Foo” has a special-purpose
  * clipboard, you might call it “_FOO_SPECIAL_CLIPBOARD”.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the appropriate clipboard object. If no
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the appropriate clipboard object. If no
  *   clipboard already exists, a new one will be created. Once a clipboard
  *   object has been created, it is persistent and, since it is owned by
  *   GTK+, must not be freed or unrefd.
@@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ gtk_clipboard_get_for_display (GdkDisplay *display,
  * Returns the clipboard object for the given selection.
  * See gtk_clipboard_get_for_display() for complete details.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the appropriate clipboard object. If no clipboard
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the appropriate clipboard object. If no clipboard
  *     already exists, a new one will be created. Once a clipboard
  *     object has been created, it is persistent and, since it is
  *     owned by GTK+, must not be freed or unreffed.
@@ -639,7 +639,7 @@ gtk_clipboard_set_contents (GtkClipboard         *clipboard,
  * a list of supported formats for the clipboard data and a function
  * to call to get the actual data when it is requested.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if setting the clipboard data succeeded.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if setting the clipboard data succeeded.
  *    If setting the clipboard data failed the provided callback
  *    functions will be ignored.
  **/
@@ -685,7 +685,7 @@ gtk_clipboard_set_with_data (GtkClipboard          *clipboard,
  * is that instead of an generic @user_data pointer, a #GObject is passed
  * in.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if setting the clipboard data succeeded.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if setting the clipboard data succeeded.
  *     If setting the clipboard data failed the provided callback
  *     functions will be ignored.
  **/
@@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner (GtkClipboard          *clipboard,
  * gtk_clipboard_clear() has not subsequently called, returns the owner set
  * by gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the owner of the clipboard, if any;
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the owner of the clipboard, if any;
  *     otherwise %NULL.
  **/
 GObject *
@@ -1385,7 +1385,7 @@ clipboard_received_func (GtkClipboard     *clipboard,
  * This function waits for the data to be received using the main 
  * loop, so events, timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
  * 
- * Return value: a newly-allocated #GtkSelectionData object or %NULL
+ * Returns: a newly-allocated #GtkSelectionData object or %NULL
  *               if retrieving the given target failed. If non-%NULL,
  *               this value must be freed with gtk_selection_data_free() 
  *               when you are finished with it.
@@ -1438,7 +1438,7 @@ clipboard_text_received_func (GtkClipboard *clipboard,
  * the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
  * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
  * 
- * Return value: a newly-allocated UTF-8 string which must
+ * Returns: a newly-allocated UTF-8 string which must
  *               be freed with g_free(), or %NULL if retrieving
  *               the selection data failed. (This could happen
  *               for various reasons, in particular if the
@@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ clipboard_rich_text_received_func (GtkClipboard *clipboard,
  * waits for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
  * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
  *
- * Return value: (array length=length) (transfer full): a
+ * Returns: (array length=length) (transfer full): a
  *               newly-allocated binary block of data which must be
  *               freed with g_free(), or %NULL if retrieving the
  *               selection data failed. (This could happen for various
@@ -1564,7 +1564,7 @@ clipboard_image_received_func (GtkClipboard *clipboard,
  * the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
  * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a newly-allocated #GdkPixbuf
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a newly-allocated #GdkPixbuf
  *     object which must be disposed with g_object_unref(), or
  *     %NULL if retrieving the selection data failed. (This could
  *     happen for various reasons, in particular if the clipboard
@@ -1618,7 +1618,7 @@ clipboard_uris_received_func (GtkClipboard *clipboard,
  * for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
  * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
  *
- * Return value: (array zero-terminated=1) (element-type utf8) (transfer full): a newly-allocated
+ * Returns: (array zero-terminated=1) (element-type utf8) (transfer full): a newly-allocated
  * 		 %NULL-terminated array of strings which must
  *               be freed with g_strfreev(), or %NULL if
  *               retrieving the selection data failed. (This
@@ -1660,7 +1660,7 @@ gtk_clipboard_wait_for_uris (GtkClipboard *clipboard)
  *
  * Gets the #GdkDisplay associated with @clipboard
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkDisplay associated with @clipboard
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GdkDisplay associated with @clipboard
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -1686,7 +1686,7 @@ gtk_clipboard_get_display (GtkClipboard *clipboard)
  * gtk_clipboard_wait_for_text() since it doesn’t need to retrieve
  * the actual text.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE is there is text available, %FALSE otherwise.
+ * Returns: %TRUE is there is text available, %FALSE otherwise.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_clipboard_wait_is_text_available (GtkClipboard *clipboard)
@@ -1719,7 +1719,7 @@ gtk_clipboard_wait_is_text_available (GtkClipboard *clipboard)
  * gtk_clipboard_wait_for_rich_text() since it doesn’t need to retrieve
  * the actual text.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE is there is rich text available, %FALSE otherwise.
+ * Returns: %TRUE is there is rich text available, %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1757,7 +1757,7 @@ gtk_clipboard_wait_is_rich_text_available (GtkClipboard  *clipboard,
  * gtk_clipboard_wait_for_image() since it doesn’t need to retrieve
  * the actual image data.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE is there is an image available, %FALSE otherwise.
+ * Returns: %TRUE is there is an image available, %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -1792,7 +1792,7 @@ gtk_clipboard_wait_is_image_available (GtkClipboard *clipboard)
  * gtk_clipboard_wait_for_uris() since it doesn’t need to retrieve
  * the actual URI data.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE is there is an URI list available, %FALSE otherwise.
+ * Returns: %TRUE is there is an URI list available, %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -1827,7 +1827,7 @@ gtk_clipboard_wait_is_uris_available (GtkClipboard *clipboard)
  * This function waits for the data to be received using the main
  * loop, so events, timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if any targets are present on the clipboard,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if any targets are present on the clipboard,
  *               otherwise %FALSE.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1963,7 +1963,7 @@ gtk_clipboard_owner_change (GtkClipboard        *clipboard,
  * If you want to see if there’s text available on the clipboard, use
  * gtk_clipboard_wait_is_text_available () instead.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the target is available, %FALSE otherwise.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the target is available, %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcolorbutton.c b/gtk/gtkcolorbutton.c
index 3738908231..e1d689195b 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcolorbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcolorbutton.c
@@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ gtk_color_button_get_color (GtkColorButton *button,
  *
  * Returns the current alpha value.
  *
- * Return value: an integer between 0 and 65535
+ * Returns: an integer between 0 and 65535
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcolorchooserdialog.c b/gtk/gtkcolorchooserdialog.c
index 82e538bb3a..235c7e5a08 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcolorchooserdialog.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcolorchooserdialog.c
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ gtk_color_chooser_dialog_iface_init (GtkColorChooserInterface *iface)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkColorChooserDialog.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkColorChooserDialog
+ * Returns: a new #GtkColorChooserDialog
  *
  * Since: 3.4
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcombobox.c b/gtk/gtkcombobox.c
index cd5dca9b83..61891773f3 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcombobox.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcombobox.c
@@ -644,7 +644,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_class_init (GtkComboBoxClass *klass)
    * }
    * ]|
    *
-   * Return value: (transfer full): a newly allocated string representing @path 
+   * Returns: (transfer full): a newly allocated string representing @path 
    * for the current GtkComboBox model.
    *
    * Since: 3.4
@@ -3987,7 +3987,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_cell_layout_get_area (GtkCellLayout *cell_layout)
  *
  * Creates a new empty #GtkComboBox.
  *
- * Return value: A new #GtkComboBox.
+ * Returns: A new #GtkComboBox.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -4003,7 +4003,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_new (void)
  *
  * Creates a new empty #GtkComboBox using @area to layout cells.
  *
- * Return value: A new #GtkComboBox.
+ * Returns: A new #GtkComboBox.
  */
 GtkWidget *
 gtk_combo_box_new_with_area (GtkCellArea  *area)
@@ -4019,7 +4019,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_new_with_area (GtkCellArea  *area)
  *
  * The new combo box will use @area to layout cells.
  *
- * Return value: A new #GtkComboBox.
+ * Returns: A new #GtkComboBox.
  */
 GtkWidget *
 gtk_combo_box_new_with_area_and_entry (GtkCellArea *area)
@@ -4036,7 +4036,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_new_with_area_and_entry (GtkCellArea *area)
  *
  * Creates a new empty #GtkComboBox with an entry.
  *
- * Return value: A new #GtkComboBox.
+ * Returns: A new #GtkComboBox.
  *
  * Since: 2.24
  */
@@ -4052,7 +4052,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_new_with_entry (void)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkComboBox with the model initialized to @model.
  *
- * Return value: A new #GtkComboBox.
+ * Returns: A new #GtkComboBox.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -4075,7 +4075,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_new_with_model (GtkTreeModel *model)
  * Creates a new empty #GtkComboBox with an entry
  * and with the model initialized to @model.
  *
- * Return value: A new #GtkComboBox
+ * Returns: A new #GtkComboBox
  *
  * Since: 2.24
  */
@@ -4261,7 +4261,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_set_column_span_column (GtkComboBox *combo_box,
  * `gtk_tree_path_get_indices (path)[0]`, where
  * `path` is the #GtkTreePath of the active item.
  *
- * Return value: An integer which is the index of the currently active item,
+ * Returns: An integer which is the index of the currently active item,
  *     or -1 if there’s no active item.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -4409,7 +4409,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_set_active_internal (GtkComboBox *combo_box,
  *
  * Sets @iter to point to the current active item, if it exists.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE, if @iter was set
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if @iter was set
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -4544,7 +4544,7 @@ out:
  *
  * Returns the #GtkTreeModel which is acting as data source for @combo_box.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GtkTreeModel which was passed
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GtkTreeModel which was passed
  *     during construction.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -5015,7 +5015,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_start_editing (GtkCellEditable *cell_editable,
  *
  * Gets the current value of the :add-tearoffs property.
  *
- * Return value: the current value of the :add-tearoffs property.
+ * Returns: the current value of the :add-tearoffs property.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10
  */
@@ -5209,7 +5209,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_get_popup_accessible (GtkComboBox *combo_box)
  *
  * Returns the current row separator function.
  *
- * Return value: the current row separator function.
+ * Returns: the current row separator function.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -5298,7 +5298,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_set_button_sensitivity (GtkComboBox        *combo_box,
  * Returns whether the combo box sets the dropdown button
  * sensitive or not when there are no items in the model.
  *
- * Return Value: %GTK_SENSITIVITY_ON if the dropdown button
+ * Returns: %GTK_SENSITIVITY_ON if the dropdown button
  *    is sensitive when the model is empty, %GTK_SENSITIVITY_OFF
  *    if the button is always insensitive or
  *    %GTK_SENSITIVITY_AUTO if it is only sensitive as long as
@@ -5321,7 +5321,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_get_button_sensitivity (GtkComboBox *combo_box)
  *
  * Returns whether the combo box has an entry.
  *
- * Return Value: whether there is an entry in @combo_box.
+ * Returns: whether there is an entry in @combo_box.
  *
  * Since: 2.24
  **/
@@ -5378,7 +5378,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_set_entry_text_column (GtkComboBox *combo_box,
  * Returns the column which @combo_box is using to get the strings
  * from to display in the internal entry.
  *
- * Return value: A column in the data source model of @combo_box.
+ * Returns: A column in the data source model of @combo_box.
  *
  * Since: 2.24
  */
@@ -5430,7 +5430,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_set_focus_on_click (GtkComboBox *combo_box,
  * Returns whether the combo box grabs focus when it is clicked
  * with the mouse. See gtk_combo_box_set_focus_on_click().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the combo box grabs focus when it is
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the combo box grabs focus when it is
  *     clicked with the mouse.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
@@ -5775,7 +5775,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_set_id_column (GtkComboBox *combo_box,
  * Returns the column which @combo_box is using to get string IDs
  * for values from.
  *
- * Return value: A column in the data source model of @combo_box.
+ * Returns: A column in the data source model of @combo_box.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -5803,7 +5803,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_get_id_column (GtkComboBox *combo_box)
  * no row is active, or if the active row has a %NULL ID value, then %NULL
  * is returned.
  *
- * Return value: the ID of the active row, or %NULL
+ * Returns: the ID of the active row, or %NULL
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcomboboxtext.c b/gtk/gtkcomboboxtext.c
index f07a186e58..9ac057d5e8 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcomboboxtext.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcomboboxtext.c
@@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_text_buildable_custom_finished (GtkBuildable *buildable,
  * Creates a new #GtkComboBoxText, which is a #GtkComboBox just displaying
  * strings.
  *
- * Return value: A new #GtkComboBoxText
+ * Returns: A new #GtkComboBoxText
  *
  * Since: 2.24
  */
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ gtk_combo_box_text_new (void)
  * Creates a new #GtkComboBoxText, which is a #GtkComboBox just displaying
  * strings. The combo box created by this function has an entry.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkComboBoxText
+ * Returns: a new #GtkComboBoxText
  *
  * Since: 2.24
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkcontainer.c b/gtk/gtkcontainer.c
index c65a828504..14031397ff 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkcontainer.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkcontainer.c
@@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ gtk_container_buildable_custom_tag_end (GtkBuildable *buildable,
  * children can be added, e.g. for a #GtkPaned which already has two
  * children.
  *
- * Return value: a #GType.
+ * Returns: a #GType.
  **/
 GType
 gtk_container_child_type (GtkContainer *container)
@@ -1505,7 +1505,7 @@ gtk_container_set_border_width (GtkContainer *container,
  * Retrieves the border width of the container. See
  * gtk_container_set_border_width().
  *
- * Return value: the current border width
+ * Returns: the current border width
  **/
 guint
 gtk_container_get_border_width (GtkContainer *container)
@@ -1641,7 +1641,7 @@ gtk_container_set_resize_mode (GtkContainer  *container,
  * Returns the resize mode for the container. See
  * gtk_container_set_resize_mode ().
  *
- * Return value: the current resize mode
+ * Returns: the current resize mode
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.12: Resize modes are deprecated. They aren’t necessary
  *     anymore since frame clocks and might introduce obscure bugs if
@@ -2228,7 +2228,7 @@ gtk_container_get_focus_child (GtkContainer *container)
  * Returns the container’s non-internal children. See
  * gtk_container_forall() for details on what constitutes an "internal" child.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer container): a newly-allocated list of the container’s non-internal children.
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer container): a newly-allocated list of the container’s non-internal children.
  **/
 GList*
 gtk_container_get_children (GtkContainer *container)
@@ -2934,7 +2934,7 @@ gtk_container_focus_sort_left_right (GtkContainer     *container,
  * Sorts @children in the correct order for focusing with
  * direction type @direction.
  *
- * Return value: a copy of @children, sorted in correct focusing order,
+ * Returns: a copy of @children, sorted in correct focusing order,
  *   with children that aren’t suitable for focusing in this direction
  *   removed.
  **/
@@ -3122,7 +3122,7 @@ gtk_container_set_focus_chain (GtkContainer *container,
  * of the children. In that case, GTK+ stores %NULL in
  * @focusable_widgets and returns %FALSE.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the focus chain of the container
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the focus chain of the container
  * has been set explicitly.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -3228,7 +3228,7 @@ gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment (GtkContainer  *container,
  * Retrieves the vertical focus adjustment for the container. See
  * gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the vertical focus adjustment, or %NULL if
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the vertical focus adjustment, or %NULL if
  *   none has been set.
  **/
 GtkAdjustment *
@@ -3283,7 +3283,7 @@ gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment (GtkContainer  *container,
  * Retrieves the horizontal focus adjustment for the container. See
  * gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment ().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the horizontal focus adjustment, or %NULL if
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the horizontal focus adjustment, or %NULL if
  *   none has been set.
  **/
 GtkAdjustment *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkdialog.c b/gtk/gtkdialog.c
index 5eb83b9da4..7efdebd870 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkdialog.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkdialog.c
@@ -875,7 +875,7 @@ gtk_dialog_new_empty (const gchar     *title,
  *                                        NULL);
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkDialog
+ * Returns: a new #GtkDialog
  */
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons (const gchar    *title,
@@ -969,7 +969,7 @@ gtk_dialog_add_action_widget (GtkDialog *dialog,
  * dialog’s action area. The button widget is returned, but usually
  * you don’t need it.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkButton widget that was added
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GtkButton widget that was added
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_dialog_add_button (GtkDialog   *dialog,
@@ -1263,7 +1263,7 @@ run_destroy_handler (GtkDialog *dialog, gpointer data)
  * such as timeouts, IO channel watches, DND drops, etc, will
  * be triggered during a gtk_dialog_run() call.
  *
- * Return value: response ID
+ * Returns: response ID
  **/
 gint
 gtk_dialog_run (GtkDialog *dialog)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkdnd.c b/gtk/gtkdnd.c
index 29eb74dbb9..308e146f32 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkdnd.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkdnd.c
@@ -1154,7 +1154,7 @@ gtk_drag_get_data (GtkWidget      *widget,
  *
  * Determines the source widget for a drag.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): if the drag is occurring
+ * Returns: (transfer none): if the drag is occurring
  *     within a single application, a pointer to the source widget.
  *     Otherwise, %NULL.
  */
@@ -1498,7 +1498,7 @@ gtk_drag_dest_unset (GtkWidget *widget)
  * Returns the list of targets this widget can accept from
  * drag-and-drop.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
  **/
 GtkTargetList*
 gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -1664,7 +1664,7 @@ gtk_drag_dest_set_track_motion (GtkWidget *widget,
  * Returns whether the widget has been configured to always
  * emit #GtkWidget::drag-motion signals.
  *
- * Return Value: %TRUE if the widget always emits
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the widget always emits
  *   #GtkWidget::drag-motion events
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1808,7 +1808,7 @@ _gtk_drag_dest_handle_event (GtkWidget *toplevel,
  * that case, they will have to implement a drag_motion handler that
  * passes the correct target list to this function.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): first target that the source offers
+ * Returns: (transfer none): first target that the source offers
  *     and the dest can accept, or %GDK_NONE
  **/
 GdkAtom
@@ -2694,7 +2694,7 @@ gtk_drag_begin_internal (GtkWidget         *widget,
  * (remember to free the event with gdk_event_free() when you are done).
  * If you can really not pass a real event, pass #NULL instead.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the context for this drag.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the context for this drag.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  **/
@@ -2727,7 +2727,7 @@ gtk_drag_begin_with_coordinates (GtkWidget         *widget,
  * This is equivalent to gtk_drag_begin_with_coordinates(), passing -1, -1
  * as coordinates.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the context for this drag.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the context for this drag.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use gtk_drag_begin_with_coordinates() instead.
  **/
@@ -2839,7 +2839,7 @@ gtk_drag_source_unset (GtkWidget *widget)
  * Gets the list of targets this widget can provide for
  * drag-and-drop.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -4558,7 +4558,7 @@ gtk_drag_abort_timeout (gpointer data)
  * at (@current_x, @current_y) has passed the GTK+ drag threshold, and thus
  * should trigger the beginning of a drag-and-drop operation.
  *
- * Return Value: %TRUE if the drag threshold has been passed.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the drag threshold has been passed.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_drag_check_threshold (GtkWidget *widget,
diff --git a/gtk/gtkeditable.c b/gtk/gtkeditable.c
index 996aadb2f6..c0e17da4bf 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkeditable.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkeditable.c
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ gtk_editable_delete_text (GtkEditable *editable,
  * 
  * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
  *
- * Return value: a pointer to the contents of the widget as a
+ * Returns: a pointer to the contents of the widget as a
  *      string. This string is allocated by the #GtkEditable
  *      implementation and should be freed by the caller.
  */
@@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ gtk_editable_set_position (GtkEditable      *editable,
  * 
  * Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
  *
- * Return value: the cursor position
+ * Returns: the cursor position
  */
 gint
 gtk_editable_get_position (GtkEditable *editable)
@@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ gtk_editable_get_position (GtkEditable *editable)
  *
  * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if an area is selected, %FALSE otherwise
+ * Returns: %TRUE if an area is selected, %FALSE otherwise
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_editable_get_selection_bounds (GtkEditable *editable,
@@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ gtk_editable_set_editable (GtkEditable    *editable,
  * Retrieves whether @editable is editable. See
  * gtk_editable_set_editable().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @editable is editable.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @editable is editable.
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_editable_get_editable (GtkEditable *editable)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkentry.c b/gtk/gtkentry.c
index a79ccd0a3d..b74ea4e0ab 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkentry.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkentry.c
@@ -6615,7 +6615,7 @@ gtk_entry_reset_im_context (GtkEntry *entry)
  * and the default key event handling of the #GtkEntry.
  * See gtk_text_view_reset_im_context() for an example of use.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the input method handled the key event.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the input method handled the key event.
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  */
@@ -7335,7 +7335,7 @@ gtk_entry_ensure_pixbuf (GtkEntry             *entry,
  *
  * Creates a new entry.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkEntry.
+ * Returns: a new #GtkEntry.
  */
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_entry_new (void)
@@ -7349,7 +7349,7 @@ gtk_entry_new (void)
  *
  * Creates a new entry with the specified text buffer.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkEntry
+ * Returns: a new #GtkEntry
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  */
@@ -7583,7 +7583,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_visibility (GtkEntry *entry,
  * Retrieves whether the text in @entry is visible. See
  * gtk_entry_set_visibility().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the text is currently visible
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the text is currently visible
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_entry_get_visibility (GtkEntry *entry)
@@ -7637,7 +7637,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_invisible_char (GtkEntry *entry,
  * Retrieves the character displayed in place of the real characters
  * for entries with visibility set to false. See gtk_entry_set_invisible_char().
  *
- * Return value: the current invisible char, or 0, if the entry does not
+ * Returns: the current invisible char, or 0, if the entry does not
  *               show invisible text at all. 
  **/
 gunichar
@@ -7715,7 +7715,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_overwrite_mode (GtkEntry *entry,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_overwrite_mode().
  * 
- * Return value: whether the text is overwritten when typing.
+ * Returns: whether the text is overwritten when typing.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -7742,7 +7742,7 @@ gtk_entry_get_overwrite_mode (GtkEntry *entry)
  * gtk_entry_buffer_get_text (buffer);
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: a pointer to the contents of the widget as a
+ * Returns: a pointer to the contents of the widget as a
  *      string. This string points to internally allocated
  *      storage in the widget and must not be freed, modified or
  *      stored.
@@ -7797,7 +7797,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_max_length (GtkEntry     *entry,
  * gtk_entry_buffer_get_max_length (buffer);
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: the maximum allowed number of characters
+ * Returns: the maximum allowed number of characters
  *               in #GtkEntry, or 0 if there is no maximum.
  **/
 gint
@@ -7823,7 +7823,7 @@ gtk_entry_get_max_length (GtkEntry *entry)
  * gtk_entry_buffer_get_length (buffer);
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: the current number of characters
+ * Returns: the current number of characters
  *               in #GtkEntry, or 0 if there are none.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
@@ -7875,7 +7875,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_activates_default (GtkEntry *entry,
  * 
  * Retrieves the value set by gtk_entry_set_activates_default().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the entry will activate the default widget
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the entry will activate the default widget
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_entry_get_activates_default (GtkEntry *entry)
@@ -7920,7 +7920,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_width_chars (GtkEntry *entry,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_width_chars().
  * 
- * Return value: number of chars to request space for, or negative if unset
+ * Returns: number of chars to request space for, or negative if unset
  **/
 gint
 gtk_entry_get_width_chars (GtkEntry *entry)
@@ -7964,7 +7964,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_max_width_chars (GtkEntry *entry,
  * Retrieves the desired maximum width of @entry, in characters.
  * See gtk_entry_set_max_width_chars().
  *
- * Return value: the maximum width of the entry, in characters
+ * Returns: the maximum width of the entry, in characters
  *
  * Since: 3.12
  */
@@ -8009,7 +8009,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_has_frame (GtkEntry *entry,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_has_frame().
  * 
- * Return value: whether the entry has a beveled frame
+ * Returns: whether the entry has a beveled frame
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_entry_get_has_frame (GtkEntry *entry)
@@ -8055,7 +8055,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_inner_border (GtkEntry        *entry,
  * This function returns the entry’s #GtkEntry:inner-border property. See
  * gtk_entry_set_inner_border() for more information.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the entry’s #GtkBorder, or %NULL if none was set.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the entry’s #GtkBorder, or %NULL if none was set.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  *
@@ -8086,7 +8086,7 @@ gtk_entry_get_inner_border (GtkEntry *entry)
  * gtk_entry_text_index_to_layout_index() are needed to convert byte
  * indices in the layout to byte indices in the entry contents.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #PangoLayout for this entry
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #PangoLayout for this entry
  **/
 PangoLayout*
 gtk_entry_get_layout (GtkEntry *entry)
@@ -8111,7 +8111,7 @@ gtk_entry_get_layout (GtkEntry *entry)
  * entry’s #PangoLayout (returned by gtk_entry_get_layout(),
  * with text retrieved via pango_layout_get_text()).
  * 
- * Return value: byte index into the entry contents
+ * Returns: byte index into the entry contents
  **/
 gint
 gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index (GtkEntry *entry,
@@ -8150,7 +8150,7 @@ gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index (GtkEntry *entry,
  * gtk_entry_get_layout()) to a position in the entry contents
  * (returned by gtk_entry_get_text()).
  * 
- * Return value: byte index into the entry layout text
+ * Returns: byte index into the entry layout text
  **/
 gint
 gtk_entry_text_index_to_layout_index (GtkEntry *entry,
@@ -8267,7 +8267,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_alignment (GtkEntry *entry, gfloat xalign)
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_alignment().
  * 
- * Return value: the alignment
+ * Returns: the alignment
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -8836,7 +8836,7 @@ gtk_entry_get_icon_sensitive (GtkEntry             *entry,
  * to store image data. If the icon has no image data,
  * the return value will be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.
  *
- * Return value: image representation being used
+ * Returns: image representation being used
  *
  * Since: 2.16
  **/
@@ -10200,7 +10200,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_completion (GtkEntry           *entry,
  *
  * Returns the auxiliary completion object currently in use by @entry.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The auxiliary completion object currently
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The auxiliary completion object currently
  *     in use by @entry.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -10258,7 +10258,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment (GtkEntry      *entry,
  * Retrieves the horizontal cursor adjustment for the entry. 
  * See gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the horizontal cursor adjustment, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the horizontal cursor adjustment, or %NULL
  *   if none has been set.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
@@ -10330,7 +10330,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction (GtkEntry *entry,
  * Returns the current fraction of the task that’s been completed.
  * See gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction().
  *
- * Return value: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+ * Returns: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
  *
  * Since: 2.16
  */
@@ -10380,7 +10380,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step (GtkEntry *entry,
  *
  * Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step().
  *
- * Return value: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+ * Returns: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
  *
  * Since: 2.16
  */
@@ -10715,7 +10715,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_attributes (GtkEntry      *entry,
  * Gets the attribute list that was set on the entry using
  * gtk_entry_set_attributes(), if any.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the attribute list, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the attribute list, or %NULL
  *     if none was set.
  *
  * Since: 3.6
@@ -10768,7 +10768,7 @@ gtk_entry_set_tabs (GtkEntry      *entry,
  * Gets the tabstops that were set on the entry using gtk_entry_set_tabs(), if
  * any.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the tabstops, or %NULL if none was set.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the tabstops, or %NULL if none was set.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkentrybuffer.c b/gtk/gtkentrybuffer.c
index cf72518078..8356d9515b 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkentrybuffer.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkentrybuffer.c
@@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ gtk_entry_buffer_class_init (GtkEntryBufferClass *klass)
  *
  * Optionally, specify initial text to set in the buffer.
  *
- * Return value: A new GtkEntryBuffer object.
+ * Returns: A new GtkEntryBuffer object.
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ gtk_entry_buffer_new (const gchar *initial_chars,
  *
  * Retrieves the length in characters of the buffer.
  *
- * Return value: The number of characters in the buffer.
+ * Returns: The number of characters in the buffer.
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ gtk_entry_buffer_get_length (GtkEntryBuffer *buffer)
  * Retrieves the length in bytes of the buffer.
  * See gtk_entry_buffer_get_length().
  *
- * Return value: The byte length of the buffer.
+ * Returns: The byte length of the buffer.
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ gtk_entry_buffer_get_bytes (GtkEntryBuffer *buffer)
  * The memory pointer returned by this call will not change
  * unless this object emits a signal, or is finalized.
  *
- * Return value: a pointer to the contents of the widget as a
+ * Returns: a pointer to the contents of the widget as a
  *      string. This string points to internally allocated
  *      storage in the buffer and must not be freed, modified or
  *      stored.
@@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ gtk_entry_buffer_set_max_length (GtkEntryBuffer *buffer,
  * Retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in
  * @buffer. See gtk_entry_buffer_set_max_length().
  *
- * Return value: the maximum allowed number of characters
+ * Returns: the maximum allowed number of characters
  *               in #GtkEntryBuffer, or 0 if there is no maximum.
  *
  * Since: 2.18
diff --git a/gtk/gtkentrycompletion.c b/gtk/gtkentrycompletion.c
index 391336d702..3318144fb5 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkentrycompletion.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkentrycompletion.c
@@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_class_init (GtkEntryCompletionClass *klass)
    * the #GtkFileChooser inserts only the part of the prefix up to the
    * next '/'.
    *
-   * Return value: %TRUE if the signal has been handled
+   * Returns: %TRUE if the signal has been handled
    *
    * Since: 2.6
    */
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_class_init (GtkEntryCompletionClass *klass)
    * Note that @model is the model that was passed to
    * gtk_entry_completion_set_model().
    *
-   * Return value: %TRUE if the signal has been handled
+   * Returns: %TRUE if the signal has been handled
    *
    * Since: 2.4
    */
@@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_class_init (GtkEntryCompletionClass *klass)
    * Note that @model is the model that was passed to
    * gtk_entry_completion_set_model().
    *
-   * Return value: %TRUE if the signal has been handled
+   * Returns: %TRUE if the signal has been handled
    *
    * Since: 2.12
    */
@@ -1139,7 +1139,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_selection_changed (GtkTreeSelection *selection,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkEntryCompletion object.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkEntryCompletion object
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkEntryCompletion object
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -1161,7 +1161,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_new (void)
  * specified @area to layout cells in the underlying
  * #GtkTreeViewColumn for the drop-down menu.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkEntryCompletion object
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkEntryCompletion object
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1181,7 +1181,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_new_with_area (GtkCellArea *area)
  *
  * Gets the entry @completion has been attached to.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The entry @completion has been attached to
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The entry @completion has been attached to
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -1245,7 +1245,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_set_model (GtkEntryCompletion *completion,
  * Returns the model the #GtkEntryCompletion is using as data source.
  * Returns %NULL if the model is unset.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none
  *     is currently being used
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1323,7 +1323,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_set_minimum_key_length (GtkEntryCompletion *completion,
  *
  * Returns the minimum key length as set for @completion.
  *
- * Return value: The currently used minimum key length
+ * Returns: The currently used minimum key length
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -1538,7 +1538,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_set_text_column (GtkEntryCompletion *completion,
  *
  * Returns the column in the model of @completion to get strings from.
  *
- * Return value: the column containing the strings
+ * Returns: the column containing the strings
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -2049,7 +2049,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_set_inline_completion (GtkEntryCompletion *completion,
  * Returns whether the common prefix of the possible completions should
  * be automatically inserted in the entry.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
+ * Returns: %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -2093,7 +2093,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_set_popup_completion (GtkEntryCompletion *completion,
  *
  * Returns whether the completions should be presented in a popup window.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if popup completion is turned on
+ * Returns: %TRUE if popup completion is turned on
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -2138,7 +2138,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_set_popup_set_width (GtkEntryCompletion *completion,
  * Returns whether the  completion popup window will be resized to the
  * width of the entry.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the popup window will be resized to the width of
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the popup window will be resized to the width of
  *   the entry
  *
  * Since: 2.8
@@ -2187,7 +2187,7 @@ gtk_entry_completion_set_popup_single_match (GtkEntryCompletion *completion,
  * Returns whether the completion popup window will appear even if there is
  * only a single match.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the popup window will appear regardless of the
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the popup window will appear regardless of the
  *    number of matches
  *
  * Since: 2.8
diff --git a/gtk/gtkeventbox.c b/gtk/gtkeventbox.c
index 97c72ecdde..9cd57fa2ac 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkeventbox.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkeventbox.c
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ gtk_event_box_get_property (GObject     *object,
  * Returns whether the event box has a visible window.
  * See gtk_event_box_set_visible_window() for details.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the event box window is visible
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the event box window is visible
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ gtk_event_box_set_visible_window (GtkEventBox *event_box,
  * windows of its child. See gtk_event_box_set_above_child()
  * for details.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the event box window is above the
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the event box window is above the
  *     window of its child
  *
  * Since: 2.4
diff --git a/gtk/gtkexpander.c b/gtk/gtkexpander.c
index ee5cbe9e21..0380e6bae6 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkexpander.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkexpander.c
@@ -1630,7 +1630,7 @@ gtk_expander_get_preferred_width_for_height (GtkWidget *widget,
  *
  * Creates a new expander using @label as the text of the label.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkExpander widget.
+ * Returns: a new #GtkExpander widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -1652,7 +1652,7 @@ gtk_expander_new (const gchar *label)
  * accelerator called a mnemonic.
  * Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkExpander widget.
+ * Returns: a new #GtkExpander widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -1717,7 +1717,7 @@ gtk_expander_set_expanded (GtkExpander *expander,
  *
  * See gtk_expander_set_expanded().
  *
- * Return value: the current state of the expander
+ * Returns: the current state of the expander
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -1762,7 +1762,7 @@ gtk_expander_set_spacing (GtkExpander *expander,
  *
  * Gets the value set by gtk_expander_set_spacing().
  *
- * Return value: spacing between the expander and child
+ * Returns: spacing between the expander and child
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -1826,7 +1826,7 @@ gtk_expander_set_label (GtkExpander *expander,
  * be avoided by fetching the label text directly from the label
  * widget.
  *
- * Return value: The text of the label widget. This string is owned
+ * Returns: The text of the label widget. This string is owned
  *     by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1886,7 +1886,7 @@ gtk_expander_set_use_underline (GtkExpander *expander,
  * Returns whether an embedded underline in the expander label
  * indicates a mnemonic. See gtk_expander_set_use_underline().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if an embedded underline in the expander
+ * Returns: %TRUE if an embedded underline in the expander
  *     label indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1941,7 +1941,7 @@ gtk_expander_set_use_markup (GtkExpander *expander,
  * the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
  * See gtk_expander_set_use_markup().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the label’s text will be parsed for markup
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the label’s text will be parsed for markup
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -2016,7 +2016,7 @@ gtk_expander_set_label_widget (GtkExpander *expander,
  * Retrieves the label widget for the frame. See
  * gtk_expander_set_label_widget().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the label widget,
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the label widget,
  *     or %NULL if there is none
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -2070,7 +2070,7 @@ gtk_expander_set_label_fill (GtkExpander *expander,
  * Returns whether the label widget will fill all available
  * horizontal space allocated to @expander.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the label widget will fill all
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the label widget will fill all
  *     available horizontal space
  *
  * Since: 2.22
@@ -2113,7 +2113,7 @@ gtk_expander_set_resize_toplevel (GtkExpander *expander,
  * Returns whether the expander will resize the toplevel widget
  * containing the expander upon resizing and collpasing.
  *
- * Return value: the “resize toplevel” setting.
+ * Returns: the “resize toplevel” setting.
  *
  * Since: 3.2
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfilechooser.c b/gtk/gtkfilechooser.c
index 4df4afb35c..5b27dfe06a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfilechooser.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfilechooser.c
@@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_default_init (GtkFileChooserInterface *iface)
  *
  * Registers an error quark for #GtkFileChooser if necessary.
  * 
- * Return value: The error quark used for #GtkFileChooser errors.
+ * Returns: The error quark used for #GtkFileChooser errors.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_action (GtkFileChooser       *chooser,
  * Gets the type of operation that the file chooser is performing; see
  * gtk_file_chooser_set_action().
  * 
- * Return value: the action that the file selector is performing
+ * Returns: the action that the file selector is performing
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -559,7 +559,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * Gets whether only local files can be selected in the
  * file selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if only local files can be selected.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if only local files can be selected.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
  * selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if multiple files can be selected.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if multiple files can be selected.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -645,7 +645,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_create_folders (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * Gets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
  * See gtk_file_chooser_set_create_folders().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the New Folder button should be displayed.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the New Folder button should be displayed.
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_create_folders (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
  * folder.
  * 
- * Return value: (type filename): The currently selected filename, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (type filename): The currently selected filename, or %NULL
  *  if no file is selected, or the selected file can't
  *  be represented with a local filename. Free with g_free().
  *
@@ -736,7 +736,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_filename (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file’s existing location
  * is already known, so the file chooser will use it.
  * 
- * Return value: Not useful.
+ * Returns: Not useful.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -759,7 +759,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_filename (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * folder of @chooser, then the current folder of @chooser will
  * be changed to the folder containing @filename.
  *
- * Return value: Not useful.
+ * Returns: Not useful.
  *
  * See also: gtk_file_chooser_set_filename()
  *
@@ -856,7 +856,7 @@ file_to_uri_with_native_path (GFile *file)
  * folder cannot be represented as local filenames they will be ignored. (See
  * gtk_file_chooser_get_uris())
  *
- * Return value: (element-type filename) (transfer full): a #GSList
+ * Returns: (element-type filename) (transfer full): a #GSList
  *    containing the filenames of all selected files and subfolders in
  *    the current folder. Free the returned list with g_slist_free(),
  *    and the filenames with g_free().
@@ -892,7 +892,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_filenames (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * [section on setting up a file chooser dialog][gtkfilechooserdialog-setting-up]
  * for the rationale behind this.
  *
- * Return value: Not useful.
+ * Returns: Not useful.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * currently-selected folder in that mode, use gtk_file_chooser_get_uri() as the
  * usual way to get the selection.
  * 
- * Return value: (type filename): the full path of the current folder,
+ * Returns: (type filename): the full path of the current folder,
  * or %NULL if the current path cannot be represented as a local
  * filename.  Free with g_free().  This function will also return
  * %NULL if the file chooser was unable to load the last folder that
@@ -1022,7 +1022,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_current_name (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
  * folder.
  * 
- * Return value: The currently selected URI, or %NULL
+ * Returns: The currently selected URI, or %NULL
  *  if no file is selected. If gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only() is set to %TRUE
  * (the default) a local URI will be returned for any FUSE locations.
  * Free with g_free()
@@ -1089,7 +1089,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_uri (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file’s existing location
  * is already known, so the file chooser will use it.
  * 
- * Return value: Not useful.
+ * Returns: Not useful.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -1112,7 +1112,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_uri (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * file in the current folder of @chooser, then the current folder of
  * @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @filename.
  *
- * Return value: Not useful.
+ * Returns: Not useful.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -1198,7 +1198,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
  * @chooser. The returned names are full absolute URIs.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type utf8) (transfer full): a #GSList containing the URIs of all selected
+ * Returns: (element-type utf8) (transfer full): a #GSList containing the URIs of all selected
  *   files and subfolders in the current folder. Free the returned list
  *   with g_slist_free(), and the filenames with g_free().
  *
@@ -1237,7 +1237,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_uris (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * [section on setting up a file chooser dialog][gtkfilechooserdialog-setting-up]
  * for the rationale behind this.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the folder could be changed successfully, %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the folder could be changed successfully, %FALSE
  * otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1274,7 +1274,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * currently-selected folder in that mode, use gtk_file_chooser_get_uri() as the
  * usual way to get the selection.
  * 
- * Return value: the URI for the current folder.  Free with g_free().  This
+ * Returns: the URI for the current folder.  Free with g_free().  This
  * function will also return %NULL if the file chooser was unable to load the
  * last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling
  * gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri() on a nonexistent folder.
@@ -1308,7 +1308,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * Sets the current folder for @chooser from a #GFile.
  * Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the folder could be changed successfully, %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the folder could be changed successfully, %FALSE
  * otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
@@ -1332,7 +1332,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_file (GtkFileChooser  *chooser,
  * Gets the current folder of @chooser as #GFile.
  * See gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the #GFile for the current folder.
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the #GFile for the current folder.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
@@ -1353,7 +1353,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_file (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * Selects the file referred to by @file. An internal function. See
  * _gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
  *
- * Return value: Not useful.
+ * Returns: Not useful.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -1396,7 +1396,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_unselect_file (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of @chooser
  * as #GFile. An internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_uris().
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GFile) (transfer full): a #GSList
+ * Returns: (element-type GFile) (transfer full): a #GSList
  *   containing a #GFile for each selected file and subfolder in the
  *   current folder.  Free the returned list with g_slist_free(), and
  *   the files with g_object_unref().
@@ -1451,7 +1451,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_files (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  *   }
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: Not useful.
+ * Returns: Not useful.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -1513,7 +1513,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_file (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * implementation detail, used for conversion between paths
  * and filenames and URIs.
  * 
- * Return value: the file system for @chooser.
+ * Returns: the file system for @chooser.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -1563,7 +1563,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * Gets the current preview widget; see
  * gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the current preview widget, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the current preview widget, or %NULL
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -1617,7 +1617,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * should be shown for the current filename. See
  * gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the preview widget is active for the current filename.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the preview widget is active for the current filename.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -1663,7 +1663,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * Gets whether a stock label should be drawn with the name of the previewed
  * file.  See gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the file chooser is set to display a label with the
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the file chooser is set to display a label with the
  * name of the previewed file, %FALSE otherwise.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -1685,7 +1685,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_use_preview_label (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * Gets the #GFile that should be previewed in a custom preview
  * Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the #GFile for the file to preview,
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the #GFile for the file to preview,
  *     or %NULL if no file is selected. Free with g_object_unref().
  *
  * Since: 2.14
@@ -1707,7 +1707,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_file (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * Adds a folder to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file chooser.
  * Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the folder could be added successfully, %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the folder could be added successfully, %FALSE
  * otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1732,7 +1732,7 @@ _gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder (GtkFileChooser  *chooser,
  * Removes a folder from the shortcut folders in a file chooser.  Internal
  * function, see gtk_file_chooser_remove_shortcut_folder().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the folder could be removed successfully, %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the folder could be removed successfully, %FALSE
  * otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1755,7 +1755,7 @@ _gtk_file_chooser_remove_shortcut_folder (GtkFileChooser  *chooser,
  * Gets the filename that should be previewed in a custom preview
  * widget. See gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget().
  * 
- * Return value: (type filename): the filename to preview, or %NULL if
+ * Returns: (type filename): the filename to preview, or %NULL if
  *  no file is selected, or if the selected file cannot be represented
  *  as a local filename. Free with g_free()
  *
@@ -1786,7 +1786,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview
  * widget. See gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget().
  * 
- * Return value: the URI for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file is
+ * Returns: the URI for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file is
  * selected. Free with g_free().
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1834,7 +1834,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * Gets the current preview widget; see
  * gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the current extra widget, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the current extra widget, or %NULL
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -1905,7 +1905,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_remove_filter (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * Lists the current set of user-selectable filters; see
  * gtk_file_chooser_add_filter(), gtk_file_chooser_remove_filter().
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkFileFilter) (transfer container): a
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkFileFilter) (transfer container): a
  *  #GSList containing the current set of user selectable filters. The
  *  contents of the list are owned by GTK+, but you must free the list
  *  itself with g_slist_free() when you are done with it.
@@ -1950,7 +1950,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_filter (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  *
  * Gets the current filter; see gtk_file_chooser_set_filter().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the current filter, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the current filter, or %NULL
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -1983,7 +1983,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_get_filter (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * application.  For example, you can use this to add a
  * “/usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart” folder to the volume list.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the folder could be added successfully, %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the folder could be added successfully, %FALSE
  * otherwise.  In the latter case, the @error will be set as appropriate.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -2014,7 +2014,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder (GtkFileChooser    *chooser,
  * 
  * Removes a folder from a file chooser’s list of shortcut folders.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the operation succeeds, %FALSE otherwise.  
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the operation succeeds, %FALSE otherwise.  
  * In the latter case, the @error will be set as appropriate.
  *
  * See also: gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder()
@@ -2046,7 +2046,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_remove_shortcut_folder (GtkFileChooser    *chooser,
  * Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
  * gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder().
  *
- * Return value: (element-type filename) (transfer full): A list of
+ * Returns: (element-type filename) (transfer full): A list of
  * folder filenames, or %NULL if there are no shortcut folders.  Free
  * the returned list with g_slist_free(), and the filenames with
  * g_free().
@@ -2081,7 +2081,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_list_shortcut_folders (GtkFileChooser *chooser)
  * by the application.  For example, you can use this to add a
  * “file:///usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart” folder to the volume list.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the folder could be added successfully, %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the folder could be added successfully, %FALSE
  * otherwise.  In the latter case, the @error will be set as appropriate.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -2112,7 +2112,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri (GtkFileChooser    *chooser,
  * 
  * Removes a folder URI from a file chooser’s list of shortcut folders.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the operation succeeds, %FALSE otherwise.  
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the operation succeeds, %FALSE otherwise.  
  * In the latter case, the @error will be set as appropriate.
  *
  * See also: gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri()
@@ -2144,7 +2144,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_remove_shortcut_folder_uri (GtkFileChooser    *chooser,
  * Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
  * gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri().
  *
- * Return value: (element-type utf8) (transfer full): A list of folder
+ * Returns: (element-type utf8) (transfer full): A list of folder
  * URIs, or %NULL if there are no shortcut folders.  Free the returned
  * list with g_slist_free(), and the URIs with g_free().
  *
@@ -2200,7 +2200,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.   
  * See gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if hidden files and folders are displayed.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if hidden files and folders are displayed.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -2251,7 +2251,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation (GtkFileChooser *chooser,
  * Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user
  * types a file name that already exists.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog;
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog;
  * %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.8
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfilechooserbutton.c b/gtk/gtkfilechooserbutton.c
index 525a54e0f2..7aabd76e13 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfilechooserbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfilechooserbutton.c
@@ -3097,7 +3097,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_button_set_focus_on_click (GtkFileChooserButton *button,
  * Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
  * See gtk_file_chooser_button_set_focus_on_click().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
  *               the mouse.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfilechooserdialog.c b/gtk/gtkfilechooserdialog.c
index 70eea814a9..e67e3e1b14 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfilechooserdialog.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfilechooserdialog.c
@@ -556,7 +556,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new_valist (const gchar          *title,
  * Creates a new #GtkFileChooserDialog.  This function is analogous to
  * gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons().
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkFileChooserDialog
+ * Returns: a new #GtkFileChooserDialog
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfilechooserentry.c b/gtk/gtkfilechooserentry.c
index 013947ea02..526895bd44 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfilechooserentry.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfilechooserentry.c
@@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ delete_text_callback (GtkFileChooserEntry *chooser_entry,
  * which is an entry with completion with respect to a
  * #GtkFileSystem object.
  *
- * Return value: the newly created #GtkFileChooserEntry
+ * Returns: the newly created #GtkFileChooserEntry
  **/
 GtkWidget *
 _gtk_file_chooser_entry_new (gboolean       eat_tabs)
@@ -764,7 +764,7 @@ _gtk_file_chooser_entry_set_base_folder (GtkFileChooserEntry *chooser_entry,
  * be different.  If the user has entered unparsable text, or text which
  * the entry cannot handle, this will return %NULL.
  *
- * Return value: the file for the current folder - you must g_object_unref()
+ * Returns: the file for the current folder - you must g_object_unref()
  *   the value after use.
  **/
 GFile *
@@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ _gtk_file_chooser_entry_get_current_folder (GtkFileChooserEntry *chooser_entry)
  * and if a filename path is needed, g_file_get_child_for_display_name()
  * must be used
   *
- * Return value: the entered filename - this value is owned by the
+ * Returns: the entered filename - this value is owned by the
  *  chooser entry and must not be modified or freed.
  **/
 const gchar *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfilechooserwidget.c b/gtk/gtkfilechooserwidget.c
index 77c2a73a66..8e055e08f3 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfilechooserwidget.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfilechooserwidget.c
@@ -7670,7 +7670,7 @@ gtk_file_chooser_widget_init (GtkFileChooserWidget *impl)
  * be embedded in custom windows, and it is the same widget that is used by
  * #GtkFileChooserDialog.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkFileChooserWidget
+ * Returns: a new #GtkFileChooserWidget
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfilefilter.c b/gtk/gtkfilefilter.c
index cebc0d119e..6fb533f191 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfilefilter.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfilefilter.c
@@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ gtk_file_filter_buildable_custom_tag_end (GtkBuildable *buildable,
  * gtk_file_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
  * ]|
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkFileFilter
+ * Returns: a new #GtkFileFilter
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ gtk_file_filter_set_name (GtkFileFilter *filter,
  * 
  * Gets the human-readable name for the filter. See gtk_file_filter_set_name().
  * 
- * Return value: The human-readable name of the filter,
+ * Returns: The human-readable name of the filter,
  *   or %NULL. This value is owned by GTK+ and must not
  *   be modified or freed.
  * 
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ gtk_file_filter_add_custom (GtkFileFilter         *filter,
  * is intended principally for use in the implementation of
  * #GtkFileChooser.
  * 
- * Return value: bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
+ * Returns: bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
  *   calling gtk_file_filter_filter()
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ gtk_file_filter_get_needed (GtkFileFilter *filter)
  * is intended principally for use in the implementation of
  * #GtkFileChooser.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the file should be displayed
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the file should be displayed
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfilesystemmodel.c b/gtk/gtkfilesystemmodel.c
index ff60a98bc3..b9f4d326a3 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfilesystemmodel.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfilesystemmodel.c
@@ -1392,7 +1392,7 @@ _gtk_file_system_model_new_valist (GtkFileSystemModelGetValue get_func,
  * to the list using _gtk_file_system_model_add_and_query_file()
  * or _gtk_file_system_model_update_file().
  *
- * Return value: the newly created #GtkFileSystemModel
+ * Returns: the newly created #GtkFileSystemModel
  **/
 GtkFileSystemModel *
 _gtk_file_system_model_new (GtkFileSystemModelGetValue get_func,
@@ -1429,7 +1429,7 @@ _gtk_file_system_model_new (GtkFileSystemModelGetValue get_func,
  * it will also monitor the drectory and update the model's
  * contents to reflect changes, if the @directory supports monitoring.
  * 
- * Return value: the newly created #GtkFileSystemModel
+ * Returns: the newly created #GtkFileSystemModel
  **/
 GtkFileSystemModel *
 _gtk_file_system_model_new_for_directory (GFile *                    dir,
@@ -1649,7 +1649,7 @@ _gtk_file_system_model_iter_is_filtered_out (GtkFileSystemModel *model,
  * Gets the #GFileInfo-struct for a particular row
  * of @model.
  * 
- * Return value: a #GFileInfo-struct. This value
+ * Returns: a #GFileInfo-struct. This value
  *   is owned by @model and must not be modified or freed.
  *   If you want to keep the information for later use,
  *   you must take a reference, since the #GFileInfo-struct may be
@@ -1679,7 +1679,7 @@ _gtk_file_system_model_get_info (GtkFileSystemModel *model,
  * 
  * Gets the file for a particular row in @model. 
  *
- * Return value: the file. This object is owned by @model and
+ * Returns: the file. This object is owned by @model and
  *   or freed. If you want to save the path for later use,
  *   you must take a ref, since the object may be freed
  *   on later changes to the file system.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkflowbox.c b/gtk/gtkflowbox.c
index 5e7fb04b97..63c4766ad7 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkflowbox.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkflowbox.c
@@ -4145,7 +4145,7 @@ gtk_flow_box_set_vadjustment (GtkFlowBox    *box,
  * Returns whether the box is homogeneous (all children are the
  * same size). See gtk_box_set_homogeneous().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the box is homogeneous.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the box is homogeneous.
  *
  * Since: 3.12
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfontbutton.c b/gtk/gtkfontbutton.c
index 9189281e93..70c024f875 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfontbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfontbutton.c
@@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ gtk_font_button_set_use_size (GtkFontButton *font_button,
  * 
  * Returns whether the name of the font style will be shown in the label.
  * 
- * Return value: whether the font style will be shown in the label.
+ * Returns: whether the font style will be shown in the label.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -899,7 +899,7 @@ gtk_font_button_set_show_style (GtkFontButton *font_button,
  * 
  * Returns whether the font size will be shown in the label.
  * 
- * Return value: whether the font size will be shown in the label.
+ * Returns: whether the font size will be shown in the label.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfontchooser.c b/gtk/gtkfontchooser.c
index a2efb33929..c7ac800763 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfontchooser.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfontchooser.c
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ gtk_font_chooser_default_init (GtkFontChooserInterface *iface)
  *
  * If the selected font is not installed, returns %NULL.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #PangoFontFamily representing the
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #PangoFontFamily representing the
  *     selected font family, or %NULL. The returned object is owned by @fontchooser
  *     and must not be modified or freed.
  *
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ gtk_font_chooser_get_font_family (GtkFontChooser *fontchooser)
  *
  * If the selected font is not installed, returns %NULL.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #PangoFontFace representing the
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #PangoFontFace representing the
  *     selected font group details, or %NULL. The returned object is owned by
  *     @fontchooser and must not be modified or freed.
  *
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ gtk_font_chooser_get_font_face (GtkFontChooser *fontchooser)
  *
  * The selected font size.
  *
- * Return value: A n integer representing the selected font size,
+ * Returns: A n integer representing the selected font size,
  *     or -1 if no font size is selected.
  *
  * Since: 3.2
@@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ gtk_font_chooser_get_font_size (GtkFontChooser *fontchooser)
  * Use pango_font_description_equal() if you want to compare two
  * font descriptions.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full) (allow-none): A string with the name
+ * Returns: (transfer full) (allow-none): A string with the name
  *     of the current font, or %NULL if  no font is selected. You must
  *     free this string with g_free().
  *
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ gtk_font_chooser_set_font (GtkFontChooser *fontchooser,
  * Use pango_font_description_equal() if you want to compare two
  * font descriptions.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full) (allow-none): A #PangoFontDescription for the
+ * Returns: (transfer full) (allow-none): A #PangoFontDescription for the
  *     current font, or %NULL if  no font is selected.
  *
  * Since: 3.2
@@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ gtk_font_chooser_set_font_desc (GtkFontChooser             *fontchooser,
  *
  * Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the text displayed in the
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the text displayed in the
  *     preview area
  *
  * Since: 3.2
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ gtk_font_chooser_set_preview_text (GtkFontChooser *fontchooser,
  *
  * Returns whether the preview entry is shown or not.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the preview entry is shown
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the preview entry is shown
  *     or %FALSE if it is hidden.
  *
  * Since: 3.2
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfontchooserdialog.c b/gtk/gtkfontchooserdialog.c
index 6de69e3db4..2b826407ad 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfontchooserdialog.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfontchooserdialog.c
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ G_GNUC_END_IGNORE_DEPRECATIONS
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkFontChooserDialog.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkFontChooserDialog
+ * Returns: a new #GtkFontChooserDialog
  *
  * Since: 3.2
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkfontchooserwidget.c b/gtk/gtkfontchooserwidget.c
index 8e1a6a4c1e..3918c4bfe8 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkfontchooserwidget.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkfontchooserwidget.c
@@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ gtk_font_chooser_widget_init (GtkFontChooserWidget *fontchooser)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkFontChooserWidget.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkFontChooserWidget
+ * Returns: a new #GtkFontChooserWidget
  *
  * Since: 3.2
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkframe.c b/gtk/gtkframe.c
index 98b4a75d4f..11b761b8e6 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkframe.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkframe.c
@@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ gtk_frame_get_property (GObject         *object,
  * Creates a new #GtkFrame, with optional label @label.
  * If @label is %NULL, the label is omitted.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkFrame widget
+ * Returns: a new #GtkFrame widget
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_frame_new (const gchar *label)
@@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ gtk_frame_set_label (GtkFrame *frame,
  * for the label widget if a non-%NULL argument was passed
  * to gtk_frame_new().)
  * 
- * Return value: the text in the label, or %NULL if there
+ * Returns: the text in the label, or %NULL if there
  *               was no label widget or the lable widget was not
  *               a #GtkLabel. This string is owned by GTK+ and
  *               must not be modified or freed.
@@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ gtk_frame_set_label_widget (GtkFrame  *frame,
  * Retrieves the label widget for the frame. See
  * gtk_frame_set_label_widget().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the label widget, or %NULL if there is none.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the label widget, or %NULL if there is none.
  **/
 GtkWidget *
 gtk_frame_get_label_widget (GtkFrame *frame)
@@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ gtk_frame_set_shadow_type (GtkFrame      *frame,
  * Retrieves the shadow type of the frame. See
  * gtk_frame_set_shadow_type().
  *
- * Return value: the current shadow type of the frame.
+ * Returns: the current shadow type of the frame.
  **/
 GtkShadowType
 gtk_frame_get_shadow_type (GtkFrame *frame)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkheaderbar.c b/gtk/gtkheaderbar.c
index b87947167f..d38efb3a79 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkheaderbar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkheaderbar.c
@@ -1158,7 +1158,7 @@ gtk_header_bar_set_title (GtkHeaderBar *bar,
  *
  * Retrieves the title of the header. See gtk_header_bar_set_title().
  *
- * Return value: the title of the header, or %NULL if none has
+ * Returns: the title of the header, or %NULL if none has
  *    been set explicitly. The returned string is owned by the widget
  *    and must not be modified or freed.
  *
@@ -1219,7 +1219,7 @@ gtk_header_bar_set_subtitle (GtkHeaderBar *bar,
  *
  * Retrieves the subtitle of the header. See gtk_header_bar_set_subtitle().
  *
- * Return value: the subtitle of the header, or %NULL if none has
+ * Returns: the subtitle of the header, or %NULL if none has
  *    been set explicitly. The returned string is owned by the widget
  *    and must not be modified or freed.
  *
@@ -1311,7 +1311,7 @@ gtk_header_bar_set_custom_title (GtkHeaderBar *bar,
  * Retrieves the custom title widget of the header. See
  * gtk_header_bar_set_custom_title().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the custom title widget
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the custom title widget
  *    of the header, or %NULL if none has been set explicitly.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
diff --git a/gtk/gtkiconcachevalidator.c b/gtk/gtkiconcachevalidator.c
index a4e6947826..81a26e5914 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkiconcachevalidator.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkiconcachevalidator.c
@@ -378,7 +378,7 @@ check_hash (CacheInfo *info,
  * be deserialized. The amount of validation can
  * be controlled with the @flags field.  
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the cache is valid
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the cache is valid
  */
 gboolean 
 _gtk_icon_cache_validate (CacheInfo *info)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkicontheme.c b/gtk/gtkicontheme.c
index e17fa3dfcb..c857f5b63e 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkicontheme.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkicontheme.c
@@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ G_DEFINE_TYPE_WITH_PRIVATE (GtkIconTheme, gtk_icon_theme, G_TYPE_OBJECT)
  * or gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen() rather than creating
  * a new icon theme object for scratch.
  * 
- * Return value: the newly created #GtkIconTheme object.
+ * Returns: the newly created #GtkIconTheme object.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_new (void)
  * Gets the icon theme for the default screen. See
  * gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
  *  the default screen. This icon theme is associated with
  *  the screen and can be used as long as the screen
  *  is open. Do not ref or unref it.
@@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_get_default (void)
  * and setting the screen yourself; by using this function
  * a single icon theme object will be shared between users.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
  *  the given screen. This icon theme is associated with
  *  the screen and can be used as long as the screen
  *  is open. Do not ref or unref it.
@@ -1804,7 +1804,7 @@ choose_icon (GtkIconTheme       *icon_theme,
  * gtk_icon_info_load_icon(). (gtk_icon_theme_load_icon()
  * combines these two steps if all you need is the pixbuf.)
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GtkIconInfo object containing information
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GtkIconInfo object containing information
  * about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn’t found.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1841,7 +1841,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon (GtkIconTheme       *icon_theme,
  * gtk_icon_info_load_icon(). (gtk_icon_theme_load_icon() combines
  * these two steps if all you need is the pixbuf.)
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GtkIconInfo object containing
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GtkIconInfo object containing
  * information about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn’t found.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
@@ -1945,7 +1945,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon_for_scale (GtkIconTheme       *icon_theme,
  * tries them all in the given order before falling back to 
  * inherited icon themes.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GtkIconInfo object containing information
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GtkIconInfo object containing information
  * about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn’t found.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
@@ -1983,7 +1983,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_choose_icon (GtkIconTheme       *icon_theme,
  * tries them all in the given order before falling back to 
  * inherited icon themes.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GtkIconInfo object containing information
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GtkIconInfo object containing information
  * about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn’t found.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
@@ -2035,7 +2035,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_error_quark (void)
  * returned by this function. Otherwise GTK+ may need to keep the old
  * icon theme loaded, which would be a waste of memory.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a
  *     newly created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so
  *     you must not modify the icon. Use g_object_unref() to release
  *     your reference to the icon. %NULL if the icon isn’t found.
@@ -2084,7 +2084,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_load_icon (GtkIconTheme         *icon_theme,
  * returned by this function. Otherwise GTK+ may need to keep the old
  * icon theme loaded, which would be a waste of memory.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a
  *     newly created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so
  *     you must not modify the icon. Use g_object_unref() to release
  *     your reference to the icon. %NULL if the icon isn’t found.
@@ -2146,7 +2146,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_load_icon_for_scale (GtkIconTheme        *icon_theme,
  * update the icon. This is usually done by connecting to the
  * GtkWidget::style-set signal.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a
  *     newly created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so
  *     you must not modify the icon. Use cairo_surface_destroy() to release
  *     your reference to the icon. %NULL if the icon isn’t found.
@@ -2195,7 +2195,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_load_surface (GtkIconTheme        *icon_theme,
  * Checks whether an icon theme includes an icon
  * for a particular name.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @icon_theme includes an
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @icon_theme includes an
  *  icon for @icon_name.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -2261,7 +2261,7 @@ add_size (gpointer  key,
  * that the icon is available in a scalable format. The array 
  * is zero-terminated.
  * 
- * Return value: (array zero-terminated=1): An newly allocated array
+ * Returns: (array zero-terminated=1): An newly allocated array
  * describing the sizes at which the icon is available. The array
  * should be freed with g_free() when it is no longer needed.
  *
@@ -2376,7 +2376,7 @@ add_key_to_list (gpointer  key,
  * but will typically include such values as “Applications” and
  * “MimeTypes”.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type utf8) (transfer full): a #GList list
+ * Returns: (element-type utf8) (transfer full): a #GList list
  *  holding the names of all the icons in the theme. You must first
  *  free each element in the list with g_free(), then free the list
  *  itself with g_list_free().
@@ -2438,7 +2438,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_list_icons (GtkIconTheme *icon_theme,
  * Gets the list of contexts available within the current
  * hierarchy of icon themes
  *
- * Return value: (element-type utf8) (transfer full): a #GList list
+ * Returns: (element-type utf8) (transfer full): a #GList list
  *  holding the names of all the contexts in the theme. You must first
  *  free each element in the list with g_free(), then free the list
  *  itself with g_list_free().
@@ -2484,7 +2484,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_list_contexts (GtkIconTheme *icon_theme)
  * current theme (for instance, to use when presenting
  * a list of themes to the user.)
  * 
- * Return value: the name of an example icon or %NULL.
+ * Returns: the name of an example icon or %NULL.
  *  Free with g_free().
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -2561,7 +2561,7 @@ rescan_themes (GtkIconTheme *icon_theme)
  * currently cached information is discarded and will be reloaded
  * next time @icon_theme is accessed.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the icon theme has changed and needed
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the icon theme has changed and needed
  *   to be reloaded.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -3368,7 +3368,7 @@ icon_info_new_builtin (BuiltinIcon *icon)
  * 
  * Make a copy of a #GtkIconInfo.
  * 
- * Return value: the new GtkIconInfo
+ * Returns: the new GtkIconInfo
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -3452,7 +3452,7 @@ gtk_icon_info_class_init (GtkIconInfoClass *klass)
  * Note that for scaled icons the base size does
  * not include the base scale.
  *
- * Return value: the base size, or 0, if no base
+ * Returns: the base size, or 0, if no base
  *  size is known for the icon.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -3474,7 +3474,7 @@ gtk_icon_info_get_base_size (GtkIconInfo *icon_info)
  * icon drawn for a high-dpi screen with window-scale 2 for a base
  * size of 32 will be 64 pixels tall and have a base_scale of 2.
  *
- * Return value: the base scale.
+ * Returns: the base scale.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  **/
@@ -3496,7 +3496,7 @@ gtk_icon_info_get_base_scale (GtkIconInfo *icon_info)
  * no filename if a builtin icon is returned; in this
  * case, you should use gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf().
  * 
- * Return value: (type filename): the filename for the icon, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (type filename): the filename for the icon, or %NULL
  *  if gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf() should be used instead. The
  *  return value is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified or freed.
  *
@@ -3519,7 +3519,7 @@ gtk_icon_info_get_filename (GtkIconInfo *icon_info)
  * %GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN to
  * gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the built-in image pixbuf, or %NULL. No
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the built-in image pixbuf, or %NULL. No
  *  extra reference is added to the returned pixbuf, so if
  *  you want to keep it around, you must use g_object_ref().
  *  The returned image must not be modified.
@@ -3545,7 +3545,7 @@ gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf (GtkIconInfo *icon_info)
  * the file name and not the file contents for determining this.
  * This behaviour may change in the future.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the icon is symbolic, %FALSE otherwise.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the icon is symbolic, %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 3.12
  **/
@@ -3887,7 +3887,7 @@ proxy_pixbuf_destroy (guchar *pixels, gpointer data)
  * the #GtkIconInfo. If this flag has been specified, the pixbuf
  * returned by this function will be scaled to the exact size.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a newly
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a newly
  *     created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must
  *     not modify the icon. Use g_object_unref() to release your reference
  *     to the icon.
@@ -3962,7 +3962,7 @@ gtk_icon_info_load_icon (GtkIconInfo *icon_info,
  * the #GtkIconInfo. If this flag has been specified, the pixbuf
  * returned by this function will be scaled to the exact size.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a newly
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a newly
  *     created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must
  *     not modify the icon. Use cairo_surface_destroy() to release your reference
  *     to the icon.
@@ -4060,7 +4060,7 @@ gtk_icon_info_load_icon_async (GtkIconInfo          *icon_info,
  *
  * Finishes an async icon load, see gtk_icon_info_load_icon_async().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a newly
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a newly
  *     created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must
  *     not modify the icon. Use g_object_unref() to release your reference
  *     to the icon.
@@ -4339,7 +4339,7 @@ _gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic_internal (GtkIconInfo  *icon_info,
  * See the [Symbolic Icons Specification](http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/SymbolicIcons)
  * for more information about symbolic icons.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GdkPixbuf representing the loaded icon
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GdkPixbuf representing the loaded icon
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
@@ -4393,7 +4393,7 @@ gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic (GtkIconInfo    *icon_info,
  *
  * See gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic() for more details.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GdkPixbuf representing the loaded icon
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GdkPixbuf representing the loaded icon
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
@@ -4624,7 +4624,7 @@ gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic_async (GtkIconInfo   *icon_info,
  *
  * Finishes an async icon load, see gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic_async().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a newly
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a newly
  *     created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must
  *     not modify the icon. Use g_object_unref() to release your reference
  *     to the icon.
@@ -4753,7 +4753,7 @@ gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic_for_context_async (GtkIconInfo      *icon_info,
  *
  * Finishes an async icon load, see gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic_for_context_async().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a newly
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the rendered icon; this may be a newly
  *     created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must
  *     not modify the icon. Use g_object_unref() to release your reference
  *     to the icon.
@@ -4798,7 +4798,7 @@ color_to_rgba (GdkColor *color, GdkRGBA *rgba)
  *
  * See gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic() for more details.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GdkPixbuf representing the loaded icon
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GdkPixbuf representing the loaded icon
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  *
@@ -4925,7 +4925,7 @@ icon_info_scale_point (GtkIconInfo  *icon_info,
  * See gtk_icon_info_set_raw_coordinates() for further
  * information about the coordinate system.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the icon has an embedded rectangle
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the icon has an embedded rectangle
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -4973,7 +4973,7 @@ gtk_icon_info_get_embedded_rect (GtkIconInfo  *icon_info,
  * is a location in the icon that can be used as anchor points for attaching
  * emblems or overlays to the icon.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if there are any attach points for the icon.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if there are any attach points for the icon.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -5024,7 +5024,7 @@ gtk_icon_info_get_attach_points (GtkIconInfo *icon_info,
  * string to be used in place of the icon name in a user
  * visible context like a list of icons.
  * 
- * Return value: the display name for the icon or %NULL, if
+ * Returns: the display name for the icon or %NULL, if
  *  the icon doesn’t have a specified display name. This value
  *  is owned @icon_info and must not be modified or free.
  *
@@ -5187,7 +5187,7 @@ find_builtin_icon (const gchar *icon_name,
  * The icon can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
  * gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GtkIconInfo containing 
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GtkIconInfo containing 
  *     information about the icon, or %NULL if the icon 
  *     wasn’t found. Unref with g_object_unref()
  *
@@ -5217,7 +5217,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_lookup_by_gicon (GtkIconTheme       *icon_theme,
  * The icon can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
  * gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GtkIconInfo containing
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GtkIconInfo containing
  *     information about the icon, or %NULL if the icon
  *     wasn’t found. Unref with g_object_unref()
  *
@@ -5341,7 +5341,7 @@ gtk_icon_theme_lookup_by_gicon_for_scale (GtkIconTheme       *icon_theme,
  *
  * Creates a #GtkIconInfo for a #GdkPixbuf.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GtkIconInfo
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GtkIconInfo
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkiconview.c b/gtk/gtkiconview.c
index 3ad9259088..4cd36b912d 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkiconview.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkiconview.c
@@ -2245,7 +2245,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_cursor (GtkIconView     *icon_view,
  *
  * The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the cursor is set.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the cursor is set.
  *
  * Since: 2.8
  **/
@@ -4365,7 +4365,7 @@ _gtk_icon_view_set_cell_data (GtkIconView     *icon_view,
  * 
  * Creates a new #GtkIconView widget
  * 
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkIconView widget
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkIconView widget
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -4382,7 +4382,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_new (void)
  * Creates a new #GtkIconView widget using the
  * specified @area to layout cells inside the icons.
  * 
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkIconView widget
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkIconView widget
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
@@ -4398,7 +4398,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_new_with_area (GtkCellArea *area)
  * 
  * Creates a new #GtkIconView widget with the model @model.
  * 
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkIconView widget.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkIconView widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.6 
  **/
@@ -4455,7 +4455,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  * See gtk_icon_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords() for converting
  * widget coordinates to bin_window coordinates.
  * 
- * Return value: The #GtkTreePath corresponding to the icon or %NULL
+ * Returns: The #GtkTreePath corresponding to the icon or %NULL
  * if no icon exists at that position.
  *
  * Since: 2.6 
@@ -4496,7 +4496,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_get_path_at_pos (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  * See gtk_icon_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords() for converting
  * widget coordinates to bin_window coordinates.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if an item exists at the specified position
+ * Returns: %TRUE if an item exists at the specified position
  *
  * Since: 2.8
  **/
@@ -4540,7 +4540,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_get_item_at_pos (GtkIconView      *icon_view,
  *
  * This function is only valid if @icon_view is realized.
  *
- * Return value: %FALSE if there is no such item, %TRUE otherwise
+ * Returns: %FALSE if there is no such item, %TRUE otherwise
  *
  * Since: 3.6
  */
@@ -4670,7 +4670,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_cell (GtkIconView     *icon_view,
  * that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
  * to be relative to @icon_view’s bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
  *
- * Return value: whether or not the given tooltip context points to a item
+ * Returns: whether or not the given tooltip context points to a item
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -4813,7 +4813,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  * Returns the column of @icon_view’s model which is being used for
  * displaying tooltips on @icon_view’s rows.
  *
- * Return value: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+ * Returns: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
  * used, or -1 if this is disabled.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
@@ -4838,7 +4838,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_get_tooltip_column (GtkIconView *icon_view)
  * 
  * Both paths should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free() after use.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE, if valid paths were placed in @start_path and @end_path
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if valid paths were placed in @start_path and @end_path
  *
  * Since: 2.8
  **/
@@ -4951,7 +4951,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_selection_mode (GtkIconView      *icon_view,
  * 
  * Gets the selection mode of the @icon_view.
  *
- * Return value: the current selection mode
+ * Returns: the current selection mode
  *
  * Since: 2.6 
  **/
@@ -5096,7 +5096,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_model (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  * Returns the model the #GtkIconView is based on.  Returns %NULL if the
  * model is unset.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is
  *     currently being used.
  *
  * Since: 2.6 
@@ -5460,7 +5460,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_unselect_path (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  * g_list_free_full (list, (GDestroyNotify) gtk_tree_path_free);
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkTreePath) (transfer full): A #GList containing a #GtkTreePath for each selected row.
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkTreePath) (transfer full): A #GList containing a #GtkTreePath for each selected row.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -5555,7 +5555,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_unselect_all (GtkIconView *icon_view)
  * Returns %TRUE if the icon pointed to by @path is currently
  * selected. If @path does not point to a valid location, %FALSE is returned.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @path is selected.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @path is selected.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -5704,7 +5704,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_item_orientation (GtkIconView    *icon_view,
  * Returns the value of the ::item-orientation property which determines 
  * whether the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below. 
  * 
- * Return value: the relative position of texts and icons 
+ * Returns: the relative position of texts and icons 
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -5754,7 +5754,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_columns (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  * 
  * Returns the value of the ::columns property.
  * 
- * Return value: the number of columns, or -1
+ * Returns: the number of columns, or -1
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -5804,7 +5804,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_item_width (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  * 
  * Returns the value of the ::item-width property.
  * 
- * Return value: the width of a single item, or -1
+ * Returns: the width of a single item, or -1
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -5853,7 +5853,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_spacing (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  * 
  * Returns the value of the ::spacing property.
  * 
- * Return value: the space between cells 
+ * Returns: the space between cells 
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -5900,7 +5900,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_row_spacing (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  * 
  * Returns the value of the ::row-spacing property.
  * 
- * Return value: the space between rows
+ * Returns: the space between rows
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -5947,7 +5947,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_column_spacing (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  * 
  * Returns the value of the ::column-spacing property.
  * 
- * Return value: the space between columns
+ * Returns: the space between columns
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -5995,7 +5995,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_margin (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  * 
  * Returns the value of the ::margin property.
  * 
- * Return value: the space at the borders 
+ * Returns: the space at the borders 
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
@@ -6042,7 +6042,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_item_padding (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  * 
  * Returns the value of the ::item-padding property.
  * 
- * Return value: the padding around items
+ * Returns: the padding around items
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  */
@@ -7047,7 +7047,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_get_drag_dest_item (GtkIconView              *icon_view,
  * 
  * Determines the destination item for a given position.
  * 
- * Return value: whether there is an item at the given position.
+ * Returns: whether there is an item at the given position.
  *
  * Since: 2.8
  **/
@@ -7109,7 +7109,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_get_dest_item_at_pos (GtkIconView              *icon_view,
  * Creates a #cairo_surface_t representation of the item at @path.  
  * This image is used for a drag icon.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a newly-allocated surface of the drag icon.
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a newly-allocated surface of the drag icon.
  * 
  * Since: 2.8
  **/
@@ -7174,7 +7174,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_create_drag_icon (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  * Retrieves whether the user can reorder the list via drag-and-drop. 
  * See gtk_icon_view_set_reorderable().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the list can be reordered.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the list can be reordered.
  *
  * Since: 2.8
  **/
@@ -7276,7 +7276,7 @@ gtk_icon_view_set_activate_on_single_click (GtkIconView *icon_view,
  *
  * Gets the setting set by gtk_icon_view_set_activate_on_single_click().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if item-activated will be emitted on a single click
+ * Returns: %TRUE if item-activated will be emitted on a single click
  *
  * Since: 3.8
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkimage.c b/gtk/gtkimage.c
index e6e0062e5b..467456e3f4 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkimage.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkimage.c
@@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ gtk_image_get_property (GObject     *object,
  * image is not defined, it will be whatever is appropriate for
  * displaying the file.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkImage
+ * Returns: a new #GtkImage
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_image_new_from_file   (const gchar *filename)
@@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ gtk_image_new_from_file   (const gchar *filename)
  * image is not defined, it will be whatever is appropriate for
  * displaying the file.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkImage
+ * Returns: a new #GtkImage
  *
  * Since: 3.4
  **/
@@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ gtk_image_new_from_resource (const gchar *resource_path)
  * #GtkImage created will not react to state changes. Should you want that, 
  * you should use gtk_image_new_from_icon_name().
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkImage
+ * Returns: a new #GtkImage
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_image_new_from_pixbuf (GdkPixbuf *pixbuf)
@@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ gtk_image_new_from_pixbuf (GdkPixbuf *pixbuf)
  * surface; you still need to unref it if you own references.
  * #GtkImage will add its own reference rather than adopting yours.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkImage
+ * Returns: a new #GtkImage
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_image_new_from_surface (cairo_surface_t *surface)
@@ -677,7 +677,7 @@ gtk_image_new_from_surface (cairo_surface_t *surface)
  * You can register your own stock icon names, see
  * gtk_icon_factory_add_default() and gtk_icon_factory_add().
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkImage displaying the stock icon
+ * Returns: a new #GtkImage displaying the stock icon
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use gtk_image_new_from_icon_name() instead.
  **/
@@ -713,7 +713,7 @@ gtk_image_new_from_stock (const gchar    *stock_id,
  * icon set; you still need to unref it if you own references.
  * #GtkImage will add its own reference rather than adopting yours.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkImage
+ * Returns: a new #GtkImage
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10: Use gtk_image_new_from_icon_name() instead.
  **/
@@ -748,7 +748,7 @@ gtk_image_new_from_icon_set (GtkIconSet     *icon_set,
  * keep in mind that the animation will only be shown if the main loop
  * is not busy with something that has a higher priority.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkImage widget
+ * Returns: a new #GtkImage widget
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_image_new_from_animation (GdkPixbufAnimation *animation)
@@ -774,7 +774,7 @@ gtk_image_new_from_animation (GdkPixbufAnimation *animation)
  * displayed instead.  If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
  * will be updated appropriately.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkImage displaying the themed icon
+ * Returns: a new #GtkImage displaying the themed icon
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -801,7 +801,7 @@ gtk_image_new_from_icon_name (const gchar    *icon_name,
  * displayed instead.  If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
  * will be updated appropriately.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkImage displaying the themed icon
+ * Returns: a new #GtkImage displaying the themed icon
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -1206,7 +1206,7 @@ gtk_image_set_from_surface (GtkImage       *image,
  * to store image data. If the #GtkImage has no image data,
  * the return value will be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY.
  * 
- * Return value: image representation being used
+ * Returns: image representation being used
  **/
 GtkImageType
 gtk_image_get_storage_type (GtkImage *image)
@@ -1226,7 +1226,7 @@ gtk_image_get_storage_type (GtkImage *image)
  * The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
  * returned pixbuf.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the displayed pixbuf, or %NULL if
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the displayed pixbuf, or %NULL if
  * the image is empty
  **/
 GdkPixbuf*
@@ -1313,7 +1313,7 @@ gtk_image_get_icon_set  (GtkImage        *image,
  * The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
  * returned animation.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the displayed animation, or %NULL if
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the displayed animation, or %NULL if
  * the image is empty
  **/
 GdkPixbufAnimation*
@@ -1401,7 +1401,7 @@ gtk_image_get_gicon (GtkImage     *image,
  * 
  * Creates a new empty #GtkImage widget.
  * 
- * Return value: a newly created #GtkImage widget. 
+ * Returns: a newly created #GtkImage widget. 
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_image_new (void)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkimcontext.c b/gtk/gtkimcontext.c
index a82fe5e308..5ef5854824 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkimcontext.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkimcontext.c
@@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ gtk_im_context_class_init (GtkIMContextClass *klass)
    * the input method surrounding context by calling the
    * gtk_im_context_set_surrounding() method.
    *
-   * Return value: %TRUE if the signal was handled.
+   * Returns: %TRUE if the signal was handled.
    */
   im_context_signals[RETRIEVE_SURROUNDING] =
     g_signal_new (I_("retrieve-surrounding"),
@@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ gtk_im_context_class_init (GtkIMContextClass *klass)
    * The ::delete-surrounding signal is emitted when the input method
    * needs to delete all or part of the context surrounding the cursor.
    *
-   * Return value: %TRUE if the signal was handled.
+   * Returns: %TRUE if the signal was handled.
    */
   im_context_signals[DELETE_SURROUNDING] =
     g_signal_new (I_("delete-surrounding"),
@@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ gtk_im_context_get_preedit_string (GtkIMContext   *context,
  * events. If this function returns %TRUE, then no further processing
  * should be done for this key event.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the input method handled the key event.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the input method handled the key event.
  *
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -684,7 +684,7 @@ gtk_im_context_set_surrounding (GtkIMContext  *context,
  * for a widget to respond to the ::retrieve_surrounding signal, so input
  * methods must be prepared to function without context.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if surrounding text was provided; in this case
+ * Returns: %TRUE if surrounding text was provided; in this case
  *    you must free the result stored in *text.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -735,7 +735,7 @@ gtk_im_context_get_surrounding (GtkIMContext *context,
  * subsitutions in the existing text in response to new input. It is
  * not useful for applications.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the signal was handled.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the signal was handled.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_im_context_delete_surrounding (GtkIMContext *context,
diff --git a/gtk/gtkimmodule.c b/gtk/gtkimmodule.c
index 329546e13c..2122b10dce 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkimmodule.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkimmodule.c
@@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ _gtk_im_module_list (const GtkIMContextInfo ***contexts,
  * Create an IM context of a type specified by the string
  * ID @context_id.
  * 
- * Return value: a newly created input context of or @context_id, or
+ * Returns: a newly created input context of or @context_id, or
  *     if that could not be created, a newly created GtkIMContextSimple.
  */
 GtkIMContext *
@@ -777,7 +777,7 @@ get_current_input_language (void)
  * Return the context_id of the best IM context type 
  * for the given window.
  * 
- * Return value: the context ID (will never be %NULL)
+ * Returns: the context ID (will never be %NULL)
  */
 const gchar *
 _gtk_im_module_get_default_context_id (GdkWindow *client_window)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkinvisible.c b/gtk/gtkinvisible.c
index 788f545795..628b2d2d55 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkinvisible.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkinvisible.c
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ gtk_invisible_destroy (GtkWidget *widget)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkInvisible object for a specified screen
  *
- * Return value: a newly created #GtkInvisible object
+ * Returns: a newly created #GtkInvisible object
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ gtk_invisible_new_for_screen (GdkScreen *screen)
  * 
  * Creates a new #GtkInvisible.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkInvisible.
+ * Returns: a new #GtkInvisible.
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_invisible_new (void)
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ gtk_invisible_set_screen (GtkInvisible *invisible,
  *
  * Returns the #GdkScreen object associated with @invisible
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the associated #GdkScreen.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the associated #GdkScreen.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkkeyhash.c b/gtk/gtkkeyhash.c
index a67f2c40ac..9d516183be 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkkeyhash.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkkeyhash.c
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ key_hash_keys_changed (GdkKeymap  *keymap,
  * 
  * Create a new key hash object for doing binding resolution. 
  * 
- * Return value: the newly created object. Free with _gtk_key_hash_free().
+ * Returns: the newly created object. Free with _gtk_key_hash_free().
  **/
 GtkKeyHash *
 _gtk_key_hash_new (GdkKeymap      *keymap,
@@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ keyval_in_group (GdkKeymap  *keymap,
  * This means that fuzzy matches won’t be considered if their keyval is 
  * present in the current group.
  * 
- * Return value: A newly-allocated #GSList of matching entries.
+ * Returns: A newly-allocated #GSList of matching entries.
  *     Free with g_slist_free() when no longer needed.
  */
 GSList *
@@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ _gtk_key_hash_lookup (GtkKeyHash      *key_hash,
  * available.  The results are sorted so that entries with less
  * modifiers come before entries with more modifiers.
  * 
- * Return value: A #GSList of all matching entries.
+ * Returns: A #GSList of all matching entries.
  **/
 GSList *
 _gtk_key_hash_lookup_keyval (GtkKeyHash     *key_hash,
diff --git a/gtk/gtklabel.c b/gtk/gtklabel.c
index fbb0d87b5d..58580346a0 100644
--- a/gtk/gtklabel.c
+++ b/gtk/gtklabel.c
@@ -1601,7 +1601,7 @@ gtk_label_buildable_custom_finished (GtkBuildable *buildable,
  * Creates a new label with the given text inside it. You can
  * pass %NULL to get an empty label widget.
  *
- * Return value: the new #GtkLabel
+ * Returns: the new #GtkLabel
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_label_new (const gchar *str)
@@ -1636,7 +1636,7 @@ gtk_label_new (const gchar *str)
  * the button or menu item will automatically become the mnemonic widget 
  * and be activated by the mnemonic.
  *
- * Return value: the new #GtkLabel
+ * Returns: the new #GtkLabel
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic (const gchar *str)
@@ -1953,7 +1953,7 @@ gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget (GtkLabel  *label,
  * Retrieves the target of the mnemonic (keyboard shortcut) of this
  * label. See gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the target of the label’s mnemonic,
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the target of the label’s mnemonic,
  *     or %NULL if none has been set and the default algorithm will be used.
  **/
 GtkWidget *
@@ -2175,7 +2175,7 @@ gtk_label_set_attributes (GtkLabel         *label,
  * effective attributes for the label, use
  * pango_layout_get_attribute (gtk_label_get_layout (label)).
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the attribute list, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the attribute list, or %NULL
  *     if none was set.
  **/
 PangoAttrList *
@@ -2218,7 +2218,7 @@ gtk_label_set_label (GtkLabel    *label,
  * underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. (See
  * gtk_label_get_text()).
  *
- * Return value: the text of the label widget. This string is
+ * Returns: the text of the label widget. This string is
  *   owned by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
  **/
 const gchar *
@@ -2670,7 +2670,7 @@ gtk_label_set_markup_with_mnemonic (GtkLabel    *label,
  * screen. This does not include any embedded underlines
  * indicating mnemonics or Pango markup. (See gtk_label_get_label())
  * 
- * Return value: the text in the label widget. This is the internal
+ * Returns: the text in the label widget. This is the internal
  *   string used by the label, and must not be modified.
  **/
 const gchar *
@@ -2830,7 +2830,7 @@ gtk_label_set_justify (GtkLabel        *label,
  *
  * Returns the justification of the label. See gtk_label_set_justify().
  *
- * Return value: #GtkJustification
+ * Returns: #GtkJustification
  **/
 GtkJustification
 gtk_label_get_justify (GtkLabel *label)
@@ -2879,7 +2879,7 @@ gtk_label_set_ellipsize (GtkLabel          *label,
  *
  * Returns the ellipsizing position of the label. See gtk_label_set_ellipsize().
  *
- * Return value: #PangoEllipsizeMode
+ * Returns: #PangoEllipsizeMode
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -2925,7 +2925,7 @@ gtk_label_set_width_chars (GtkLabel *label,
  * Retrieves the desired width of @label, in characters. See
  * gtk_label_set_width_chars().
  * 
- * Return value: the width of the label in characters.
+ * Returns: the width of the label in characters.
  * 
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -2972,7 +2972,7 @@ gtk_label_set_max_width_chars (GtkLabel *label,
  * Retrieves the desired maximum width of @label, in characters. See
  * gtk_label_set_width_chars().
  * 
- * Return value: the maximum width of the label in characters.
+ * Returns: the maximum width of the label in characters.
  * 
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -3028,7 +3028,7 @@ gtk_label_set_line_wrap (GtkLabel *label,
  * Returns whether lines in the label are automatically wrapped. 
  * See gtk_label_set_line_wrap().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_label_get_line_wrap (GtkLabel *label)
@@ -3074,7 +3074,7 @@ gtk_label_set_line_wrap_mode (GtkLabel *label,
  *
  * Returns line wrap mode used by the label. See gtk_label_set_line_wrap_mode().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -5203,7 +5203,7 @@ gtk_label_set_selectable (GtkLabel *label,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_label_set_selectable().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the user can copy text from the label
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the user can copy text from the label
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_label_get_selectable (GtkLabel *label)
@@ -5265,7 +5265,7 @@ gtk_label_set_angle (GtkLabel *label,
  * Gets the angle of rotation for the label. See
  * gtk_label_set_angle().
  * 
- * Return value: the angle of rotation for the label
+ * Returns: the angle of rotation for the label
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -5460,7 +5460,7 @@ gtk_label_select_region  (GtkLabel *label,
  * Gets the selected range of characters in the label, returning %TRUE
  * if there’s a selection.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if selection is non-empty
+ * Returns: %TRUE if selection is non-empty
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_label_get_selection_bounds (GtkLabel  *label,
@@ -5534,7 +5534,7 @@ gtk_label_get_selection_bounds (GtkLabel  *label,
  * freed by the caller. The @label is free to recreate its layout at
  * any time, so it should be considered read-only.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #PangoLayout for this label
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #PangoLayout for this label
  **/
 PangoLayout*
 gtk_label_get_layout (GtkLabel *label)
@@ -5608,7 +5608,7 @@ gtk_label_set_use_markup (GtkLabel *label,
  * the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
  * See gtk_label_set_use_markup ().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the label’s text will be parsed for markup.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the label’s text will be parsed for markup.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_label_get_use_markup (GtkLabel *label)
@@ -5647,7 +5647,7 @@ gtk_label_set_use_underline (GtkLabel *label,
  * Returns whether an embedded underline in the label indicates a
  * mnemonic. See gtk_label_set_use_underline().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE whether an embedded underline in the label indicates
+ * Returns: %TRUE whether an embedded underline in the label indicates
  *               the mnemonic accelerator keys.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -5696,7 +5696,7 @@ gtk_label_set_single_line_mode (GtkLabel *label,
  *
  * Returns whether the label is in single line mode.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE when the label is in single line mode.
+ * Returns: %TRUE when the label is in single line mode.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtklayout.c b/gtk/gtklayout.c
index 176f626716..30e551a600 100644
--- a/gtk/gtklayout.c
+++ b/gtk/gtklayout.c
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ G_DEFINE_TYPE_WITH_CODE (GtkLayout, gtk_layout, GTK_TYPE_CONTAINER,
  * you’d like the layout to use for scrolling, pass %NULL for
  * @hadjustment and @vadjustment.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkLayout
+ * Returns: a new #GtkLayout
  **/
   
 GtkWidget*    
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ gtk_layout_new (GtkAdjustment *hadjustment,
  *
  * Retrieve the bin window of the layout used for drawing operations.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GdkWindow
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GdkWindow
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ gtk_layout_get_bin_window (GtkLayout *layout)
  *
  * See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): horizontal scroll adjustment
+ * Returns: (transfer none): horizontal scroll adjustment
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use gtk_scrollable_get_hadjustment()
  **/
@@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ gtk_layout_get_hadjustment (GtkLayout *layout)
  *
  * See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): vertical scroll adjustment
+ * Returns: (transfer none): vertical scroll adjustment
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use gtk_scrollable_get_vadjustment()
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtklevelbar.c b/gtk/gtklevelbar.c
index c7c143619f..1af260bdc2 100644
--- a/gtk/gtklevelbar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtklevelbar.c
@@ -1295,7 +1295,7 @@ gtk_level_bar_set_mode (GtkLevelBar     *self,
  *
  * Return the value of the #GtkLevelBar:inverted property.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the level bar is inverted
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the level bar is inverted
  *
  * Since: 3.8
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtklinkbutton.c b/gtk/gtklinkbutton.c
index 44d7ce2a70..11b887fb7e 100644
--- a/gtk/gtklinkbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtklinkbutton.c
@@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ gtk_link_button_drag_data_get_cb (GtkWidget        *widget,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkLinkButton with the URI as its text.
  *
- * Return value: a new link button widget.
+ * Returns: a new link button widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ gtk_link_button_new (const gchar *uri)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkLinkButton containing a label.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a new link button widget.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a new link button widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -708,7 +708,7 @@ gtk_link_button_set_uri (GtkLinkButton *link_button,
  *
  * Retrieves the URI set using gtk_link_button_set_uri().
  *
- * Return value: a valid URI.  The returned string is owned by the link button
+ * Returns: a valid URI.  The returned string is owned by the link button
  *   and should not be modified or freed.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -768,7 +768,7 @@ gtk_link_button_set_visited (GtkLinkButton *link_button,
  *
  * The state may also be changed using gtk_link_button_set_visited().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the link has been visited, %FALSE otherwise
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the link has been visited, %FALSE otherwise
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtklistbox.c b/gtk/gtklistbox.c
index 941a2b752a..c4bc26cb7c 100644
--- a/gtk/gtklistbox.c
+++ b/gtk/gtklistbox.c
@@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ gtk_list_box_class_init (GtkListBoxClass *klass)
  *
  * Gets the selected row.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the selected #GtkWidget
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the selected #GtkWidget
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ gtk_list_box_get_selected_row (GtkListBox *list_box)
  *
  * Gets the n:th child in the list (not counting headers).
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the child #GtkWidget
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the child #GtkWidget
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ gtk_list_box_get_row_at_index (GtkListBox *list_box,
  *
  * Gets the row at the @y position.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the row
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the row
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -657,7 +657,7 @@ gtk_list_box_set_adjustment (GtkListBox    *list_box,
  * Gets the adjustment (if any) that the widget uses to
  * for vertical scrolling.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the adjustment
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the adjustment
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -2744,7 +2744,7 @@ gtk_list_box_row_changed (GtkListBoxRow *row)
  * in a #GtkListBoxUpdateHeaderFunc to see if there is a header
  * set already, and if so to update the state of it.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the current header, or %NULL if none
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the current header, or %NULL if none
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkliststore.c b/gtk/gtkliststore.c
index fcb1300b74..b730e64373 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkliststore.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkliststore.c
@@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ iter_is_valid (GtkTreeIter  *iter,
  * GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF);` will create a new #GtkListStore with three columns, of type
  * int, string and #GdkPixbuf respectively.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkListStore
+ * Returns: a new #GtkListStore
  */
 GtkListStore *
 gtk_list_store_new (gint n_columns,
@@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ gtk_list_store_new (gint n_columns,
  *
  * Non-vararg creation function.  Used primarily by language bindings.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a new #GtkListStore
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a new #GtkListStore
  **/
 GtkListStore *
 gtk_list_store_newv (gint   n_columns,
@@ -1189,7 +1189,7 @@ gtk_list_store_set (GtkListStore *list_store,
  * @iter is set to be the next valid row, or invalidated if it pointed 
  * to the last row in @list_store.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter is valid, %FALSE if not.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter is valid, %FALSE if not.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_list_store_remove (GtkListStore *list_store,
@@ -1444,7 +1444,7 @@ gtk_list_store_clear (GtkListStore *list_store)
  *
  * Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkListStore.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmain.c b/gtk/gtkmain.c
index 684e152e7c..c3367e1af4 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmain.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmain.c
@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ gtk_get_interface_age (void)
  * old version of gtk_check_version(), but still get loaded
  * into an application using a newer version of GTK+.
  *
- * Return value: %NULL if the GTK+ library is compatible with the
+ * Returns: %NULL if the GTK+ library is compatible with the
  *   given version, or a string describing the version mismatch.
  *   The returned string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified
  *   or freed.
@@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ gtk_init_with_args (gint                 *argc,
  * There is no need to call this function explicitly if you are using
  * gtk_init(), or gtk_init_check().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if initialization succeeded, otherwise %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if initialization succeeded, otherwise %FALSE
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_parse_args (int    *argc,
@@ -969,7 +969,7 @@ gtk_parse_args (int    *argc,
  * communication with the user - for example a curses or command line
  * interface.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the windowing system has been successfully
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the windowing system has been successfully
  *     initialized, %FALSE otherwise
  */
 gboolean
@@ -1159,7 +1159,7 @@ gtk_get_locale_direction (void)
  * This function is equivalent to pango_language_get_default().
  * See that function for details.
  *
- * Return value: the default language as a #PangoLanguage,
+ * Returns: the default language as a #PangoLanguage,
  *     must not be freed
  */
 PangoLanguage *
@@ -2085,7 +2085,7 @@ gtk_grab_add (GtkWidget *widget)
  *
  * Queries the current grab of the default window group.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The widget which currently
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The widget which currently
  *     has the grab or %NULL if no grab is active
  */
 GtkWidget*
@@ -2287,7 +2287,7 @@ gtk_invoke_key_snoopers (GtkWidget *grab_widget,
  * the current event will be the #GdkEventButton that triggered
  * the ::clicked signal.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a copy of the current event, or
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a copy of the current event, or
  *     %NULL if there is no current event. The returned event must be
  *     freed with gdk_event_free().
  */
@@ -2306,7 +2306,7 @@ gtk_get_current_event (void)
  * If there is a current event and it has a timestamp,
  * return that timestamp, otherwise return %GDK_CURRENT_TIME.
  *
- * Return value: the timestamp from the current event,
+ * Returns: the timestamp from the current event,
  *     or %GDK_CURRENT_TIME.
  */
 guint32
@@ -2326,7 +2326,7 @@ gtk_get_current_event_time (void)
  * that state field in @state and return %TRUE, otherwise return
  * %FALSE.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if there was a current event and it
+ * Returns: %TRUE if there was a current event and it
  *     had a state field
  */
 gboolean
@@ -2368,7 +2368,7 @@ gtk_get_current_event_device (void)
  * returns %NULL, otherwise returns the widget that received the event
  * originally.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the widget that originally
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the widget that originally
  *     received @event, or %NULL
  */
 GtkWidget*
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmenu.c b/gtk/gtkmenu.c
index bb0e5d69d3..a31ec09004 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmenu.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmenu.c
@@ -2363,7 +2363,7 @@ gtk_menu_set_tearoff_state (GtkMenu  *menu,
  * Returns whether the menu is torn off.
  * See gtk_menu_set_tearoff_state().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the menu is currently torn off.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the menu is currently torn off.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.10
  */
@@ -2412,7 +2412,7 @@ gtk_menu_set_title (GtkMenu     *menu,
  *
  * Returns the title of the menu. See gtk_menu_set_title().
  *
- * Return value: the title of the menu, or %NULL if the menu
+ * Returns: the title of the menu, or %NULL if the menu
  *     has no title set on it. This string is owned by GTK+
  *     and should not be modified or freed.
  *
@@ -5517,7 +5517,7 @@ gtk_menu_get_monitor (GtkMenu *menu)
  * Returns a list of the menus which are attached to this widget.
  * This list is owned by GTK+ and must not be modified.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer none): the list
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer none): the list
  *     of menus attached to his widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmenubar.c b/gtk/gtkmenubar.c
index cf84de8379..217308577f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmenubar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmenubar.c
@@ -913,7 +913,7 @@ gtk_menu_bar_move_current (GtkMenuShell         *menu_shell,
  * Retrieves the current pack direction of the menubar. 
  * See gtk_menu_bar_set_pack_direction().
  *
- * Return value: the pack direction
+ * Returns: the pack direction
  *
  * Since: 2.8
  */
@@ -966,7 +966,7 @@ gtk_menu_bar_set_pack_direction (GtkMenuBar       *menubar,
  * Retrieves the current child pack direction of the menubar.
  * See gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction().
  *
- * Return value: the child pack direction
+ * Returns: the child pack direction
  *
  * Since: 2.8
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmenubutton.c b/gtk/gtkmenubutton.c
index 3a81230e57..aa11a8d3e6 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmenubutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmenubutton.c
@@ -1055,7 +1055,7 @@ gtk_menu_button_set_use_popover (GtkMenuButton *menu_button,
  * Returns whether a #GtkPopover or a #GtkMenu will be constructed
  * from the menu model.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if using a #GtkPopover
+ * Returns: %TRUE if using a #GtkPopover
  *
  * Since: 3.12
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmenuitem.c b/gtk/gtkmenuitem.c
index a4bb5613ac..e36715feb9 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmenuitem.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmenuitem.c
@@ -1137,7 +1137,7 @@ activatable_update_label (GtkMenuItem *menu_item, GtkAction *action)
  * 
  * This function is used by #GtkAction.
  *
- * Return value: whether @menu is empty.
+ * Returns: whether @menu is empty.
  **/
 static gboolean
 gtk_menu_is_empty (GtkWidget *menu)
@@ -1358,7 +1358,7 @@ gtk_menu_item_set_submenu (GtkMenuItem *menu_item,
  * Gets the submenu underneath this menu item, if any.
  * See gtk_menu_item_set_submenu().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): submenu for this menu item, or %NULL if none
+ * Returns: (transfer none): submenu for this menu item, or %NULL if none
  */
 GtkWidget *
 gtk_menu_item_get_submenu (GtkMenuItem *menu_item)
@@ -2262,7 +2262,7 @@ gtk_menu_item_set_right_justified (GtkMenuItem *menu_item,
  * Gets whether the menu item appears justified at the right
  * side of the menu bar.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the menu item will appear at the
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the menu item will appear at the
  *   far right if added to a menu bar.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.2: See gtk_menu_item_set_right_justified()
@@ -2593,7 +2593,7 @@ gtk_menu_item_set_use_underline (GtkMenuItem *menu_item,
  * Checks if an underline in the text indicates the next character
  * should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if an embedded underline in the label
+ * Returns: %TRUE if an embedded underline in the label
  *     indicates the mnemonic accelerator key.
  *
  * Since: 2.16
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmenutoolbutton.c b/gtk/gtkmenutoolbutton.c
index 3385e13fcb..f2932cc198 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmenutoolbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmenutoolbutton.c
@@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ gtk_menu_tool_button_buildable_interface_init (GtkBuildableIface *iface)
  * Creates a new #GtkMenuToolButton using @icon_widget as icon and
  * @label as label.
  *
- * Return value: the new #GtkMenuToolButton
+ * Returns: the new #GtkMenuToolButton
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ gtk_menu_tool_button_new (GtkWidget   *icon_widget,
  * The new #GtkMenuToolButton will contain an icon and label from
  * the stock item indicated by @stock_id.
  *
- * Return value: the new #GtkMenuToolButton
+ * Returns: the new #GtkMenuToolButton
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  *
@@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ gtk_menu_tool_button_set_menu (GtkMenuToolButton *button,
  *
  * Gets the #GtkMenu associated with #GtkMenuToolButton.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkMenu associated
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GtkMenu associated
  *     with #GtkMenuToolButton
  *
  * Since: 2.6
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmessagedialog.c b/gtk/gtkmessagedialog.c
index 1a90e3e211..e3f8ec4ff9 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmessagedialog.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmessagedialog.c
@@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ gtk_message_dialog_get_property (GObject     *object,
  * signal is emitted with response IDs from #GtkResponseType. See
  * #GtkDialog for more details.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a new #GtkMessageDialog
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a new #GtkMessageDialog
  */
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_message_dialog_new (GtkWindow     *parent,
@@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ gtk_message_dialog_new (GtkWindow     *parent,
  *                                 markup);
  * ]|
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkMessageDialog
+ * Returns: a new #GtkMessageDialog
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ gtk_message_dialog_set_image (GtkMessageDialog *dialog,
  *
  * Gets the dialog’s image.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the dialog’s image
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the dialog’s image
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  * Deprecated: 3.12: Use #GtkDialog for dialogs with images
@@ -851,7 +851,7 @@ gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (GtkMessageDialog *message_dialog,
  * See gtk_dialog_get_content_area() for the corresponding
  * function in the parent #GtkDialog.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GtkVBox corresponding to the
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GtkVBox corresponding to the
  *     “message area” in the @message_dialog.
  *
  * Since: 2.22
diff --git a/gtk/gtkmodules.c b/gtk/gtkmodules.c
index 6ececa1ebd..640be7bb55 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkmodules.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkmodules.c
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ get_module_path (void)
  * 
  * Determines the search path for a particular type of module.
  * 
- * Return value: the search path for the module type. Free with g_strfreev().
+ * Returns: the search path for the module type. Free with g_strfreev().
  **/
 gchar **
 _gtk_get_module_path (const gchar *type)
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ module_build_la_path (const gchar *directory,
  * Looks for a dynamically module named @name of type @type in the standard GTK+
  *  module search path.
  * 
- * Return value: the pathname to the found module, or %NULL if it wasn’t found.
+ * Returns: the pathname to the found module, or %NULL if it wasn’t found.
  *  Free with g_free().
  **/
 gchar *
diff --git a/gtk/gtknotebook.c b/gtk/gtknotebook.c
index 2debf9ead5..dff3c3ee57 100644
--- a/gtk/gtknotebook.c
+++ b/gtk/gtknotebook.c
@@ -1566,7 +1566,7 @@ gtk_notebook_reorder_tab (GtkNotebook      *notebook,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkNotebook widget with no pages.
 
- * Return value: the newly created #GtkNotebook
+ * Returns: the newly created #GtkNotebook
  */
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_notebook_new (void)
@@ -6957,7 +6957,7 @@ gtk_notebook_menu_detacher (GtkWidget *widget,
  *
  * Appends a page to @notebook.
  *
- * Return value: the index (starting from 0) of the appended
+ * Returns: the index (starting from 0) of the appended
  *     page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
  */
 gint
@@ -6988,7 +6988,7 @@ gtk_notebook_append_page (GtkNotebook *notebook,
  * Appends a page to @notebook, specifying the widget to use as the
  * label in the popup menu.
  *
- * Return value: the index (starting from 0) of the appended
+ * Returns: the index (starting from 0) of the appended
  *     page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
  */
 gint
@@ -7014,7 +7014,7 @@ gtk_notebook_append_page_menu (GtkNotebook *notebook,
  *
  * Prepends a page to @notebook.
  *
- * Return value: the index (starting from 0) of the prepended
+ * Returns: the index (starting from 0) of the prepended
  *     page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
  */
 gint
@@ -7045,7 +7045,7 @@ gtk_notebook_prepend_page (GtkNotebook *notebook,
  * Prepends a page to @notebook, specifying the widget to use as the
  * label in the popup menu.
  *
- * Return value: the index (starting from 0) of the prepended
+ * Returns: the index (starting from 0) of the prepended
  *     page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
  */
 gint
@@ -7073,7 +7073,7 @@ gtk_notebook_prepend_page_menu (GtkNotebook *notebook,
  *
  * Insert a page into @notebook at the given position.
  *
- * Return value: the index (starting from 0) of the inserted
+ * Returns: the index (starting from 0) of the inserted
  *     page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
  */
 gint
@@ -7138,7 +7138,7 @@ gtk_notebook_mnemonic_activate_switch_page (GtkWidget *child,
  * Insert a page into @notebook at the given position, specifying
  * the widget to use as the label in the popup menu.
  *
- * Return value: the index (starting from 0) of the inserted
+ * Returns: the index (starting from 0) of the inserted
  *     page in the notebook
  */
 gint
@@ -7203,7 +7203,7 @@ gtk_notebook_remove_page (GtkNotebook *notebook,
  *
  * Returns the page number of the current page.
  *
- * Return value: the index (starting from 0) of the current
+ * Returns: the index (starting from 0) of the current
  *     page in the notebook. If the notebook has no pages,
  *     then -1 will be returned.
  */
@@ -7230,7 +7230,7 @@ gtk_notebook_get_current_page (GtkNotebook *notebook)
  *
  * Returns the child widget contained in page number @page_num.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the child widget, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the child widget, or %NULL
  *     if @page_num is out of bounds
  */
 GtkWidget*
@@ -7265,7 +7265,7 @@ gtk_notebook_get_nth_page (GtkNotebook *notebook,
  *
  * Gets the number of pages in a notebook.
  *
- * Return value: the number of pages in the notebook
+ * Returns: the number of pages in the notebook
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  */
@@ -7289,7 +7289,7 @@ gtk_notebook_get_n_pages (GtkNotebook *notebook)
  * Finds the index of the page which contains the given child
  * widget.
  *
- * Return value: the index of the page containing @child, or
+ * Returns: the index of the page containing @child, or
  *     -1 if @child is not in the notebook
  */
 gint
@@ -7460,7 +7460,7 @@ gtk_notebook_set_show_border (GtkNotebook *notebook,
  * Returns whether a bevel will be drawn around the notebook pages.
  * See gtk_notebook_set_show_border().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the bevel is drawn
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the bevel is drawn
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_notebook_get_show_border (GtkNotebook *notebook)
@@ -7545,7 +7545,7 @@ gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs (GtkNotebook *notebook,
  * Returns whether the tabs of the notebook are shown.
  * See gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the tabs are shown
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the tabs are shown
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs (GtkNotebook *notebook)
@@ -7590,7 +7590,7 @@ gtk_notebook_set_tab_pos (GtkNotebook     *notebook,
  * Gets the edge at which the tabs for switching pages in the
  * notebook are drawn.
  *
- * Return value: the edge at which the tabs are drawn
+ * Returns: the edge at which the tabs are drawn
  */
 GtkPositionType
 gtk_notebook_get_tab_pos (GtkNotebook *notebook)
@@ -7638,7 +7638,7 @@ gtk_notebook_set_scrollable (GtkNotebook *notebook,
  * Returns whether the tab label area has arrows for scrolling.
  * See gtk_notebook_set_scrollable().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if arrows for scrolling are present
+ * Returns: %TRUE if arrows for scrolling are present
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_notebook_get_scrollable (GtkNotebook *notebook)
@@ -7654,7 +7654,7 @@ gtk_notebook_get_scrollable (GtkNotebook *notebook)
  *
  * Returns the horizontal width of a tab border.
  *
- * Return value: horizontal width of a tab border
+ * Returns: horizontal width of a tab border
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  *
@@ -7674,7 +7674,7 @@ gtk_notebook_get_tab_hborder (GtkNotebook *notebook)
  *
  * Returns the vertical width of a tab border.
  *
- * Return value: vertical width of a tab border
+ * Returns: vertical width of a tab border
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  *
@@ -7782,7 +7782,7 @@ gtk_notebook_popup_disable  (GtkNotebook *notebook)
  * %NULL is returned if @child is not in @notebook or
  * if no tab label has specifically been set for @child.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the tab label
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the tab label
  */
 GtkWidget *
 gtk_notebook_get_tab_label (GtkNotebook *notebook,
@@ -7922,7 +7922,7 @@ gtk_notebook_set_tab_label_text (GtkNotebook *notebook,
  * Retrieves the text of the tab label for the page containing
  * @child.
  *
- * Return value: the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
+ * Returns: the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
  *     tab label widget is not a #GtkLabel. The string is owned
  *     by the widget and must not be freed.
  */
@@ -7950,7 +7950,7 @@ gtk_notebook_get_tab_label_text (GtkNotebook *notebook,
  *
  * Retrieves the menu label widget of the page containing @child.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the menu label, or %NULL if the
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the menu label, or %NULL if the
  *     notebook page does not have a menu label other than the
  *     default (the tab label).
  */
@@ -8059,7 +8059,7 @@ gtk_notebook_set_menu_label_text (GtkNotebook *notebook,
  * Retrieves the text of the menu label for the page containing
  * @child.
  *
- * Return value: the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
+ * Returns: the text of the tab label, or %NULL if the
  *     widget does not have a menu label other than the default
  *     menu label, or the menu label widget is not a #GtkLabel.
  *     The string is owned by the widget and must not be freed.
@@ -8276,7 +8276,7 @@ gtk_notebook_set_group_name (GtkNotebook *notebook,
  *
  * Gets the current group name for @notebook.
  *
- * Return Value: (transfer none): the group name,
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the group name,
  *     or %NULL if none is set.
  *
  * Since: 2.24
@@ -8296,7 +8296,7 @@ gtk_notebook_get_group_name (GtkNotebook *notebook)
  *
  * Gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.
  *
- * Return Value: %TRUE if the tab is reorderable.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the tab is reorderable.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -8357,7 +8357,7 @@ gtk_notebook_set_tab_reorderable (GtkNotebook *notebook,
  *
  * Returns whether the tab contents can be detached from @notebook.
  *
- * Return Value: %TRUE if the tab is detachable.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the tab is detachable.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkoffscreenwindow.c b/gtk/gtkoffscreenwindow.c
index 8e9f23f02c..192db55b4e 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkoffscreenwindow.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkoffscreenwindow.c
@@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ gtk_offscreen_window_init (GtkOffscreenWindow *window)
  * Creates a toplevel container widget that is used to retrieve
  * snapshots of widgets without showing them on the screen.
  *
- * Return value: A pointer to a #GtkWidget
+ * Returns: A pointer to a #GtkWidget
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkorientable.c b/gtk/gtkorientable.c
index 5c313c4fae..6917c4ed2c 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkorientable.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkorientable.c
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ gtk_orientable_set_orientation (GtkOrientable  *orientable,
  *
  * Retrieves the orientation of the @orientable.
  *
- * Return value: the orientation of the @orientable.
+ * Returns: the orientation of the @orientable.
  *
  * Since: 2.16
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkpagesetup.c b/gtk/gtkpagesetup.c
index 59bae8d32e..53d0f7b41f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkpagesetup.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkpagesetup.c
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_class_init (GtkPageSetupClass *class)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkPageSetup. 
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkPageSetup.
+ * Returns: a new #GtkPageSetup.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_new (void)
  *
  * Copies a #GtkPageSetup.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a copy of @other
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a copy of @other
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_copy (GtkPageSetup *other)
  * 
  * Gets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
  * 
- * Return value: the page orientation
+ * Returns: the page orientation
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_set_orientation (GtkPageSetup       *setup,
  * 
  * Gets the paper size of the #GtkPageSetup.
  * 
- * Return value: the paper size
+ * Returns: the paper size
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_set_paper_size_and_default_margins (GtkPageSetup *setup,
  * 
  * Gets the top margin in units of @unit.
  * 
- * Return value: the top margin
+ * Returns: the top margin
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_set_top_margin (GtkPageSetup *setup,
  * 
  * Gets the bottom margin in units of @unit.
  * 
- * Return value: the bottom margin
+ * Returns: the bottom margin
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_set_bottom_margin (GtkPageSetup *setup,
  * 
  * Gets the left margin in units of @unit.
  * 
- * Return value: the left margin
+ * Returns: the left margin
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_set_left_margin (GtkPageSetup *setup,
  * 
  * Gets the right margin in units of @unit.
  * 
- * Return value: the right margin
+ * Returns: the right margin
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_set_right_margin (GtkPageSetup *setup,
  * not margins into consideration. 
  * See gtk_page_setup_get_page_width().
  *
- * Return value: the paper width.
+ * Returns: the paper width.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width (GtkPageSetup *setup,
  * not margins into consideration.
  * See gtk_page_setup_get_page_height().
  *
- * Return value: the paper height.
+ * Returns: the paper height.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height (GtkPageSetup *setup,
  * margins into consideration. 
  * See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width().
  *
- * Return value: the page width.
+ * Returns: the page width.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_get_page_width (GtkPageSetup *setup,
  * margins into consideration. 
  * See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height().
  *
- * Return value: the page height.
+ * Returns: the page height.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_get_page_height (GtkPageSetup *setup,
  * Reads the page setup from the file @file_name.
  * See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE on success
+ * Returns: %TRUE on success
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
@@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_load_file (GtkPageSetup *setup,
  * new #GtkPageSetup object with the restored page setup, 
  * or %NULL if an error occurred. See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
  *
- * Return value: the restored #GtkPageSetup
+ * Returns: the restored #GtkPageSetup
  * 
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ string_to_enum (GType type,
  * Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
  * @key_file.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE on success
+ * Returns: %TRUE on success
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
@@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ out:
  * @key_file. Returns a new #GtkPageSetup object with the restored
  * page setup, or %NULL if an error occurred.
  *
- * Return value: the restored #GtkPageSetup
+ * Returns: the restored #GtkPageSetup
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -731,7 +731,7 @@ gtk_page_setup_new_from_key_file (GKeyFile     *key_file,
  * 
  * This function saves the information from @setup to @file_name.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE on success
+ * Returns: %TRUE on success
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkpaned.c b/gtk/gtkpaned.c
index b25d243a77..2fe515a5bd 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkpaned.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkpaned.c
@@ -1877,7 +1877,7 @@ gtk_paned_motion (GtkWidget      *widget,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkPaned widget.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkPaned.
+ * Returns: a new #GtkPaned.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
@@ -2070,7 +2070,7 @@ gtk_paned_forall (GtkContainer *container,
  * 
  * Obtains the position of the divider between the two panes.
  * 
- * Return value: position of the divider
+ * Returns: position of the divider
  **/
 gint
 gtk_paned_get_position (GtkPaned  *paned)
@@ -2143,7 +2143,7 @@ gtk_paned_set_position (GtkPaned *paned,
  * 
  * Obtains the first child of the paned widget.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): first child, or %NULL if it is not set.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): first child, or %NULL if it is not set.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -2161,7 +2161,7 @@ gtk_paned_get_child1 (GtkPaned *paned)
  * 
  * Obtains the second child of the paned widget.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): second child, or %NULL if it is not set.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): second child, or %NULL if it is not set.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -2832,7 +2832,7 @@ gtk_paned_toggle_handle_focus (GtkPaned *paned)
  * enables the callback to distinguish between the window
  * of the paned, a child and the handle.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the paned’s handle window.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the paned’s handle window.
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkpapersize.c b/gtk/gtkpapersize.c
index aced21cd52..95ead97b3c 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkpapersize.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkpapersize.c
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_new_from_info (const PaperInfo *info)
  * If @name is %NULL, the default paper size is returned,
  * see gtk_paper_size_get_default().
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkPaperSize, use gtk_paper_size_free()
+ * Returns: a new #GtkPaperSize, use gtk_paper_size_free()
  * to free it
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_new (const gchar *name)
  * @ppd_display_name, @width and @height are used to
  * construct a custom #GtkPaperSize object.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkPaperSize, use gtk_paper_size_free()
+ * Returns: a new #GtkPaperSize, use gtk_paper_size_free()
  * to free it
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_new_from_ppd (const gchar *ppd_name,
  * Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object with the
  * given parameters.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkPaperSize object, use gtk_paper_size_free()
+ * Returns: a new #GtkPaperSize object, use gtk_paper_size_free()
  * to free it
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_new_custom (const gchar *name,
  *
  * Copies an existing #GtkPaperSize.
  *
- * Return value: a copy of @other
+ * Returns: a copy of @other
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_free (GtkPaperSize *size)
  *
  * Compares two #GtkPaperSize objects.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE, if @size1 and @size2
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if @size1 and @size2
  * represent the same paper size
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_is_equal (GtkPaperSize *size1,
  *
  * Creates a list of known paper sizes.
  *
- * Return value:  (element-type GtkPaperSize) (transfer full): a newly allocated list of newly
+ * Returns:  (element-type GtkPaperSize) (transfer full): a newly allocated list of newly
  *    allocated #GtkPaperSize objects
  *
  * Since: 2.12
@@ -513,7 +513,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_get_paper_sizes (gboolean include_custom)
  *
  * Gets the name of the #GtkPaperSize.
  *
- * Return value: the name of @size
+ * Returns: the name of @size
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_get_name (GtkPaperSize *size)
  *
  * Gets the human-readable name of the #GtkPaperSize.
  *
- * Return value: the human-readable name of @size
+ * Returns: the human-readable name of @size
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -557,7 +557,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_get_display_name (GtkPaperSize *size)
  * Gets the PPD name of the #GtkPaperSize, which
  * may be %NULL.
  *
- * Return value: the PPD name of @size
+ * Returns: the PPD name of @size
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_get_ppd_name (GtkPaperSize *size)
  * Gets the paper width of the #GtkPaperSize, in
  * units of @unit.
  *
- * Return value: the paper width
+ * Returns: the paper width
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_get_width (GtkPaperSize *size,
  * Gets the paper height of the #GtkPaperSize, in
  * units of @unit.
  *
- * Return value: the paper height
+ * Returns: the paper height
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_get_height (GtkPaperSize *size,
  *
  * Returns %TRUE if @size is not a standard paper size.
  *
- * Return value: whether @size is a custom paper size.
+ * Returns: whether @size is a custom paper size.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_paper_size_is_custom (GtkPaperSize *size)
@@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_set_size (GtkPaperSize *size,
  * Returns the name of the default paper size, which
  * depends on the current locale.
  *
- * Return value: the name of the default paper size. The string
+ * Returns: the name of the default paper size. The string
  * is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -725,7 +725,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_get_default (void)
  *
  * Gets the default top margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
  *
- * Return value: the default top margin
+ * Returns: the default top margin
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -746,7 +746,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_get_default_top_margin (GtkPaperSize *size,
  *
  * Gets the default bottom margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
  *
- * Return value: the default bottom margin
+ * Returns: the default bottom margin
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -775,7 +775,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_get_default_bottom_margin (GtkPaperSize *size,
  *
  * Gets the default left margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
  *
- * Return value: the default left margin
+ * Returns: the default left margin
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ gtk_paper_size_get_default_left_margin (GtkPaperSize *size,
  *
  * Gets the default right margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
  *
- * Return value: the default right margin
+ * Returns: the default right margin
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkplacessidebar.c b/gtk/gtkplacessidebar.c
index 19af1df342..42ef84f356 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkplacessidebar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkplacessidebar.c
@@ -4203,7 +4203,7 @@ gtk_places_sidebar_class_init (GtkPlacesSidebarClass *class)
    *
    * The drag action to use must be the return value of the signal handler.
    *
-   * Return value: The drag action to use, for example, #GDK_ACTION_COPY
+   * Returns: The drag action to use, for example, #GDK_ACTION_COPY
    * or #GDK_ACTION_MOVE, or 0 if no action is allowed here (i.e. drops
    * are not allowed in the specified @dest_file).
    *
@@ -4229,7 +4229,7 @@ gtk_places_sidebar_class_init (GtkPlacesSidebarClass *class)
    * The places sidebar emits this signal when it needs to ask the application
    * to pop up a menu to ask the user for which drag action to perform.
    *
-   * Return value: the final drag action that the sidebar should pass to the drag side
+   * Returns: the final drag action that the sidebar should pass to the drag side
    * of the drag-and-drop operation.
    *
    * Since: 3.10
@@ -4601,7 +4601,7 @@ gtk_places_sidebar_set_show_desktop (GtkPlacesSidebar *sidebar,
  *
  * Returns the value previously set with gtk_places_sidebar_set_show_desktop()
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the sidebar will display a builtin shortcut to the desktop folder.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the sidebar will display a builtin shortcut to the desktop folder.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -4645,7 +4645,7 @@ gtk_places_sidebar_set_show_connect_to_server (GtkPlacesSidebar *sidebar,
  *
  * Returns the value previously set with gtk_places_sidebar_set_show_connect_to_server()
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the sidebar will display a “Connect to Server” item.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the sidebar will display a “Connect to Server” item.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -4687,7 +4687,7 @@ gtk_places_sidebar_set_local_only (GtkPlacesSidebar *sidebar,
  *
  * Returns the value previously set with gtk_places_sidebar_set_local_only().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the sidebar will only show local files.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the sidebar will only show local files.
  *
  * Since: 3.12
  */
@@ -4786,7 +4786,7 @@ gtk_places_sidebar_remove_shortcut (GtkPlacesSidebar *sidebar,
  *
  * Gets the list of shortcuts.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GFile) (transfer full):
+ * Returns: (element-type GFile) (transfer full):
  *     A #GSList of #GFile of the locations that have been added as
  *     application-specific shortcuts with gtk_places_sidebar_add_shortcut().
  * To free this list, you can use
@@ -4813,7 +4813,7 @@ gtk_places_sidebar_list_shortcuts (GtkPlacesSidebar *sidebar)
  * and returns one of them.  This function is used by #GtkFileChooser to implement
  * the “Alt-1”, “Alt-2”, etc. shortcuts, which activate the cooresponding bookmark.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): The bookmark specified by the index @n, or
+ * Returns: (transfer full): The bookmark specified by the index @n, or
  * #NULL if no such index exist.  Note that the indices start at 0, even though
  * the file chooser starts them with the keyboard shortcut “Alt-1”.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkplug.c b/gtk/gtkplug.c
index 8482dce7b1..53c6f3eed6 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkplug.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkplug.c
@@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ gtk_plug_set_is_child (GtkPlug  *plug,
  * be used to embed this window inside another window, for
  * instance with gtk_socket_add_id().
  * 
- * Return value: the window ID for the plug
+ * Returns: the window ID for the plug
  **/
 Window
 gtk_plug_get_id (GtkPlug *plug)
@@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ gtk_plug_get_id (GtkPlug *plug)
  *
  * Determines whether the plug is embedded in a socket.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the plug is embedded in a socket
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the plug is embedded in a socket
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ gtk_plug_get_embedded (GtkPlug *plug)
  *
  * Retrieves the socket the plug is embedded in.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the window of the socket, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the window of the socket, or %NULL
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ gtk_plug_construct_for_display (GtkPlug    *plug,
  * by @socket_id. If @socket_id is 0, the plug is left “unplugged” and
  * can later be plugged into a #GtkSocket by  gtk_socket_add_id().
  * 
- * Return value: the new #GtkPlug widget.
+ * Returns: the new #GtkPlug widget.
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_plug_new (Window socket_id)
@@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ gtk_plug_new (Window socket_id)
  * 
  * Create a new plug widget inside the #GtkSocket identified by socket_id.
  *
- * Return value: the new #GtkPlug widget.
+ * Returns: the new #GtkPlug widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkpopover.c b/gtk/gtkpopover.c
index 1dc99cfc64..26b68dd24d 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkpopover.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkpopover.c
@@ -2161,7 +2161,7 @@ gtk_popover_bind_model (GtkPopover  *popover,
  * Actions can also be added using gtk_widget_insert_action_group()
  * on the menus attach widget or on any of its parent widgets.
  *
- * Return value: the new #GtkPopover
+ * Returns: the new #GtkPopover
  *
  * Since: 3.12
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkprintbackend.c b/gtk/gtkprintbackend.c
index fc2a210022..3de625f304 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkprintbackend.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkprintbackend.c
@@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ _gtk_print_backend_create (const gchar *backend_name)
 /**
  * gtk_print_backend_load_modules:
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkPrintBackend) (transfer container):
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkPrintBackend) (transfer container):
  */
 GList *
 gtk_print_backend_load_modules (void)
@@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ gtk_print_backend_set_list_done (GtkPrintBackend *backend)
  *
  * Returns the current list of printers.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkPrinter) (transfer container):
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkPrinter) (transfer container):
  *   A list of #GtkPrinter objects. The list should be freed
  *   with g_list_free().
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkprintcontext.c b/gtk/gtkprintcontext.c
index fe3d4234d8..4b2759054f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkprintcontext.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkprintcontext.c
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ _gtk_print_context_set_page_setup (GtkPrintContext *context,
  * Obtains the cairo context that is associated with the
  * #GtkPrintContext.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the cairo context of @context
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the cairo context of @context
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ gtk_print_context_get_cairo_context (GtkPrintContext *context)
  * Obtains the #GtkPageSetup that determines the page
  * dimensions of the #GtkPrintContext.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the page setup of @context
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the page setup of @context
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ gtk_print_context_get_page_setup (GtkPrintContext *context)
  *
  * Obtains the width of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
  *
- * Return value: the width of @context
+ * Returns: the width of @context
  *
  * Since: 2.10 
  */
@@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ gtk_print_context_get_width (GtkPrintContext *context)
  * 
  * Obtains the height of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
  *
- * Return value: the height of @context
+ * Returns: the height of @context
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ gtk_print_context_get_height (GtkPrintContext *context)
  * Obtains the horizontal resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
  * in dots per inch.
  *
- * Return value: the horizontal resolution of @context
+ * Returns: the horizontal resolution of @context
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ gtk_print_context_get_dpi_x (GtkPrintContext *context)
  * Obtains the vertical resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
  * in dots per inch.
  *
- * Return value: the vertical resolution of @context
+ * Returns: the vertical resolution of @context
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ gtk_print_context_get_dpi_y (GtkPrintContext *context)
  *
  * Obtains the hardware printer margins of the #GtkPrintContext, in units.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the hard margins were retrieved
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the hard margins were retrieved
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  */
@@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ _gtk_print_context_set_hard_margins (GtkPrintContext *context,
  * Returns a #PangoFontMap that is suitable for use
  * with the #GtkPrintContext.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the font map of @context
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the font map of @context
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ gtk_print_context_get_pango_fontmap (GtkPrintContext *context)
  * Creates a new #PangoContext that can be used with the
  * #GtkPrintContext.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a new Pango context for @context
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a new Pango context for @context
  * 
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ gtk_print_context_create_pango_context (GtkPrintContext *context)
  * Creates a new #PangoLayout that is suitable for use
  * with the #GtkPrintContext.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer full): a new Pango layout for @context
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a new Pango layout for @context
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkprinter.c b/gtk/gtkprinter.c
index 53bc9538e1..63d327b972 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkprinter.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkprinter.c
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ gtk_printer_get_property (GObject    *object,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkPrinter.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkPrinter
+ * Returns: a new #GtkPrinter
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ gtk_printer_new (const gchar     *name,
  * 
  * Returns the backend of the printer.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the backend of @printer
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the backend of @printer
  * 
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ gtk_printer_get_backend (GtkPrinter *printer)
  * 
  * Returns the name of the printer.
  * 
- * Return value: the name of @printer
+ * Returns: the name of @printer
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ gtk_printer_get_name (GtkPrinter *printer)
  * 
  * Gets the description of the printer.
  * 
- * Return value: the description of @printer
+ * Returns: the description of @printer
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ gtk_printer_set_description (GtkPrinter  *printer,
  * Returns the state message describing the current state
  * of the printer.
  * 
- * Return value: the state message of @printer
+ * Returns: the state message of @printer
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ gtk_printer_set_state_message (GtkPrinter  *printer,
  * 
  * Returns a description of the location of the printer.
  * 
- * Return value: the location of @printer
+ * Returns: the location of @printer
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -558,7 +558,7 @@ gtk_printer_set_location (GtkPrinter  *printer,
  * 
  * Gets the name of the icon to use for the printer.
  * 
- * Return value: the icon name for @printer
+ * Returns: the icon name for @printer
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -591,7 +591,7 @@ gtk_printer_set_icon_name (GtkPrinter  *printer,
  * 
  * Gets the number of jobs currently queued on the printer.
  * 
- * Return value: the number of jobs on @printer
+ * Returns: the number of jobs on @printer
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ gtk_printer_set_job_count (GtkPrinter *printer,
  * 
  * Returns whether the printer details are available.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @printer details are available
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @printer details are available
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -655,7 +655,7 @@ gtk_printer_set_has_details (GtkPrinter *printer,
  * Returns whether the printer is currently active (i.e. 
  * accepts new jobs).
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @printer is active
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @printer is active
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -684,7 +684,7 @@ gtk_printer_set_is_active (GtkPrinter *printer,
  * A paused printer still accepts jobs, but it is not
  * printing them.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @printer is paused
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @printer is paused
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
@@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ gtk_printer_set_is_paused (GtkPrinter *printer,
  * 
  * Returns whether the printer is accepting jobs
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @printer is accepting jobs
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @printer is accepting jobs
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
@@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ gtk_printer_set_is_accepting_jobs (GtkPrinter *printer,
  * represent actual printer hardware, but something like 
  * a CUPS class).
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @printer is virtual
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @printer is virtual
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -777,7 +777,7 @@ gtk_printer_is_virtual (GtkPrinter *printer)
  * Returns whether the printer accepts input in
  * PDF format.  
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @printer accepts PDF
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @printer accepts PDF
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -805,7 +805,7 @@ gtk_printer_set_accepts_pdf (GtkPrinter *printer,
  * Returns whether the printer accepts input in
  * PostScript format.  
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -850,7 +850,7 @@ gtk_printer_set_is_new (GtkPrinter *printer,
  * 
  * Returns whether the printer is the default printer.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @printer is the default
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @printer is the default
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -949,7 +949,7 @@ _gtk_printer_create_cairo_surface (GtkPrinter       *printer,
  * This will return and empty list unless the printer’s details are 
  * available, see gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkPageSetup) (transfer full): a newly allocated list of newly allocated #GtkPageSetup s.
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkPageSetup) (transfer full): a newly allocated list of newly allocated #GtkPageSetup s.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -970,7 +970,7 @@ gtk_printer_list_papers (GtkPrinter *printer)
  *
  * Returns default page size of @printer.
  * 
- * Return value: a newly allocated #GtkPageSetup with default page size of the printer.
+ * Returns: a newly allocated #GtkPageSetup with default page size of the printer.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
@@ -999,7 +999,7 @@ gtk_printer_get_default_page_size (GtkPrinter *printer)
  * Note: This will not succeed unless the printer’s details are available,
  * see gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE iff the hard margins were retrieved
+ * Returns: %TRUE iff the hard margins were retrieved
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  */
@@ -1028,7 +1028,7 @@ gtk_printer_get_hard_margins (GtkPrinter *printer,
  * This will return 0 unless the printer’s details are available, see
  * gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
  *
- * Return value: the printer’s capabilities
+ * Returns: the printer’s capabilities
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -1050,7 +1050,7 @@ gtk_printer_get_capabilities (GtkPrinter *printer)
  *
  * Compares two printers.
  * 
- * Return value: 0 if the printer match, a negative value if @a < @b, 
+ * Returns: 0 if the printer match, a negative value if @a < @b, 
  *   or a positive value if @a > @b
  *
  * Since: 2.10
diff --git a/gtk/gtkprinteroptionset.c b/gtk/gtkprinteroptionset.c
index 4041462c22..d28b0fb680 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkprinteroptionset.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkprinteroptionset.c
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ gtk_printer_option_set_clear_conflicts (GtkPrinterOptionSet *set)
 /**
  * gtk_printer_option_set_get_groups:
  *
- * Return value: (element-type utf8) (transfer full):
+ * Returns: (element-type utf8) (transfer full):
  */
 GList *
 gtk_printer_option_set_get_groups (GtkPrinterOptionSet *set)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkprintjob.c b/gtk/gtkprintjob.c
index ba44d4039a..d31b7dc061 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkprintjob.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkprintjob.c
@@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ gtk_print_job_finalize (GObject *object)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkPrintJob.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkPrintJob
+ * Returns: a new #GtkPrintJob
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ gtk_print_job_new (const gchar      *title,
  * 
  * Gets the #GtkPrintSettings of the print job.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the settings of @job
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the settings of @job
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ gtk_print_job_get_settings (GtkPrintJob *job)
  * 
  * Gets the #GtkPrinter of the print job.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the printer of @job
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the printer of @job
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ gtk_print_job_get_printer (GtkPrintJob *job)
  * 
  * Gets the job title.
  * 
- * Return value: the title of @job
+ * Returns: the title of @job
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ gtk_print_job_get_title (GtkPrintJob *job)
  * 
  * Gets the status of the print job.
  * 
- * Return value: the status of @job
+ * Returns: the status of @job
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -464,7 +464,7 @@ gtk_print_job_set_source_file (GtkPrintJob *job,
  * Gets a cairo surface onto which the pages of
  * the print job should be rendered.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the cairo surface of @job
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the cairo surface of @job
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ gtk_print_job_set_track_print_status (GtkPrintJob *job,
  * Returns wheter jobs will be tracked after printing.
  * For details, see gtk_print_job_set_track_print_status().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if print job status will be reported after printing
+ * Returns: %TRUE if print job status will be reported after printing
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkprintoperation-unix.c b/gtk/gtkprintoperation-unix.c
index 6b24217987..ebf2a4d30f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkprintoperation-unix.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkprintoperation-unix.c
@@ -965,7 +965,7 @@ get_page_setup_dialog (GtkWindow        *parent,
  * setup dialog. See gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog_async() if this is 
  * a problem.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer full): a new #GtkPageSetup
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a new #GtkPageSetup
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkprintoperation.c b/gtk/gtkprintoperation.c
index 02b036416c..245908087d 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkprintoperation.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkprintoperation.c
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ G_DEFINE_TYPE_WITH_CODE (GtkPrintOperation, gtk_print_operation, G_TYPE_OBJECT,
  *
  * Registers an error quark for #GtkPrintOperation if necessary.
  * 
- * Return value: The error quark used for #GtkPrintOperation errors.
+ * Returns: The error quark used for #GtkPrintOperation errors.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -804,7 +804,7 @@ gtk_print_operation_class_init (GtkPrintOperationClass *class)
    * it all in the ::begin-print handler, and set the number of pages
    * from there.
    *
-   * Return value: %TRUE if pagination is complete
+   * Returns: %TRUE if pagination is complete
    *
    * Since: 2.10
    */
@@ -1550,7 +1550,7 @@ gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (GtkPrintOperation *op,
  * gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings() or
  * gtk_print_operation_run() have been called.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the current print settings of @op.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the current print settings of @op.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1809,7 +1809,7 @@ _gtk_print_operation_set_status (GtkPrintOperation *op,
  * Returns the status of the print operation. 
  * Also see gtk_print_operation_get_status_string().
  * 
- * Return value: the status of the print operation
+ * Returns: the status of the print operation
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1833,7 +1833,7 @@ gtk_print_operation_get_status (GtkPrintOperation *op)
  * Use gtk_print_operation_get_status() to obtain a status
  * value that is suitable for programmatic use. 
  * 
- * Return value: a string representation of the status
+ * Returns: a string representation of the status
  *    of the print operation
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1858,7 +1858,7 @@ gtk_print_operation_get_status_string (GtkPrintOperation *op)
  * can be in a non-finished state even after done has been called, as
  * the operation status then tracks the print job status on the printer.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE, if the print operation is finished.
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if the print operation is finished.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -3157,7 +3157,7 @@ gtk_print_operation_get_error (GtkPrintOperation  *op,
  * Note that gtk_print_operation_run() can only be called once on a
  * given #GtkPrintOperation.
  *
- * Return value: the result of the print operation. A return value of 
+ * Returns: the result of the print operation. A return value of 
  *   %GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY indicates that the printing was
  *   completed successfully. In this case, it is a good idea to obtain 
  *   the used print settings with gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings() 
diff --git a/gtk/gtkprintsettings.c b/gtk/gtkprintsettings.c
index 39d3a83352..160af5b3fc 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkprintsettings.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkprintsettings.c
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_class_init (GtkPrintSettingsClass *class)
  * 
  * Creates a new #GtkPrintSettings object.
  *  
- * Return value: a new #GtkPrintSettings object
+ * Returns: a new #GtkPrintSettings object
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ copy_hash_entry  (gpointer  key,
  *
  * Copies a #GtkPrintSettings object.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a newly allocated copy of @other
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a newly allocated copy of @other
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_copy (GtkPrintSettings *other)
  * 
  * Looks up the string value associated with @key.
  * 
- * Return value: the string value for @key
+ * Returns: the string value for @key
  * 
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_unset (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Returns %TRUE, if a value is associated with @key.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE, if @key has a value
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if @key has a value
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_has_key (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * The string “true” represents %TRUE, any other 
  * string %FALSE.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE, if @key maps to a true value.
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if @key maps to a true value.
  * 
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_get_bool (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * The string “true” represents %TRUE, the string
  * “false” represents %FALSE.
  *
- * Return value: the boolean value associated with @key
+ * Returns: the boolean value associated with @key
  * 
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_bool (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  *
  * Floating point numbers are parsed with g_ascii_strtod().
  *
- * Return value: the floating point number associated with @key
+ * Returns: the floating point number associated with @key
  * 
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_get_double_with_default (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Returns the double value associated with @key, or 0.
  * 
- * Return value: the double value of @key
+ * Returns: the double value of @key
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_double (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * Returns the value associated with @key, interpreted
  * as a length. The returned value is converted to @units.
  * 
- * Return value: the length value of @key, converted to @unit
+ * Returns: the length value of @key, converted to @unit
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_length (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * Returns the value of @key, interpreted as
  * an integer, or the default value.
  * 
- * Return value: the integer value of @key
+ * Returns: the integer value of @key
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_get_int_with_default (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Returns the integer value of @key, or 0.
  * 
- * Return value: the integer value of @key 
+ * Returns: the integer value of @key 
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_foreach (GtkPrintSettings    *settings,
  * Convenience function to obtain the value of 
  * %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER.
  *
- * Return value: the printer name
+ * Returns: the printer name
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_printer (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * Get the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_ORIENTATION, 
  * converted to a #GtkPageOrientation.
  * 
- * Return value: the orientation
+ * Returns: the orientation
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_orientation (GtkPrintSettings   *settings,
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT, 
  * converted to a #GtkPaperSize.
  * 
- * Return value: the paper size
+ * Returns: the paper size
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -697,7 +697,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_paper_size (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH,
  * converted to @unit. 
  * 
- * Return value: the paper width, in units of @unit
+ * Returns: the paper width, in units of @unit
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -734,7 +734,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_paper_width (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT,
  * converted to @unit. 
  * 
- * Return value: the paper height, in units of @unit
+ * Returns: the paper height, in units of @unit
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -773,7 +773,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_paper_height (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR.
  * 
- * Return value: whether to use color
+ * Returns: whether to use color
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -809,7 +809,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_use_color (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_COLLATE.
  * 
- * Return value: whether to collate the printed pages
+ * Returns: whether to collate the printed pages
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -845,7 +845,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_collate (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE.
  * 
- * Return value: whether to reverse the order of the printed pages
+ * Returns: whether to reverse the order of the printed pages
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -880,7 +880,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_reverse (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
  * 
- * Return value: whether to print the output in duplex.
+ * Returns: whether to print the output in duplex.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -941,7 +941,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_duplex (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.
  * 
- * Return value: the print quality
+ * Returns: the print quality
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1008,7 +1008,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_quality (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
  * 
- * Return value: the set of pages to print
+ * Returns: the set of pages to print
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1069,7 +1069,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_page_set (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT.
  * 
- * Return value: layout of page in number-up mode
+ * Returns: layout of page in number-up mode
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
@@ -1136,7 +1136,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_number_up_layout (GtkPrintSettings  *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
  * 
- * Return value: the number of copies to print
+ * Returns: the number of copies to print
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1169,7 +1169,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_n_copies (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP.
  * 
- * Return value: the number of pages per sheet
+ * Returns: the number of pages per sheet
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1202,7 +1202,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_number_up (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
  * 
- * Return value: the resolution in dpi
+ * Returns: the resolution in dpi
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1241,7 +1241,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_resolution (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X.
  * 
- * Return value: the horizontal resolution in dpi
+ * Returns: the horizontal resolution in dpi
  *
  * Since: 2.16
  */
@@ -1257,7 +1257,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_get_resolution_x (GtkPrintSettings *settings)
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.
  * 
- * Return value: the vertical resolution in dpi
+ * Returns: the vertical resolution in dpi
  *
  * Since: 2.16
  */
@@ -1298,7 +1298,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_resolution_xy (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI.
  * 
- * Return value: the resolution in lpi (lines per inch)
+ * Returns: the resolution in lpi (lines per inch)
  *
  * Since: 2.16
  */
@@ -1331,7 +1331,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_printer_lpi (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE.
  * 
- * Return value: the scale in percent
+ * Returns: the scale in percent
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1366,7 +1366,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_scale (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINT_PAGES.
  * 
- * Return value: which pages to print
+ * Returns: which pages to print
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1434,7 +1434,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_print_pages (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  *
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_RANGES.
  *
- * Return value: (array length=num_ranges) (transfer full): an array
+ * Returns: (array length=num_ranges) (transfer full): an array
  *     of #GtkPageRanges.  Use g_free() to free the array when
  *     it is no longer needed.
  *
@@ -1535,7 +1535,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_page_ranges  (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE.
  * 
- * Return value: the default source
+ * Returns: the default source
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1570,7 +1570,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_default_source (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
  * <!-- FIXME link here -->
  * 
- * Return value: the media type
+ * Returns: the media type
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1605,7 +1605,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_media_type (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
  * 
- * Return value: the dithering that is used
+ * Returns: the dithering that is used
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1637,7 +1637,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_dither (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS.
  * 
- * Return value: the finishings
+ * Returns: the finishings
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1669,7 +1669,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_finishings (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * 
  * Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_BIN.
  * 
- * Return value: the output bin
+ * Returns: the output bin
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1705,7 +1705,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_set_output_bin (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * then error is set to either a #GFileError or #GKeyFileError.
  * See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE on success
+ * Returns: %TRUE on success
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
@@ -1741,7 +1741,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_load_file (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
  * #GKeyFileError.  See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
  *
- * Return value: the restored #GtkPrintSettings
+ * Returns: the restored #GtkPrintSettings
  * 
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -1772,7 +1772,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_new_from_file (const gchar  *file_name,
  * file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
  * #GKeyFileError.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE on success
+ * Returns: %TRUE on success
  * 
  * Since: 2.14
  */
@@ -1834,7 +1834,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_load_key_file (GtkPrintSettings *settings,
  * error occurred. If the file could not be loaded then error is set to either
  * a #GFileError or #GKeyFileError.
  *
- * Return value: the restored #GtkPrintSettings
+ * Returns: the restored #GtkPrintSettings
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -1865,7 +1865,7 @@ gtk_print_settings_new_from_key_file (GKeyFile     *key_file,
  * file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
  * #GKeyFileError.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE on success
+ * Returns: %TRUE on success
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkprintunixdialog.c b/gtk/gtkprintunixdialog.c
index f846a18a06..12cf742c55 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkprintunixdialog.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkprintunixdialog.c
@@ -3372,7 +3372,7 @@ page_name_func (GtkCellLayout   *cell_layout,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkPrintUnixDialog.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+ * Returns: a new #GtkPrintUnixDialog
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkprivate.c b/gtk/gtkprivate.c
index 77463e384c..8f0da6d3b3 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkprivate.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkprivate.c
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ _gtk_get_data_prefix (void)
  * variables, and does return a Unix-style locale string based on
  * either said environment variables or the thread’s current locale.
  *
- * Return value: a dynamically allocated string, free with g_free().
+ * Returns: a dynamically allocated string, free with g_free().
  */
 
 gchar *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkprogressbar.c b/gtk/gtkprogressbar.c
index 71c583391a..568536c1c2 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkprogressbar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkprogressbar.c
@@ -1273,7 +1273,7 @@ gtk_progress_bar_set_inverted (GtkProgressBar *pbar,
  * to the text, not a copy of it, so will become invalid
  * if you change the text in the progress bar.
  *
- * Return value: text, or %NULL; this string is owned by the widget
+ * Returns: text, or %NULL; this string is owned by the widget
  * and should not be modified or freed.
  */
 const gchar*
@@ -1290,7 +1290,7 @@ gtk_progress_bar_get_text (GtkProgressBar *pbar)
  *
  * Returns the current fraction of the task that’s been completed.
  *
- * Return value: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+ * Returns: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
  */
 gdouble
 gtk_progress_bar_get_fraction (GtkProgressBar *pbar)
@@ -1306,7 +1306,7 @@ gtk_progress_bar_get_fraction (GtkProgressBar *pbar)
  *
  * Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step().
  *
- * Return value: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+ * Returns: a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
  */
 gdouble
 gtk_progress_bar_get_pulse_step (GtkProgressBar *pbar)
@@ -1322,7 +1322,7 @@ gtk_progress_bar_get_pulse_step (GtkProgressBar *pbar)
  *
  * Gets the value set by gtk_progress_bar_set_inverted().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the progress bar is inverted
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the progress bar is inverted
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_progress_bar_get_inverted (GtkProgressBar *pbar)
@@ -1370,7 +1370,7 @@ gtk_progress_bar_set_ellipsize (GtkProgressBar     *pbar,
  * Returns the ellipsizing position of the progress bar.
  * See gtk_progress_bar_set_ellipsize().
  *
- * Return value: #PangoEllipsizeMode
+ * Returns: #PangoEllipsizeMode
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkradiobutton.c b/gtk/gtkradiobutton.c
index 8fcd760197..1e88ac3c04 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkradiobutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkradiobutton.c
@@ -544,7 +544,7 @@ gtk_radio_button_new_with_mnemonic_from_widget (GtkRadioButton *radio_group_memb
  *
  * Retrieves the group assigned to a radio button.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkRadioButton) (transfer none): a linked list
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkRadioButton) (transfer none): a linked list
  * containing all the radio buttons in the same group
  * as @radio_button. The returned list is owned by the radio button
  * and must not be modified or freed.
diff --git a/gtk/gtkradiomenuitem.c b/gtk/gtkradiomenuitem.c
index 04c192aa84..82bc00108f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkradiomenuitem.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkradiomenuitem.c
@@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic (GSList *group,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem adding it to the same group as @group.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ gtk_radio_menu_item_new_from_widget (GtkRadioMenuItem *group)
  *
  * The new #GtkRadioMenuItem is added to the same group as @group.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic_from_widget (GtkRadioMenuItem *group,
  * Creates a new GtkRadioMenuItem whose child is a simple GtkLabel.
  * The new #GtkRadioMenuItem is added to the same group as @group.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkradiotoolbutton.c b/gtk/gtkradiotoolbutton.c
index 60d0d4a171..860abd94d3 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkradiotoolbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkradiotoolbutton.c
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ gtk_radio_tool_button_set_property (GObject         *object,
  * 
  * Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton, adding it to @group.
  * 
- * Return value: The new #GtkRadioToolButton
+ * Returns: The new #GtkRadioToolButton
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ gtk_radio_tool_button_new (GSList *group)
  * The new #GtkRadioToolButton will contain an icon and label from the
  * stock item indicated by @stock_id.
  * 
- * Return value: The new #GtkRadioToolButton
+ * Returns: The new #GtkRadioToolButton
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ gtk_radio_tool_button_new_from_stock (GSList      *group,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkRadioToolButton adding it to the same group as @gruup
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The new #GtkRadioToolButton
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The new #GtkRadioToolButton
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ gtk_radio_tool_button_new_from_widget (GtkRadioToolButton *group)
  * The new #GtkRadioToolButton will contain an icon and label from the
  * stock item indicated by @stock_id.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A new #GtkRadioToolButton
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A new #GtkRadioToolButton
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ get_radio_button (GtkRadioToolButton *button)
  *
  * Returns the radio button group @button belongs to.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none) (element-type GtkRadioButton): The group @button belongs to.
+ * Returns: (transfer none) (element-type GtkRadioButton): The group @button belongs to.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkrange.c b/gtk/gtkrange.c
index fc16d4b98d..6df5c8a90f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkrange.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkrange.c
@@ -763,7 +763,7 @@ gtk_range_init (GtkRange *range)
  * The return value does not have a reference added, so should not
  * be unreferenced.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GtkAdjustment
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GtkAdjustment
  **/
 GtkAdjustment*
 gtk_range_get_adjustment (GtkRange *range)
@@ -872,7 +872,7 @@ gtk_range_set_inverted (GtkRange *range,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_range_set_inverted().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the range is inverted
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the range is inverted
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_range_get_inverted (GtkRange *range)
@@ -920,7 +920,7 @@ gtk_range_set_flippable (GtkRange *range,
  *
  * Gets the value set by gtk_range_set_flippable().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the range is flippable
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the range is flippable
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -975,7 +975,7 @@ gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed (GtkRange *range,
  *
  * See gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed().
  *
- * Return value: whether the range’s slider has a fixed size.
+ * Returns: whether the range’s slider has a fixed size.
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
@@ -1030,7 +1030,7 @@ gtk_range_set_min_slider_size (GtkRange *range,
  *
  * See gtk_range_set_min_slider_size().
  *
- * Return value: The minimum size of the range’s slider.
+ * Returns: The minimum size of the range’s slider.
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
@@ -1144,7 +1144,7 @@ gtk_range_set_lower_stepper_sensitivity (GtkRange           *range,
  * Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
  * 'lower' end of the GtkRange’s adjustment.
  *
- * Return value: The lower stepper’s sensitivity policy.
+ * Returns: The lower stepper’s sensitivity policy.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1195,7 +1195,7 @@ gtk_range_set_upper_stepper_sensitivity (GtkRange           *range,
  * Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
  * 'upper' end of the GtkRange’s adjustment.
  *
- * Return value: The upper stepper’s sensitivity policy.
+ * Returns: The upper stepper’s sensitivity policy.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1310,7 +1310,7 @@ gtk_range_set_value (GtkRange *range,
  * 
  * Gets the current value of the range.
  * 
- * Return value: current value of the range.
+ * Returns: current value of the range.
  **/
 gdouble
 gtk_range_get_value (GtkRange *range)
@@ -1357,7 +1357,7 @@ gtk_range_set_show_fill_level (GtkRange *range,
  *
  * Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @range shows the fill level.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @range shows the fill level.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  **/
@@ -1407,7 +1407,7 @@ gtk_range_set_restrict_to_fill_level (GtkRange *range,
  *
  * Gets whether the range is restricted to the fill level.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @range is restricted to the fill level.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @range is restricted to the fill level.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  **/
@@ -1473,7 +1473,7 @@ gtk_range_set_fill_level (GtkRange *range,
  *
  * Gets the current position of the fill level indicator.
  *
- * Return value: The current fill level
+ * Returns: The current fill level
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  **/
@@ -2961,7 +2961,7 @@ gtk_range_button_release (GtkWidget      *widget,
  *
  * Returns a good step value for the mouse wheel.
  *
- * Return value: A good step value for the mouse wheel.
+ * Returns: A good step value for the mouse wheel.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -4376,7 +4376,7 @@ gtk_range_set_round_digits (GtkRange *range,
  * Gets the number of digits to round the value to when
  * it changes. See #GtkRange::change-value.
  *
- * Return value: the number of digits to round to
+ * Returns: the number of digits to round to
  *
  * Since: 2.24
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkrecentchooser.c b/gtk/gtkrecentchooser.c
index b3ee7883b5..8d6e6b4065 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkrecentchooser.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkrecentchooser.c
@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_error_quark (void)
  *
  * Gets the #GtkRecentManager used by @chooser.
  *
- * Return value: the recent manager for @chooser.
+ * Returns: the recent manager for @chooser.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_private (GtkRecentChooser *chooser,
  * Returns whether @chooser should display recently used resources
  * registered as private.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the recent chooser should show private items,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the recent chooser should show private items,
  *   %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_not_found (GtkRecentChooser *chooser,
  * Retrieves whether @chooser should show the recently used resources that
  * were not found.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the resources not found should be displayed, and
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the resources not found should be displayed, and
  *   %FALSE otheriwse.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_icons (GtkRecentChooser *chooser,
  *
  * Retrieves whether @chooser should show an icon near the resource.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the icons should be displayed, %FALSE otherwise.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the icons should be displayed, %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_set_select_multiple (GtkRecentChooser *chooser,
  *
  * Gets whether @chooser can select multiple items.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @chooser can select more than one item.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @chooser can select more than one item.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_set_local_only (GtkRecentChooser *chooser,
  * Gets whether only local resources should be shown in the recently used
  * resources selector.  See gtk_recent_chooser_set_local_only()
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if only local resources should be shown.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if only local resources should be shown.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_set_limit (GtkRecentChooser *chooser,
  * Gets the number of items returned by gtk_recent_chooser_get_items()
  * and gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris().
  *
- * Return value: A positive integer, or -1 meaning that all items are
+ * Returns: A positive integer, or -1 meaning that all items are
  *   returned.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_tips (GtkRecentChooser *chooser,
  * Gets whether @chooser should display tooltips containing the full path
  * of a recently user resource.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the recent chooser should show tooltips,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the recent chooser should show tooltips,
  *   %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_type (GtkRecentChooser  *chooser,
  *
  * Gets the value set by gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_type().
  *
- * Return value: the sorting order of the @chooser.
+ * Returns: the sorting order of the @chooser.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -682,7 +682,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_func  (GtkRecentChooser  *chooser,
  *
  * Sets @uri as the current URI for @chooser.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the URI was found.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the URI was found.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -702,7 +702,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_set_current_uri (GtkRecentChooser  *chooser,
  *
  * Gets the URI currently selected by @chooser.
  *
- * Return value: a newly allocated string holding a URI.
+ * Returns: a newly allocated string holding a URI.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_get_current_uri (GtkRecentChooser *chooser)
  * 
  * Gets the #GtkRecentInfo currently selected by @chooser.
  *
- * Return value: a #GtkRecentInfo.  Use gtk_recent_info_unref() when
+ * Returns: a #GtkRecentInfo.  Use gtk_recent_info_unref() when
  *   when you have finished using it.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -753,7 +753,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_get_current_item (GtkRecentChooser *chooser)
  *
  * Selects @uri inside @chooser.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @uri was found.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @uri was found.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -827,7 +827,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_unselect_all (GtkRecentChooser *chooser)
  * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and
  * “limit” properties of @chooser.
  *
- * Return value:  (element-type GtkRecentInfo) (transfer full): A newly allocated
+ * Returns:  (element-type GtkRecentInfo) (transfer full): A newly allocated
  *   list of #GtkRecentInfo objects.  You should
  *   use gtk_recent_info_unref() on every item of the list, and then free
  *   the list itself using g_list_free().
@@ -855,7 +855,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_get_items (GtkRecentChooser *chooser)
  *
  * Since the returned array is %NULL terminated, @length may be %NULL.
  * 
- * Return value: (array length=length zero-terminated=1) (transfer full):
+ * Returns: (array length=length zero-terminated=1) (transfer full):
  *     A newly allocated, %NULL-terminated array of strings. Use
  *     g_strfreev() to free it.
  *
@@ -943,7 +943,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_remove_filter (GtkRecentChooser *chooser,
  *
  * Gets the #GtkRecentFilter objects held by @chooser.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkRecentFilter) (transfer container): A singly linked list
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkRecentFilter) (transfer container): A singly linked list
  *   of #GtkRecentFilter objects.  You
  *   should just free the returned list using g_slist_free().
  *
@@ -984,7 +984,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter (GtkRecentChooser *chooser,
  * Gets the #GtkRecentFilter object currently used by @chooser to affect
  * the display of the recently used resources.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GtkRecentFilter object.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GtkRecentFilter object.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkrecentchooserdialog.c b/gtk/gtkrecentchooserdialog.c
index 00382f3aea..f4a3043db4 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkrecentchooserdialog.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkrecentchooserdialog.c
@@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_dialog_new_valist (const gchar      *title,
  * Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserDialog.  This function is analogous to
  * gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons().
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkRecentChooserDialog
+ * Returns: a new #GtkRecentChooserDialog
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_dialog_new (const gchar *title,
  * This is useful if you have implemented your own recent manager, or if you
  * have a customized instance of a #GtkRecentManager object.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkRecentChooserDialog
+ * Returns: a new #GtkRecentChooserDialog
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkrecentchoosermenu.c b/gtk/gtkrecentchoosermenu.c
index ba512a4047..75c6cbf07c 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkrecentchoosermenu.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkrecentchoosermenu.c
@@ -1242,7 +1242,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_sync_action_properties (GtkActivatable *activatable,
  * gtk_recent_chooser_menu_new_for_manager() function to know how to create
  * a #GtkRecentChooserMenu widget bound to another #GtkRecentManager object.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkRecentChooserMenu
+ * Returns: a new #GtkRecentChooserMenu
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1266,7 +1266,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_menu_new (void)
  * object or if you wish to share a common #GtkRecentManager object
  * among multiple #GtkRecentChooser widgets.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkRecentChooserMenu, bound to @manager.
+ * Returns: a new #GtkRecentChooserMenu, bound to @manager.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1286,7 +1286,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_menu_new_for_manager (GtkRecentManager *manager)
  *
  * Returns the value set by gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if numbers should be shown.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if numbers should be shown.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkrecentchooserutils.c b/gtk/gtkrecentchooserutils.c
index 98f2cd3d96..8e788b6dd3 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkrecentchooserutils.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkrecentchooserutils.c
@@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ get_is_recent_filtered (GtkRecentFilter *filter,
  * #GtkRecentChooser interface inside the GtkRecentChooser::get_items
  * vfunc.
  *
- * Return value: a list of #GtkRecentInfo objects
+ * Returns: a list of #GtkRecentInfo objects
  */
 GList *
 _gtk_recent_chooser_get_items (GtkRecentChooser  *chooser,
diff --git a/gtk/gtkrecentchooserwidget.c b/gtk/gtkrecentchooserwidget.c
index d8fe8753e4..2209a07bad 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkrecentchooserwidget.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkrecentchooserwidget.c
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_widget_init (GtkRecentChooserWidget *widget)
  * Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget object.  This is an embeddable widget
  * used to access the recently used resources list.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget
+ * Returns: a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ gtk_recent_chooser_widget_new (void)
  * This is useful if you have implemented your own recent manager, or if you
  * have a customized instance of a #GtkRecentManager object.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget
+ * Returns: a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkrecentfilter.c b/gtk/gtkrecentfilter.c
index 4f46073471..8b4f2f7c3a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkrecentfilter.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkrecentfilter.c
@@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ gtk_recent_filter_buildable_custom_tag_end (GtkBuildable *buildable,
  * gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkRecentFilter
+ * Returns: a new #GtkRecentFilter
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ gtk_recent_filter_set_name (GtkRecentFilter *filter,
  * Gets the human-readable name for the filter.
  * See gtk_recent_filter_set_name().
  *
- * Return value: the name of the filter, or %NULL.  The returned string
+ * Returns: the name of the filter, or %NULL.  The returned string
  *   is owned by the filter object and should not be freed.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ gtk_recent_filter_get_name (GtkRecentFilter *filter)
  * is intended principally for use in the implementation of
  * #GtkRecentChooser.
  * 
- * Return value: bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
+ * Returns: bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
  *   calling gtk_recent_filter_filter()
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ gtk_recent_filter_add_custom (GtkRecentFilter      *filter,
  * is intended principally for use in the implementation of
  * #GtkRecentChooser.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the file should be displayed
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the file should be displayed
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkrecentfilter.h b/gtk/gtkrecentfilter.h
index 1a0f8b90c5..32d6bf156f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkrecentfilter.h
+++ b/gtk/gtkrecentfilter.h
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ typedef enum {
  * The type of function that is used with custom filters,
  * see gtk_recent_filter_add_custom().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the file should be displayed
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the file should be displayed
  */
 typedef gboolean (*GtkRecentFilterFunc) (const GtkRecentFilterInfo *filter_info,
 					 gpointer                   user_data);
diff --git a/gtk/gtkrecentmanager.c b/gtk/gtkrecentmanager.c
index dab8583da0..fd49bac9eb 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkrecentmanager.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkrecentmanager.c
@@ -713,7 +713,7 @@ build_recent_items_list (GtkRecentManager *manager)
  * #GtkRecentManager objects are expensive: be sure to create them only when
  * needed. You should use gtk_recent_manager_get_default() instead.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkRecentManager object.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkRecentManager object.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -729,7 +729,7 @@ gtk_recent_manager_new (void)
  * Gets a unique instance of #GtkRecentManager, that you can share
  * in your application without caring about memory management.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A unique #GtkRecentManager. Do not ref or unref it.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A unique #GtkRecentManager. Do not ref or unref it.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -821,7 +821,7 @@ gtk_recent_manager_add_item_query_info (GObject      *source_object,
  * See gtk_recent_manager_add_full() if you want to explicitly
  * define the metadata for the resource pointed by @uri.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the new item was successfully added
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the new item was successfully added
  *   to the recently used resources list
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ gtk_recent_manager_add_item (GtkRecentManager  *manager,
  * considered private - that is, should be displayed only by the
  * applications that have registered it.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the new item was successfully added to the
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the new item was successfully added to the
  * recently used resources list, %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1000,7 +1000,7 @@ gtk_recent_manager_add_full (GtkRecentManager     *manager,
  * Removes a resource pointed by @uri from the recently used resources
  * list handled by a recent manager.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the item pointed by @uri has been successfully
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the item pointed by @uri has been successfully
  *   removed by the recently used resources list, and %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1059,7 +1059,7 @@ gtk_recent_manager_remove_item (GtkRecentManager  *manager,
  * Checks whether there is a recently used resource registered
  * with @uri inside the recent manager.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the resource was found, %FALSE otherwise.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the resource was found, %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1149,7 +1149,7 @@ build_recent_info (GBookmarkFile  *bookmarks,
  * returns a #GtkRecentInfo-struct containing informations about the resource
  * like its MIME type, or its display name.
  *
- * Return value: a #GtkRecentInfo-struct containing information
+ * Returns: a #GtkRecentInfo-struct containing information
  *   about the resource pointed by @uri, or %NULL if the URI was
  *   not registered in the recently used resources list.  Free with
  *   gtk_recent_info_unref().
@@ -1215,7 +1215,7 @@ gtk_recent_manager_lookup_item (GtkRecentManager  *manager,
  * Please note that this function will not affect the resource pointed
  * by the URIs, but only the URI used in the recently used resources list.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE on success.
+ * Returns: %TRUE on success.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1279,7 +1279,7 @@ gtk_recent_manager_move_item (GtkRecentManager  *recent_manager,
  *
  * Gets the list of recently used resources.
  *
- * Return value:  (element-type GtkRecentInfo) (transfer full): a list of
+ * Returns:  (element-type GtkRecentInfo) (transfer full): a list of
  *   newly allocated #GtkRecentInfo objects. Use
  *   gtk_recent_info_unref() on each item inside the list, and then
  *   free the list itself using g_list_free().
@@ -1341,7 +1341,7 @@ purge_recent_items_list (GtkRecentManager  *manager,
  *
  * Purges every item from the recently used resources list.
  *
- * Return value: the number of items that have been removed from the
+ * Returns: the number of items that have been removed from the
  *   recently used resources list.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1517,7 +1517,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_free (GtkRecentInfo *recent_info)
  *
  * Increases the reference count of @recent_info by one.
  *
- * Return value: the recent info object with its reference count increased
+ * Returns: the recent info object with its reference count increased
  *   by one.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1560,7 +1560,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_unref (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  *
  * Gets the URI of the resource.
  *
- * Return value: the URI of the resource.  The returned string is
+ * Returns: the URI of the resource.  The returned string is
  *   owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1580,7 +1580,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_uri (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  * Gets the name of the resource.  If none has been defined, the basename
  * of the resource is obtained.
  *
- * Return value: the display name of the resource.  The returned string
+ * Returns: the display name of the resource.  The returned string
  *   is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1602,7 +1602,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_display_name (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  *
  * Gets the (short) description of the resource.
  *
- * Return value: the description of the resource.  The returned string
+ * Returns: the description of the resource.  The returned string
  *   is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1621,7 +1621,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_description (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  *
  * Gets the MIME type of the resource.
  *
- * Return value: the MIME type of the resource.  The returned string
+ * Returns: the MIME type of the resource.  The returned string
  *   is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1644,7 +1644,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_mime_type (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  * Gets the timestamp (seconds from system’s Epoch) when the resource
  * was added to the recently used resources list.
  *
- * Return value: the number of seconds elapsed from system’s Epoch when
+ * Returns: the number of seconds elapsed from system’s Epoch when
  *   the resource was added to the list, or -1 on failure.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1664,7 +1664,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_added (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  * Gets the timestamp (seconds from system’s Epoch) when the meta-data
  * for the resource was last modified.
  *
- * Return value: the number of seconds elapsed from system’s Epoch when
+ * Returns: the number of seconds elapsed from system’s Epoch when
  *   the resource was last modified, or -1 on failure.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1684,7 +1684,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_modified (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  * Gets the timestamp (seconds from system’s Epoch) when the meta-data
  * for the resource was last visited.
  *
- * Return value: the number of seconds elapsed from system’s Epoch when
+ * Returns: the number of seconds elapsed from system’s Epoch when
  *   the resource was last visited, or -1 on failure.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1705,7 +1705,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_visited (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  * list that have this flag set to %TRUE should only be displayed by the
  * applications that have registered them.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the private flag was found, %FALSE otherwise.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the private flag was found, %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1761,7 +1761,7 @@ recent_app_info_free (RecentAppInfo *app_info)
  * If the command line contains any escape characters defined inside the
  * storage specification, they will be expanded.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if an application with @app_name has registered this
+ * Returns: %TRUE if an application with @app_name has registered this
  *   resource inside the recently used list, or %FALSE otherwise. The
  *   @app_exec string is owned by the #GtkRecentInfo and should not be
  *   modified or freed
@@ -1810,7 +1810,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_application_info (GtkRecentInfo  *info,
  *
  * Retrieves the list of applications that have registered this resource.
  *
- * Return value: (array length=length zero-terminated=1) (transfer full):
+ * Returns: (array length=length zero-terminated=1) (transfer full):
  *     a newly allocated %NULL-terminated array of strings.
  *     Use g_strfreev() to free it.
  *
@@ -1863,7 +1863,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_applications (GtkRecentInfo *info,
  *
  * Checks whether an application registered this resource using @app_name.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if an application with name @app_name was found,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if an application with name @app_name was found,
  *   %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1885,7 +1885,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_has_application (GtkRecentInfo *info,
  * Gets the name of the last application that have registered the
  * recently used resource represented by @info.
  *
- * Return value: an application name.  Use g_free() to free it.
+ * Returns: an application name.  Use g_free() to free it.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -1971,7 +1971,7 @@ get_icon_fallback (const gchar *icon_name,
  *
  * Retrieves the icon of size @size associated to the resource MIME type.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GdkPixbuf containing the icon,
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GdkPixbuf containing the icon,
  *     or %NULL. Use g_object_unref() when finished using the icon.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -2006,7 +2006,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_icon (GtkRecentInfo *info,
  *
  * Retrieves the icon associated to the resource MIME type.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a #GIcon containing the icon, or %NULL. Use
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a #GIcon containing the icon, or %NULL. Use
  *   g_object_unref() when finished using the icon
  *
  * Since: 2.22
@@ -2036,7 +2036,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_gicon (GtkRecentInfo  *info)
  * Checks whether the resource is local or not by looking at the
  * scheme of its URI.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the resource is local.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the resource is local.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -2055,7 +2055,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_is_local (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  * Checks whether the resource pointed by @info still exists.  At
  * the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the resource exists
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the resource exists
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -2092,7 +2092,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_exists (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  * Checks whether two #GtkRecentInfo-struct point to the same
  * resource.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if both #GtkRecentInfo-struct point to se same
+ * Returns: %TRUE if both #GtkRecentInfo-struct point to se same
  *   resource, %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -2239,7 +2239,7 @@ get_uri_shortname_for_display (const gchar *uri)
  * menu or list.  For example, calling this function on an item that refers to
  * “file:///foo/bar.txt” will yield “bar.txt”.
  *
- * Return value: A newly-allocated string in UTF-8 encoding; free it with
+ * Returns: A newly-allocated string in UTF-8 encoding; free it with
  *   g_free().
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -2267,7 +2267,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_short_name (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  * is local, it returns a local path; if the resource is not local,
  * it returns the UTF-8 encoded content of gtk_recent_info_get_uri().
  *
- * Return value: a newly allocated UTF-8 string containing the
+ * Returns: a newly allocated UTF-8 string containing the
  *   resource’s URI or %NULL. Use g_free() when done using it.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -2306,7 +2306,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_uri_display (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  * Gets the number of days elapsed since the last update of the resource
  * pointed by @info.
  *
- * Return value: a positive integer containing the number of days elapsed
+ * Returns: a positive integer containing the number of days elapsed
  *   since the time this resource was last modified.  
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -2337,7 +2337,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_age (GtkRecentInfo *info)
  * array of returned group names will be %NULL terminated, so length might
  * optionally be %NULL.
  *
- * Return value:  (array length=length zero-terminated=1) (transfer full):
+ * Returns:  (array length=length zero-terminated=1) (transfer full):
  *     a newly allocated %NULL terminated array of strings.
  *     Use g_strfreev() to free it.
  *
@@ -2391,7 +2391,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_get_groups (GtkRecentInfo *info,
  * Checks whether @group_name appears inside the groups registered for the
  * recently used item @info.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the group was found.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the group was found.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -2428,7 +2428,7 @@ gtk_recent_info_has_group (GtkRecentInfo *info,
  *
  * Creates a #GAppInfo for the specified #GtkRecentInfo
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the newly created #GAppInfo, or %NULL.
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the newly created #GAppInfo, or %NULL.
  *   In case of error, @error will be set either with a
  *   %GTK_RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR or a %G_IO_ERROR
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkrevealer.c b/gtk/gtkrevealer.c
index cd9c7a2e09..32b6668c46 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkrevealer.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkrevealer.c
@@ -687,7 +687,7 @@ gtk_revealer_set_reveal_child (GtkRevealer *revealer,
  * the child is fully revealed (ie the transition is completed),
  * use gtk_revealer_get_child_revealed().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the child is revealed.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the child is revealed.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -708,7 +708,7 @@ gtk_revealer_get_reveal_child (GtkRevealer *revealer)
  * Returns whether the child is fully revealed, ie wether
  * the transition to the revealed state is completed.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the child is fully revealed
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the child is fully revealed
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -890,7 +890,7 @@ gtk_revealer_set_transition_duration (GtkRevealer *revealer,
  * Gets the type of animation that will be used
  * for transitions in @revealer.
  *
- * Return value: the current transition type of @revealer
+ * Returns: the current transition type of @revealer
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkscale.c b/gtk/gtkscale.c
index 5a6acab970..435f877b18 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkscale.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkscale.c
@@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ gtk_scale_class_init (GtkScaleClass *class)
    *  }
    * ]|
    *
-   * Return value: allocated string representing @value
+   * Returns: allocated string representing @value
    */
   signals[FORMAT_VALUE] =
     g_signal_new (I_("format-value"),
@@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ gtk_scale_get_property (GObject      *object,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkScale.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkScale
+ * Returns: a new #GtkScale
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
@@ -607,7 +607,7 @@ gtk_scale_new (GtkOrientation  orientation,
  * is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
  * needs, use gtk_scale_set_digits() to correct it.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkScale
+ * Returns: a new #GtkScale
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1410,7 +1410,7 @@ gtk_scale_real_get_layout_offsets (GtkScale *scale,
  * Emits #GtkScale::format-value signal to format the value, 
  * if no user signal handlers, falls back to a default format.
  * 
- * Return value: formatted value
+ * Returns: formatted value
  */
 gchar*
 _gtk_scale_format_value (GtkScale *scale,
@@ -1450,7 +1450,7 @@ gtk_scale_finalize (GObject *object)
  * object is owned by the scale so does not need to be freed by
  * the caller.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #PangoLayout for this scale,
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #PangoLayout for this scale,
  *     or %NULL if the #GtkScale:draw-value property is %FALSE.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
diff --git a/gtk/gtkscalebutton.c b/gtk/gtkscalebutton.c
index 3f1eea7ce9..4ef8a45089 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkscalebutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkscalebutton.c
@@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ gtk_scale_button_dispose (GObject *object)
  * Creates a #GtkScaleButton, with a range between @min and @max, with
  * a stepping of @step.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkScaleButton
+ * Returns: a new #GtkScaleButton
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ gtk_scale_button_new (GtkIconSize   size,
  *
  * Gets the current value of the scale button.
  *
- * Return value: current value of the scale button
+ * Returns: current value of the scale button
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkscrollable.c b/gtk/gtkscrollable.c
index 68acbedea7..94c558559d 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkscrollable.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkscrollable.c
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ gtk_scrollable_default_init (GtkScrollableInterface *iface)
  *
  * Retrieves the #GtkAdjustment used for horizontal scrolling.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): horizontal #GtkAdjustment.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): horizontal #GtkAdjustment.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ gtk_scrollable_set_hadjustment (GtkScrollable *scrollable,
  *
  * Retrieves the #GtkAdjustment used for vertical scrolling.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): vertical #GtkAdjustment.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): vertical #GtkAdjustment.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
@@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ gtk_scrollable_set_vadjustment (GtkScrollable *scrollable,
  *
  * Gets the horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy.
  *
- * Return value: The horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy.
+ * Returns: The horizontal #GtkScrollablePolicy.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
@@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ gtk_scrollable_set_hscroll_policy (GtkScrollable       *scrollable,
  *
  * Gets the vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy.
  *
- * Return value: The vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy.
+ * Returns: The vertical #GtkScrollablePolicy.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkscrollbar.c b/gtk/gtkscrollbar.c
index 4fe7c87aea..2fbbeba93f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkscrollbar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkscrollbar.c
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ gtk_scrollbar_style_updated (GtkWidget *widget)
  *
  * Creates a new scrollbar with the given orientation.
  *
- * Return value:  the new #GtkScrollbar.
+ * Returns:  the new #GtkScrollbar.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkscrolledwindow.c b/gtk/gtkscrolledwindow.c
index 0840ff0125..b93689cb51 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkscrolledwindow.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkscrolledwindow.c
@@ -954,7 +954,7 @@ gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement (GtkScrolledWindow *scrolled_window,
  * Gets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
  * for the scrolled window. See gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement().
  *
- * Return value: the current placement value.
+ * Returns: the current placement value.
  *
  * See also gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement() and
  * gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
@@ -1028,7 +1028,7 @@ gtk_scrolled_window_set_shadow_type (GtkScrolledWindow *scrolled_window,
  * Gets the shadow type of the scrolled window. See 
  * gtk_scrolled_window_set_shadow_type().
  *
- * Return value: the current shadow type
+ * Returns: the current shadow type
  **/
 GtkShadowType
 gtk_scrolled_window_get_shadow_type (GtkScrolledWindow *scrolled_window)
@@ -1090,7 +1090,7 @@ gtk_scrolled_window_set_kinetic_scrolling (GtkScrolledWindow *scrolled_window,
  *
  * Returns the specified kinetic scrolling behavior.
  *
- * Return value: the scrolling behavior flags.
+ * Returns: the scrolling behavior flags.
  *
  * Since: 3.4
  */
@@ -3043,7 +3043,7 @@ gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport (GtkScrolledWindow *scrolled_window,
  * Gets the spacing between the scrolled window’s scrollbars and
  * the scrolled widget. Used by GtkCombo
  * 
- * Return value: the spacing, in pixels.
+ * Returns: the spacing, in pixels.
  */
 gint
 _gtk_scrolled_window_get_scrollbar_spacing (GtkScrolledWindow *scrolled_window)
diff --git a/gtk/gtksearchbar.c b/gtk/gtksearchbar.c
index 23f76cc3fc..8104abef12 100644
--- a/gtk/gtksearchbar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtksearchbar.c
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ preedit_changed_cb (GtkEntry  *entry,
  *                   search_bar);
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: %GDK_EVENT_STOP if the key press event resulted
+ * Returns: %GDK_EVENT_STOP if the key press event resulted
  *     in text being entered in the search entry (and revealing
  *     the search bar if necessary), %GDK_EVENT_PROPAGATE otherwise.
  *
@@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ gtk_search_bar_init (GtkSearchBar *bar)
  * which widget is going to be your text entry using
  * gtk_search_bar_connect_entry().
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkSearchBar
+ * Returns: a new #GtkSearchBar
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ gtk_search_bar_connect_entry (GtkSearchBar *bar,
  *
  * Returns whether the search mode is on or off.
  *
- * Return value: whether search mode is toggled on
+ * Returns: whether search mode is toggled on
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ gtk_search_bar_set_search_mode (GtkSearchBar *bar,
  *
  * Returns whether the close button is shown.
  *
- * Return value: whether the close button is shown
+ * Returns: whether the close button is shown
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtksearchentry.c b/gtk/gtksearchentry.c
index 57e88b3baf..a43f7c7ee8 100644
--- a/gtk/gtksearchentry.c
+++ b/gtk/gtksearchentry.c
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ gtk_search_entry_init (GtkSearchEntry *entry)
  * Creates a #GtkSearchEntry, with a find icon when the search field is
  * empty, and a clear icon when it isn't.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkSearchEntry
+ * Returns: a new #GtkSearchEntry
  *
  * Since: 3.6
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkselection.c b/gtk/gtkselection.c
index 925d5ff9e5..f08a5c3da5 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkselection.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkselection.c
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ static const char gtk_selection_handler_key[] = "gtk-selection-handlers";
  * 
  * Creates a new #GtkTargetList from an array of #GtkTargetEntry.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer full): the new #GtkTargetList.
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the new #GtkTargetList.
  **/
 GtkTargetList *
 gtk_target_list_new (const GtkTargetEntry *targets,
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ gtk_target_list_new (const GtkTargetEntry *targets,
  * 
  * Increases the reference count of a #GtkTargetList by one.
  *
- * Return value: the passed in #GtkTargetList.
+ * Returns: the passed in #GtkTargetList.
  **/
 GtkTargetList *
 gtk_target_list_ref (GtkTargetList *list)
@@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ gtk_target_list_remove (GtkTargetList *list,
  *
  * Looks up a given target in a #GtkTargetList.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the target was found, otherwise %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the target was found, otherwise %FALSE
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_target_list_find (GtkTargetList *list,
@@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ gtk_target_list_find (GtkTargetList *list,
  * allocated and should be freed using gtk_target_table_free() when no
  * longer needed.
  *
- * Return value: (array length=n_targets) (transfer full): the new table.
+ * Returns: (array length=n_targets) (transfer full): the new table.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ gtk_target_table_free (GtkTargetEntry *targets,
  * Claim ownership of a given selection for a particular widget, or,
  * if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
  *
- * Return value: TRUE if the operation succeeded 
+ * Returns: TRUE if the operation succeeded 
  * 
  * Since: 2.2
  */
@@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ gtk_selection_owner_set_for_display (GdkDisplay   *display,
  * Claims ownership of a given selection for a particular widget,
  * or, if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the operation succeeded
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the operation succeeded
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_selection_owner_set (GtkWidget *widget,
@@ -1037,7 +1037,7 @@ gtk_selection_remove_all (GtkWidget *widget)
  * Requests the contents of a selection. When received, 
  * a “selection-received” signal will be generated.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if requested succeeded. %FALSE if we could not process
+ * Returns: %TRUE if requested succeeded. %FALSE if we could not process
  *          request. (e.g., there was already a request in process for
  *          this widget).
  **/
@@ -1544,7 +1544,7 @@ selection_get_text_plain (const GtkSelectionData *selection_data)
  * The string is converted to the form determined by
  * @selection_data->target.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the selection was successfully set,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the selection was successfully set,
  *   otherwise %FALSE.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -1594,7 +1594,7 @@ gtk_selection_data_set_text (GtkSelectionData     *selection_data,
  * 
  * Gets the contents of the selection data as a UTF-8 string.
  * 
- * Return value: (type utf8): if the selection data contained a
+ * Returns: (type utf8): if the selection data contained a
  *   recognized text type and it could be converted to UTF-8, a newly
  *   allocated string containing the converted text, otherwise %NULL.
  *   If the result is non-%NULL it must be freed with g_free().
@@ -1648,7 +1648,7 @@ gtk_selection_data_get_text (const GtkSelectionData *selection_data)
  * The pixbuf is converted to the form determined by
  * @selection_data->target.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the selection was successfully set,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the selection was successfully set,
  *   otherwise %FALSE.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
@@ -1712,7 +1712,7 @@ gtk_selection_data_set_pixbuf (GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
  * 
  * Gets the contents of the selection data as a #GdkPixbuf.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer full): if the selection data contained a recognized
+ * Returns: (transfer full): if the selection data contained a recognized
  *   image type and it could be converted to a #GdkPixbuf, a 
  *   newly allocated pixbuf is returned, otherwise %NULL.
  *   If the result is non-%NULL it must be freed with g_object_unref().
@@ -1757,7 +1757,7 @@ gtk_selection_data_get_pixbuf (const GtkSelectionData *selection_data)
  * The string is converted to the form determined by
  * @selection_data->target.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the selection was successfully set,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the selection was successfully set,
  *   otherwise %FALSE.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
@@ -1811,7 +1811,7 @@ gtk_selection_data_set_uris (GtkSelectionData  *selection_data,
  * 
  * Gets the contents of the selection data as array of URIs.
  *
- * Return value:  (array zero-terminated=1) (element-type utf8) (transfer full): if
+ * Returns:  (array zero-terminated=1) (element-type utf8) (transfer full): if
  *   the selection data contains a list of
  *   URIs, a newly allocated %NULL-terminated string array
  *   containing the URIs, otherwise %NULL. If the result is
@@ -1861,7 +1861,7 @@ gtk_selection_data_get_uris (const GtkSelectionData *selection_data)
  * the standard TARGETS target that is always supplied for
  * any selection.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @selection_data contains a valid
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @selection_data contains a valid
  *    array of targets, otherwise %FALSE.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -1901,7 +1901,7 @@ gtk_selection_data_get_targets (const GtkSelectionData  *selection_data,
  * Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
  * provide text.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for text,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for text,
  *   otherwise %FALSE.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1947,7 +1947,7 @@ gtk_targets_include_text (GdkAtom *targets,
  * Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
  * provide rich text.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for rich text,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for rich text,
  *               otherwise %FALSE.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1996,7 +1996,7 @@ gtk_targets_include_rich_text (GdkAtom       *targets,
  * determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
  * provide text.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
  *   and a suitable target for text is included, otherwise %FALSE.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -2028,7 +2028,7 @@ gtk_selection_data_targets_include_text (const GtkSelectionData *selection_data)
  * determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
  * provide rich text.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
  *               and a suitable target for rich text is included,
  *               otherwise %FALSE.
  *
@@ -2066,7 +2066,7 @@ gtk_selection_data_targets_include_rich_text (const GtkSelectionData *selection_
  * Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
  * provide a #GdkPixbuf.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for images,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for images,
  *   otherwise %FALSE.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -2112,7 +2112,7 @@ gtk_targets_include_image (GdkAtom *targets,
  * determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
  * provide a #GdkPixbuf.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
  *   and a suitable target for images is included, otherwise %FALSE.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
@@ -2146,7 +2146,7 @@ gtk_selection_data_targets_include_image (const GtkSelectionData *selection_data
  * Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
  * provide an uri list.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for uri lists,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for uri lists,
  *   otherwise %FALSE.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -2185,7 +2185,7 @@ gtk_targets_include_uri (GdkAtom *targets,
  * determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
  * provide a list or URIs.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
  *   and a suitable target for URI lists is included, otherwise %FALSE.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -2239,7 +2239,7 @@ gtk_selection_init (void)
  * The default handler for the #GtkWidget::selection-clear-event
  * signal. 
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the event was handled, otherwise false
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the event was handled, otherwise false
  **/
 gboolean
 _gtk_selection_clear (GtkWidget         *widget,
@@ -3132,7 +3132,7 @@ gtk_selection_default_handler (GtkWidget	*widget,
  * 
  * Makes a copy of a #GtkSelectionData-struct and its data.
  * 
- * Return value: a pointer to a copy of @data.
+ * Returns: a pointer to a copy of @data.
  **/
 GtkSelectionData*
 gtk_selection_data_copy (const GtkSelectionData *data)
@@ -3178,7 +3178,7 @@ gtk_selection_data_free (GtkSelectionData *data)
  *
  * Makes a new #GtkTargetEntry.
  *
- * Return value: a pointer to a new #GtkTargetEntry.
+ * Returns: a pointer to a new #GtkTargetEntry.
  *     Free with gtk_target_entry_free()
  **/
 GtkTargetEntry *
@@ -3196,7 +3196,7 @@ gtk_target_entry_new (const char *target,
  *
  * Makes a copy of a #GtkTargetEntry and its data.
  *
- * Return value: a pointer to a copy of @data.
+ * Returns: a pointer to a copy of @data.
  *     Free with gtk_target_entry_free()
  **/
 GtkTargetEntry *
diff --git a/gtk/gtkseparator.c b/gtk/gtkseparator.c
index de887fb26d..acd24255f0 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkseparator.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkseparator.c
@@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ gtk_separator_draw (GtkWidget *widget,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkSeparator with the given orientation.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkSeparator.
+ * Returns: a new #GtkSeparator.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkseparatortoolitem.c b/gtk/gtkseparatortoolitem.c
index 0d9ed77b1b..006052cab7 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkseparatortoolitem.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkseparatortoolitem.c
@@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ gtk_separator_tool_item_draw (GtkWidget *widget,
  * 
  * Create a new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
  * 
- * Return value: the new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
+ * Returns: the new #GtkSeparatorToolItem
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ gtk_separator_tool_item_new (void)
  * Returns whether @item is drawn as a line, or just blank. 
  * See gtk_separator_tool_item_set_draw().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @item is drawn as a line, or just blank.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @item is drawn as a line, or just blank.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtksettings.c b/gtk/gtksettings.c
index 52b7debb5c..0321047086 100644
--- a/gtk/gtksettings.c
+++ b/gtk/gtksettings.c
@@ -1726,7 +1726,7 @@ settings_init_style (GtkSettings *settings)
  *
  * Gets the #GtkSettings object for @screen, creating it if necessary.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GtkSettings object.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GtkSettings object.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  */
@@ -1781,7 +1781,7 @@ gtk_settings_get_for_screen (GdkScreen *screen)
  * Gets the #GtkSettings object for the default GDK screen, creating
  * it if necessary. See gtk_settings_get_for_screen().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GtkSettings object. If there is no default
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GtkSettings object. If there is no default
  *  screen, then returns %NULL.
  **/
 GtkSettings*
@@ -2340,7 +2340,7 @@ G_GNUC_BEGIN_IGNORE_DEPRECATIONS
  * blue are integers between 0 and 65535 or floating-point numbers
  * between 0 and 1.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @gstring could be parsed and @property_value
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @gstring could be parsed and @property_value
  * has been set to the resulting #GdkColor.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -2384,7 +2384,7 @@ gtk_rc_property_parse_color (const GParamSpec *pspec,
  * its numeric value. For consistency with flags parsing, the value
  * may be surrounded by parentheses.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @gstring could be parsed and @property_value
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @gstring could be parsed and @property_value
  * has been set to the resulting #GEnumValue.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -2479,7 +2479,7 @@ parse_flags_value (GScanner    *scanner,
  * numerically. Multiple flags can be specified in the form
  * `"( flag1 | flag2 | ... )"`.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @gstring could be parsed and @property_value
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @gstring could be parsed and @property_value
  * has been set to the resulting flags value.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -2583,7 +2583,7 @@ get_braced_int (GScanner *scanner,
  * requisition in the form
  * `"{ width, height }"` for integers %width and %height.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @gstring could be parsed and @property_value
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @gstring could be parsed and @property_value
  * has been set to the resulting #GtkRequisition.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -2625,7 +2625,7 @@ gtk_rc_property_parse_requisition  (const GParamSpec *pspec,
  * `"{ left, right, top, bottom }"` for integers
  * left, right, top and bottom.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @gstring could be parsed and @property_value
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @gstring could be parsed and @property_value
  * has been set to the resulting #GtkBorder.
  **/
 gboolean
diff --git a/gtk/gtksizegroup.c b/gtk/gtksizegroup.c
index 9519ae9a24..159b59cccf 100644
--- a/gtk/gtksizegroup.c
+++ b/gtk/gtksizegroup.c
@@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ gtk_size_group_get_property (GObject      *object,
  * 
  * Create a new #GtkSizeGroup.
  
- * Return value: a newly created #GtkSizeGroup
+ * Returns: a newly created #GtkSizeGroup
  **/
 GtkSizeGroup *
 gtk_size_group_new (GtkSizeGroupMode mode)
@@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ gtk_size_group_set_mode (GtkSizeGroup     *size_group,
  * 
  * Gets the current mode of the size group. See gtk_size_group_set_mode().
  * 
- * Return value: the current mode of the size group.
+ * Returns: the current mode of the size group.
  **/
 GtkSizeGroupMode
 gtk_size_group_get_mode (GtkSizeGroup *size_group)
@@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ gtk_size_group_remove_widget (GtkSizeGroup *size_group,
  * 
  * Returns the list of widgets associated with @size_group.
  *
- * Return value:  (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer none): a #GSList of
+ * Returns:  (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer none): a #GSList of
  *   widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
diff --git a/gtk/gtksocket.c b/gtk/gtksocket.c
index 7250916bae..b59deb1370 100644
--- a/gtk/gtksocket.c
+++ b/gtk/gtksocket.c
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ gtk_socket_class_init (GtkSocketClass *class)
    * The default action is to destroy the #GtkSocket widget, so if you 
    * want to reuse it you must add a signal handler that returns %TRUE. 
    *
-   * Return value: %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked.
+   * Returns: %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked.
    */
   socket_signals[PLUG_REMOVED] =
     g_signal_new (I_("plug-removed"),
@@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ gtk_socket_init (GtkSocket *socket)
  * 
  * Create a new empty #GtkSocket.
  * 
- * Return value:  the new #GtkSocket.
+ * Returns:  the new #GtkSocket.
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_socket_new (void)
@@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ gtk_socket_add_id (GtkSocket      *socket,
  * The #GtkSocket must have already be added into a toplevel window 
  * before you can make this call.
  * 
- * Return value: the window ID for the socket
+ * Returns: the window ID for the socket
  **/
 Window
 gtk_socket_get_id (GtkSocket *socket)
@@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ gtk_socket_get_id (GtkSocket *socket)
  * Retrieves the window of the plug. Use this to check if the plug has
  * been created inside of the socket.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the window of the plug if available, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the window of the plug if available, or %NULL
  *
  * Since:  2.14
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkspinbutton.c b/gtk/gtkspinbutton.c
index b3b91d7195..db39c31ab6 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkspinbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkspinbutton.c
@@ -2118,7 +2118,7 @@ gtk_spin_button_new (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
  * is a power of ten. If the resulting precision is not suitable for your
  * needs, use gtk_spin_button_set_digits() to correct it.
  *
- * Return value: The new spin button as a #GtkWidget
+ * Returns: The new spin button as a #GtkWidget
  */
 GtkWidget *
 gtk_spin_button_new_with_range (gdouble min,
@@ -2219,7 +2219,7 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_adjustment (GtkSpinButton *spin_button,
  *
  * Get the adjustment associated with a #GtkSpinButton
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkAdjustment of @spin_button
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GtkAdjustment of @spin_button
  **/
 GtkAdjustment *
 gtk_spin_button_get_adjustment (GtkSpinButton *spin_button)
@@ -2392,7 +2392,7 @@ gtk_spin_button_get_range (GtkSpinButton *spin_button,
  *
  * Get the value in the @spin_button.
  *
- * Return value: the value of @spin_button
+ * Returns: the value of @spin_button
  */
 gdouble
 gtk_spin_button_get_value (GtkSpinButton *spin_button)
@@ -2408,7 +2408,7 @@ gtk_spin_button_get_value (GtkSpinButton *spin_button)
  *
  * Get the value @spin_button represented as an integer.
  *
- * Return value: the value of @spin_button
+ * Returns: the value of @spin_button
  */
 gint
 gtk_spin_button_get_value_as_int (GtkSpinButton *spin_button)
@@ -2488,7 +2488,7 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy (GtkSpinButton             *spin_button,
  * Gets the update behavior of a spin button.
  * See gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy().
  *
- * Return value: the current update policy
+ * Returns: the current update policy
  */
 GtkSpinButtonUpdatePolicy
 gtk_spin_button_get_update_policy (GtkSpinButton *spin_button)
@@ -2532,7 +2532,7 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_numeric (GtkSpinButton *spin_button,
  * Returns whether non-numeric text can be typed into the spin button.
  * See gtk_spin_button_set_numeric().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if only numeric text can be entered
+ * Returns: %TRUE if only numeric text can be entered
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_spin_button_get_numeric (GtkSpinButton *spin_button)
@@ -2579,7 +2579,7 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_wrap (GtkSpinButton  *spin_button,
  * opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is
  * exceeded. See gtk_spin_button_set_wrap().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the spin button wraps around
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the spin button wraps around
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_spin_button_get_wrap (GtkSpinButton *spin_button)
@@ -2628,7 +2628,7 @@ gtk_spin_button_set_snap_to_ticks (GtkSpinButton *spin_button,
  * Returns whether the values are corrected to the nearest step.
  * See gtk_spin_button_set_snap_to_ticks().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if values are snapped to the nearest step
+ * Returns: %TRUE if values are snapped to the nearest step
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_spin_button_get_snap_to_ticks (GtkSpinButton *spin_button)
diff --git a/gtk/gtkspinner.c b/gtk/gtkspinner.c
index ec882b1add..77f6e9a22c 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkspinner.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkspinner.c
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ gtk_spinner_set_active (GtkSpinner *spinner,
  *
  * Returns a new spinner widget. Not yet started.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkSpinner
+ * Returns: a new #GtkSpinner
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkstack.c b/gtk/gtkstack.c
index d21f316343..6d3a57a407 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkstack.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkstack.c
@@ -1142,7 +1142,7 @@ gtk_stack_remove (GtkContainer *container,
  * the argument. Returns %NULL if there is no child with this
  * name.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the requested child of the #GtkStack
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the requested child of the #GtkStack
  *
  * Since: 3.12
  */
@@ -1207,7 +1207,7 @@ gtk_stack_set_homogeneous (GtkStack *stack,
  * Gets whether @stack is homogeneous.
  * See gtk_stack_set_homogeneous().
  *
- * Return value: whether @stack is homogeneous.
+ * Returns: whether @stack is homogeneous.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -1272,7 +1272,7 @@ gtk_stack_set_transition_duration (GtkStack *stack,
  * Gets the type of animation that will be used
  * for transitions between pages in @stack.
  *
- * Return value: the current transition type of @stack
+ * Returns: the current transition type of @stack
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -1321,7 +1321,7 @@ gtk_stack_set_transition_type (GtkStack              *stack,
  * Returns whether the @stack is currently in a transition from one page to
  * another.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the transition is currently running, %FALSE otherwise.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the transition is currently running, %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 3.12
  */
@@ -1342,7 +1342,7 @@ gtk_stack_get_transition_running (GtkStack *stack)
  * Gets the currently visible child of @stack, or %NULL if
  * there are no visible children.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the visible child of the #GtkStack
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the visible child of the #GtkStack
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
@@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ gtk_stack_get_visible_child (GtkStack *stack)
  * Returns the name of the currently visible child of @stack, or
  * %NULL if there is no visible child.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the name of the visible child of the #GtkStack
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the name of the visible child of the #GtkStack
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkstackswitcher.c b/gtk/gtkstackswitcher.c
index fdca8e91a0..83e2eed194 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkstackswitcher.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkstackswitcher.c
@@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ gtk_stack_switcher_set_stack (GtkStackSwitcher *switcher,
  * Retrieves the stack.
  * See gtk_stack_switcher_set_stack().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the stack, or %NULL if
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the stack, or %NULL if
  *    none has been set explicitly.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
@@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ gtk_stack_switcher_class_init (GtkStackSwitcherClass *class)
  *
  * Create a new #GtkStackSwitcher.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkStackSwitcher.
+ * Returns: a new #GtkStackSwitcher.
  *
  * Since: 3.10
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkstatusicon.c b/gtk/gtkstatusicon.c
index 3607bb522a..a55996ab47 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkstatusicon.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkstatusicon.c
@@ -496,7 +496,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_class_init (GtkStatusIconClass *class)
    * Gets emitted when the size available for the image
    * changes, e.g. because the notification area got resized.
    *
-   * Return value: %TRUE if the icon was updated for the new
+   * Returns: %TRUE if the icon was updated for the new
    * size. Otherwise, GTK+ will scale the icon as necessary.
    *
    * Since: 2.10
@@ -525,7 +525,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_class_init (GtkStatusIconClass *class)
    * Whether this event is emitted is platform-dependent.  Use the ::activate
    * and ::popup-menu signals in preference.
    *
-   * Return value: %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked
+   * Returns: %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked
    * for the event. %FALSE to propagate the event further.
    *
    * Since: 2.14
@@ -552,7 +552,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_class_init (GtkStatusIconClass *class)
    * Whether this event is emitted is platform-dependent.  Use the ::activate
    * and ::popup-menu signals in preference.
    *
-   * Return value: %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked
+   * Returns: %TRUE to stop other handlers from being invoked
    * for the event. %FALSE to propagate the event further.
    *
    * Since: 2.14
@@ -1173,7 +1173,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_get_property (GObject    *object,
  * 
  * Creates an empty status icon object.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkStatusIcon
+ * Returns: a new #GtkStatusIcon
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1192,7 +1192,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_new (void)
  * The image will be scaled down to fit in the available 
  * space in the notification area, if necessary.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkStatusIcon
+ * Returns: a new #GtkStatusIcon
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1213,7 +1213,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_new_from_pixbuf (GdkPixbuf *pixbuf)
  * The image will be scaled down to fit in the available 
  * space in the notification area, if necessary.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkStatusIcon
+ * Returns: a new #GtkStatusIcon
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1234,7 +1234,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_new_from_file (const gchar *filename)
  * own stock icon names, see gtk_icon_factory_add_default() and 
  * gtk_icon_factory_add(). 
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkStatusIcon
+ * Returns: a new #GtkStatusIcon
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  *
@@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_new_from_stock (const gchar *stock_id)
  * If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated 
  * appropriately.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkStatusIcon
+ * Returns: a new #GtkStatusIcon
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1275,7 +1275,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_new_from_icon_name (const gchar *icon_name)
  * Creates a status icon displaying a #GIcon. If the icon is a
  * themed icon, it will be updated when the theme changes.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkStatusIcon
+ * Returns: a new #GtkStatusIcon
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -1849,7 +1849,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_set_from_gicon (GtkStatusIcon *status_icon,
  * to store image data. If the #GtkStatusIcon has no image data,
  * the return value will be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY. 
  * 
- * Return value: the image representation being used
+ * Returns: the image representation being used
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1870,7 +1870,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type (GtkStatusIcon *status_icon)
  * The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
  * returned pixbuf.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the displayed pixbuf,
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the displayed pixbuf,
  *     or %NULL if the image is empty.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1897,7 +1897,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_get_pixbuf (GtkStatusIcon *status_icon)
  * The returned string is owned by the #GtkStatusIcon and should not
  * be freed or modified.
  * 
- * Return value: stock id of the displayed stock icon,
+ * Returns: stock id of the displayed stock icon,
  *   or %NULL if the image is empty.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -1926,7 +1926,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_get_stock (GtkStatusIcon *status_icon)
  * The returned string is owned by the #GtkStatusIcon and should not
  * be freed or modified.
  * 
- * Return value: name of the displayed icon, or %NULL if the image is empty.
+ * Returns: name of the displayed icon, or %NULL if the image is empty.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -1983,7 +1983,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_get_gicon (GtkStatusIcon *status_icon)
  * Note that the returned size is only meaningful while the 
  * status icon is embedded (see gtk_status_icon_is_embedded()).
  * 
- * Return value: the size that is available for the image
+ * Returns: the size that is available for the image
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -2024,7 +2024,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_set_screen (GtkStatusIcon *status_icon,
  *
  * Returns the #GdkScreen associated with @status_icon.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GdkScreen.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GdkScreen.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -2105,7 +2105,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_set_visible (GtkStatusIcon *status_icon,
  * the user can actually see the icon, see also 
  * gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the status icon is visible
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the status icon is visible
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -2124,7 +2124,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_get_visible (GtkStatusIcon *status_icon)
  * Returns whether the status icon is embedded in a notification
  * area. 
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the status icon is embedded in
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the status icon is embedded in
  *   a notification area.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -2311,7 +2311,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_position_menu (GtkMenu  *menu,
  * is embedded in a notification area, see
  * gtk_status_icon_is_embedded().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the location information has 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the location information has 
  *               been filled in
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -2400,7 +2400,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_set_has_tooltip (GtkStatusIcon *status_icon,
  * Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property.
  * See #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip for more information.
  *
- * Return value: current value of has-tooltip on @status_icon.
+ * Returns: current value of has-tooltip on @status_icon.
  *
  * Since: 2.16
  */
@@ -2493,7 +2493,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_text (GtkStatusIcon *status_icon,
  *
  * Gets the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon.
  *
- * Return value: the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
+ * Returns: the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
  *   returned string with g_free() when done.
  *
  * Since: 2.16
@@ -2577,7 +2577,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_markup (GtkStatusIcon *status_icon,
  *
  * Gets the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon.
  *
- * Return value: the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
+ * Returns: the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
  *   returned string with g_free() when done.
  *
  * Since: 2.16
@@ -2623,7 +2623,7 @@ gtk_status_icon_get_tooltip_markup (GtkStatusIcon *status_icon)
  * more likely to be met by one of the non-X11 specific methods, such
  * as gtk_status_icon_position_menu().
  *
- * Return value: An 32 bit unsigned integer identifier for the 
+ * Returns: An 32 bit unsigned integer identifier for the 
  * underlying X11 Window
  *
  * Since: 2.14
diff --git a/gtk/gtkswitch.c b/gtk/gtkswitch.c
index ad24dcad63..354e9e514f 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkswitch.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkswitch.c
@@ -911,7 +911,7 @@ gtk_switch_init (GtkSwitch *self)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkSwitch widget.
  *
- * Return value: the newly created #GtkSwitch instance
+ * Returns: the newly created #GtkSwitch instance
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -976,7 +976,7 @@ gtk_switch_set_active (GtkSwitch *sw,
  *
  * Gets whether the #GtkSwitch is in its “on” or “off” state.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the #GtkSwitch is active, and %FALSE otherwise
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the #GtkSwitch is active, and %FALSE otherwise
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextattributes.c b/gtk/gtktextattributes.c
index 363c4699ca..a5dd897eff 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextattributes.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextattributes.c
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@
  * Creates a #GtkTextAttributes, which describes
  * a set of properties on some text.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkTextAttributes,
+ * Returns: a new #GtkTextAttributes,
  *     free with gtk_text_attributes_unref().
  */
 GtkTextAttributes*
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ gtk_text_attributes_new (void)
  *
  * Copies @src and returns a new #GtkTextAttributes.
  *
- * Return value: a copy of @src,
+ * Returns: a copy of @src,
  *     free with gtk_text_attributes_unref()
  */
 GtkTextAttributes*
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextbtree.c b/gtk/gtktextbtree.c
index 5c9ea686f0..a7c86c5120 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextbtree.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextbtree.c
@@ -5023,7 +5023,7 @@ gtk_text_btree_node_invalidate_upward (GtkTextBTreeNode *node, gpointer view_id)
  * Check to see if the entire #GtkTextBTree is valid or not for
  * the given view.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the entire #GtkTextBTree is valid
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the entire #GtkTextBTree is valid
  **/
 gboolean
 _gtk_text_btree_is_valid (GtkTextBTree *tree,
@@ -5224,7 +5224,7 @@ gtk_text_btree_node_validate (BTreeView         *view,
  * Validate a single contiguous invalid region of a #GtkTextBTree for
  * a given view.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if a region has been validated, %FALSE if the
+ * Returns: %TRUE if a region has been validated, %FALSE if the
  * entire tree was already valid.
  **/
 gboolean
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextbuffer.c b/gtk/gtktextbuffer.c
index 423f649186..e562c331ec 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextbuffer.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextbuffer.c
@@ -767,7 +767,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_notify (GObject    *object,
  *
  * Creates a new text buffer.
  *
- * Return value: a new text buffer
+ * Returns: a new text buffer
  **/
 GtkTextBuffer*
 gtk_text_buffer_new (GtkTextTagTable *table)
@@ -837,7 +837,7 @@ _gtk_text_buffer_get_btree (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
  *
  * Get the #GtkTextTagTable associated with this buffer.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the buffer’s tag table
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the buffer’s tag table
  **/
 GtkTextTagTable*
 gtk_text_buffer_get_tag_table (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
@@ -996,7 +996,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_insert_at_cursor (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the
  * result of gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
  *
- * Return value: whether text was actually inserted
+ * Returns: whether text was actually inserted
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
@@ -1034,7 +1034,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the
  * result of gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
  * 
- * Return value: whether text was actually inserted
+ * Returns: whether text was actually inserted
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive_at_cursor (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
@@ -1689,7 +1689,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_delete (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * the location of the last deleted range, or left untouched if
  * no text was deleted.
  *
- * Return value: whether some text was actually deleted
+ * Returns: whether some text was actually deleted
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_buffer_delete_interactive (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
@@ -1835,7 +1835,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_delete_interactive (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * and character indexes into the buffer. Contrast with
  * gtk_text_buffer_get_slice().
  *
- * Return value: an allocated UTF-8 string
+ * Returns: an allocated UTF-8 string
  **/
 gchar*
 gtk_text_buffer_get_text (GtkTextBuffer     *buffer,
@@ -1873,7 +1873,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_get_text (GtkTextBuffer     *buffer,
  * text as well, so it is not a reliable indicator that a pixbuf or
  * widget is in the buffer.
  *
- * Return value: an allocated UTF-8 string
+ * Returns: an allocated UTF-8 string
  **/
 gchar*
 gtk_text_buffer_get_slice (GtkTextBuffer     *buffer,
@@ -1994,7 +1994,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_insert_child_anchor (GtkTextBuffer      *buffer,
  * owned by the buffer; no reference count is returned to
  * the caller of gtk_text_buffer_create_child_anchor().
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): the created child anchor
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the created child anchor
  **/
 GtkTextChildAnchor*
 gtk_text_buffer_create_child_anchor (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
@@ -2059,7 +2059,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_mark_set (GtkTextBuffer     *buffer,
  * Move the mark to the given position, if not @should_exist, 
  * create the mark.
  *
- * Return value: mark
+ * Returns: mark
  **/
 static GtkTextMark*
 gtk_text_buffer_set_mark (GtkTextBuffer     *buffer,
@@ -2115,7 +2115,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_set_mark (GtkTextBuffer     *buffer,
  * Emits the #GtkTextBuffer::mark-set signal as notification of the mark's
  * initial placement.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the new #GtkTextMark object
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the new #GtkTextMark object
  **/
 GtkTextMark*
 gtk_text_buffer_create_mark (GtkTextBuffer     *buffer,
@@ -2256,7 +2256,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * Returns the mark named @name in buffer @buffer, or %NULL if no such
  * mark exists in the buffer.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GtkTextMark, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GtkTextMark, or %NULL
  **/
 GtkTextMark*
 gtk_text_buffer_get_mark (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
@@ -2339,7 +2339,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark_by_name (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * named “insert”, but very slightly more efficient, and involves less
  * typing.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): insertion point mark
+ * Returns: (transfer none): insertion point mark
  **/
 GtkTextMark*
 gtk_text_buffer_get_insert (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
@@ -2365,7 +2365,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_get_insert (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
  * for handling the selection, if you just want to know whether there’s a
  * selection and what its bounds are.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): selection bound mark
+ * Returns: (transfer none): selection bound mark
  **/
 GtkTextMark*
 gtk_text_buffer_get_selection_bound (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
@@ -2478,7 +2478,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_select_range (GtkTextBuffer     *buffer,
  * The @first_property_name argument and subsequent arguments are a list
  * of properties to set on the tag, as with g_object_set().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a new tag
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a new tag
  */
 GtkTextTag*
 gtk_text_buffer_create_tag (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
@@ -3025,7 +3025,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_get_bounds (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * %FALSE. Used for example to enable a “save” function in a text
  * editor.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the buffer has been modified
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the buffer has been modified
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_buffer_get_modified (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
@@ -3071,7 +3071,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_set_modified (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * 
  * Indicates whether the buffer has some text currently selected.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the there is text selected
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the there is text selected
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -3095,7 +3095,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_get_has_selection (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
  * Obtains the number of lines in the buffer. This value is cached, so
  * the function is very fast.
  * 
- * Return value: number of lines in the buffer
+ * Returns: number of lines in the buffer
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_buffer_get_line_count (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
@@ -3114,7 +3114,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_get_line_count (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
  * the buffer in string form to be this many bytes long. The character
  * count is cached, so this function is very fast.
  * 
- * Return value: number of characters in the buffer
+ * Returns: number of characters in the buffer
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_buffer_get_char_count (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
@@ -3825,7 +3825,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_paste_clipboard (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * the editability of the selection will be considered (users can’t delete
  * uneditable text).
  * 
- * Return value: whether there was a non-empty selection to delete
+ * Returns: whether there was a non-empty selection to delete
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_buffer_delete_selection (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
@@ -3868,7 +3868,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_delete_selection (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * invalid after calling this function; however, the @iter will be
  * re-initialized to point to the location where text was deleted. 
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the buffer was modified
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the buffer was modified
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -4067,7 +4067,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_copy_clipboard (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * NULL, then they are not filled in, but the return value still indicates
  * whether text is selected.
  *
- * Return value: whether the selection has nonzero length
+ * Returns: whether the selection has nonzero length
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_buffer_get_selection_bounds (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
@@ -4203,7 +4203,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_get_target_list (GtkTextBuffer   *buffer,
  * using gtk_target_list_add_rich_text_targets() and
  * gtk_target_list_add_text_targets().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkTargetList
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GtkTargetList
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -4235,7 +4235,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_get_copy_target_list (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
  * using gtk_target_list_add_rich_text_targets() and
  * gtk_target_list_add_text_targets().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkTargetList
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GtkTargetList
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextbufferrichtext.c b/gtk/gtktextbufferrichtext.c
index 160dd82c92..4a89b7c75a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextbufferrichtext.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextbufferrichtext.c
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ static GQuark    deserialize_quark (void);
  * This function registers a rich text serialization @function along with
  * its @mime_type with the passed @buffer.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the
  *               newly registered format’s mime-type.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format (GtkTextBuffer              *buffer,
  * identifier != %NULL here, since the %NULL tagset requires the
  * receiving buffer to deal with with pasting of arbitrary tags.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the
  *               newly registered format’s mime-type.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * This function registers a rich text deserialization @function along with
  * its @mime_type with the passed @buffer.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the
  *               newly registered format’s mime-type.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format (GtkTextBuffer                *buffe
  * format with the passed @buffer. See
  * gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() for details.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the
  *               newly registered format’s mime-type.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_deserialize_set_can_create_tags (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * This functions returns the value set with
  * gtk_text_buffer_deserialize_set_can_create_tags()
  *
- * Return value: whether deserializing this format may create tags
+ * Returns: whether deserializing this format may create tags
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_deserialize_get_can_create_tags (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * with @buffer using gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format() or
  * gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset()
  *
- * Return value: (array length=n_formats) (transfer container): an array of
+ * Returns: (array length=n_formats) (transfer container): an array of
  *               #GdkAtoms representing the registered formats.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_get_serialize_formats (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * with @buffer using gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format() or
  * gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset()
  *
- * Return value: (array length=n_formats) (transfer container): an array of
+ * Returns: (array length=n_formats) (transfer container): an array of
  *               #GdkAtoms representing the registered formats.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_get_deserialize_formats (GtkTextBuffer *buffer,
  * gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format() or
  * gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() beforehand.
  *
- * Return value: (array length=length) (transfer full): the serialized
+ * Returns: (array length=length) (transfer full): the serialized
  *               data, encoded as @format
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ gtk_text_buffer_serialize (GtkTextBuffer     *register_buffer,
  * gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format() or
  * gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset() beforehand.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE on success, %FALSE otherwise.
+ * Returns: %TRUE on success, %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextchild.c b/gtk/gtktextchild.c
index 9fe5fdafcf..de609d49e9 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextchild.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextchild.c
@@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ gtk_text_child_anchor_class_init (GtkTextChildAnchorClass *klass)
  * To perform the creation and insertion in one step, use the
  * convenience function gtk_text_buffer_create_child_anchor().
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkTextChildAnchor
+ * Returns: a new #GtkTextChildAnchor
  **/
 GtkTextChildAnchor*
 gtk_text_child_anchor_new (void)
@@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ gtk_text_child_anchor_finalize (GObject *obj)
  * The returned list should be freed with g_list_free().
  *
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer container): list of widgets anchored at @anchor
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer container): list of widgets anchored at @anchor
  **/
 GList*
 gtk_text_child_anchor_get_widgets (GtkTextChildAnchor *anchor)
@@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ gtk_text_child_anchor_get_widgets (GtkTextChildAnchor *anchor)
  * to use this function &mdash; otherwise all deleted child anchors
  * will also be finalized.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the child anchor has been deleted from its buffer
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the child anchor has been deleted from its buffer
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_child_anchor_get_deleted (GtkTextChildAnchor *anchor)
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextiter.c b/gtk/gtktextiter.c
index 49bda5d89c..5b91919a61 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextiter.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextiter.c
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ check_invariants (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  *
  * Returns the #GtkTextBuffer this iterator is associated with.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the buffer
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the buffer
  **/
 GtkTextBuffer*
 gtk_text_iter_get_buffer (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_buffer (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * simple assignment (`GtkTextIter i = j;`). The
  * function is used by language bindings.
  *
- * Return value: a copy of the @iter, free with gtk_text_iter_free ()
+ * Returns: a copy of the @iter, free with gtk_text_iter_free ()
  **/
 GtkTextIter*
 gtk_text_iter_copy (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ _gtk_text_iter_get_btree (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * Use gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_offset () to convert an
  * offset back into an iterator.
  *
- * Return value: a character offset
+ * Returns: a character offset
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_iter_get_offset (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_offset (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * a #GtkTextBuffer are numbered beginning with 0 for the first
  * line in the buffer.
  *
- * Return value: a line number
+ * Returns: a line number
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_iter_get_line (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_line (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * counting from the start of a newline-terminated line.
  * The first character on the line has offset 0.
  *
- * Return value: offset from start of line
+ * Returns: offset from start of line
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_iter_get_line_offset (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -687,7 +687,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_line_offset (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * UTF-8, and that characters can require a variable
  * number of bytes to represent.
  *
- * Return value: distance from start of line, in bytes
+ * Returns: distance from start of line, in bytes
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_iter_get_line_index (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_line_index (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * are invisible due to tags with the “invisible” flag
  * toggled on.
  * 
- * Return value: offset in visible characters from the start of the line 
+ * Returns: offset in visible characters from the start of the line 
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_iter_get_visible_line_offset (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -782,7 +782,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_visible_line_offset (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * are invisible due to tags with the “invisible” flag
  * toggled on.
  * 
- * Return value: byte index of @iter with respect to the start of the line
+ * Returns: byte index of @iter with respect to the start of the line
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_iter_get_visible_line_index (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -899,7 +899,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_char (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * text as well, so it is not a reliable indicator that a pixbuf or
  * widget is in the buffer.
  *
- * Return value: slice of text from the buffer
+ * Returns: slice of text from the buffer
  **/
 gchar*
 gtk_text_iter_get_slice       (const GtkTextIter *start,
@@ -925,7 +925,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_slice       (const GtkTextIter *start,
  * byte offsets in the buffer. If you want offsets to correspond, see
  * gtk_text_iter_get_slice ().
  *
- * Return value: array of characters from the buffer
+ * Returns: array of characters from the buffer
  **/
 gchar*
 gtk_text_iter_get_text       (const GtkTextIter *start,
@@ -949,7 +949,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_text       (const GtkTextIter *start,
  * Invisible text is usually invisible because a #GtkTextTag with the
  * “invisible” attribute turned on has been applied to it.
  *
- * Return value: slice of text from the buffer
+ * Returns: slice of text from the buffer
  **/
 gchar*
 gtk_text_iter_get_visible_slice (const GtkTextIter  *start,
@@ -973,7 +973,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_visible_slice (const GtkTextIter  *start,
  * Invisible text is usually invisible because a #GtkTextTag with the
  * “invisible” attribute turned on has been applied to it.
  *
- * Return value: string containing visible text in the range
+ * Returns: string containing visible text in the range
  **/
 gchar*
 gtk_text_iter_get_visible_text (const GtkTextIter  *start,
@@ -996,7 +996,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_visible_text (const GtkTextIter  *start,
  * (with no new reference count added). Otherwise,
  * %NULL is returned.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the pixbuf at @iter
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the pixbuf at @iter
  **/
 GdkPixbuf*
 gtk_text_iter_get_pixbuf (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -1026,7 +1026,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_pixbuf (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * anchor is returned (with no new reference count added). Otherwise,
  * %NULL is returned.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the anchor at @iter
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the anchor at @iter
  **/
 GtkTextChildAnchor*
 gtk_text_iter_get_child_anchor (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -1058,7 +1058,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_child_anchor (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * can exist in the same place. The returned list is not in any
  * meaningful order.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkTextMark) (transfer container): list of #GtkTextMark
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkTextMark) (transfer container): list of #GtkTextMark
  **/
 GSList*
 gtk_text_iter_get_marks (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -1104,7 +1104,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_marks (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * a tag is toggled off, then some non-empty range following @iter
  * does not have the tag applied to it.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkTextTag) (transfer container): tags toggled at this point
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkTextTag) (transfer container): tags toggled at this point
  **/
 GSList*
 gtk_text_iter_get_toggled_tags  (const GtkTextIter  *iter,
@@ -1165,7 +1165,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_toggled_tags  (const GtkTextIter  *iter,
  * %TRUE, gtk_text_iter_has_tag() will also return %TRUE for the same
  * parameters.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter is the start of a range tagged with @tag
+ * Returns: whether @iter is the start of a range tagged with @tag
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_begins_tag    (const GtkTextIter  *iter,
@@ -1213,7 +1213,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_begins_tag    (const GtkTextIter  *iter,
  * unlike gtk_text_iter_begins_tag(), if gtk_text_iter_ends_tag() returns %TRUE,
  * gtk_text_iter_has_tag() will return %FALSE for the same parameters.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter is the end of a range tagged with @tag
+ * Returns: whether @iter is the end of a range tagged with @tag
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_ends_tag   (const GtkTextIter  *iter,
@@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_ends_tag   (const GtkTextIter  *iter,
  * gtk_text_iter_ends_tag ()), i.e. it tells you whether a range with
  * @tag applied to it begins or ends at @iter.
  *
- * Return value: whether @tag is toggled on or off at @iter
+ * Returns: whether @tag is toggled on or off at @iter
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_toggles_tag (const GtkTextIter  *iter,
@@ -1297,7 +1297,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_toggles_tag (const GtkTextIter  *iter,
  * Returns %TRUE if @iter points to a character that is part of a range tagged
  * with @tag. See also gtk_text_iter_begins_tag() and gtk_text_iter_ends_tag().
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter is tagged with @tag
+ * Returns: whether @iter is tagged with @tag
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_has_tag (const GtkTextIter   *iter,
@@ -1337,7 +1337,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_has_tag (const GtkTextIter   *iter,
  * list don’t have a reference added, but you have to free the list
  * itself.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkTextTag) (transfer container): list of #GtkTextTag
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkTextTag) (transfer container): list of #GtkTextTag
  **/
 GSList*
 gtk_text_iter_get_tags (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -1392,7 +1392,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_tags (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * editable range. Use gtk_text_iter_can_insert() to handle this
  * case.
  * 
- * Return value: whether @iter is inside an editable range
+ * Returns: whether @iter is inside an editable range
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_editable (const GtkTextIter *iter,
@@ -1428,7 +1428,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_editable (const GtkTextIter *iter,
  * gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive() uses this function to decide
  * whether insertions are allowed at a given position.
  * 
- * Return value: whether text inserted at @iter would be editable
+ * Returns: whether text inserted at @iter would be editable
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_can_insert (const GtkTextIter *iter,
@@ -1465,7 +1465,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_can_insert (const GtkTextIter *iter,
  * language apply to @iter, the return value is identical to that of
  * gtk_get_default_language ().
  *
- * Return value: language in effect at @iter
+ * Returns: language in effect at @iter
  **/
 PangoLanguage *
 gtk_text_iter_get_language (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -1494,7 +1494,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_language (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * gtk_text_iter_get_line_offset () because it doesn’t have to compute
  * the offset, it just has to see whether it’s 0.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter begins a line
+ * Returns: whether @iter begins a line
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_starts_line (const GtkTextIter   *iter)
@@ -1534,7 +1534,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_starts_line (const GtkTextIter   *iter)
  * considered to be at the end of a line, even though there are no
  * paragraph delimiter chars there.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter is at the end of a line
+ * Returns: whether @iter is at the end of a line
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_ends_line (const GtkTextIter   *iter)
@@ -1591,7 +1591,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_ends_line (const GtkTextIter   *iter)
  * the most efficient way to check whether an iterator is the end
  * iterator.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter is the end iterator
+ * Returns: whether @iter is the end iterator
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_is_end (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -1629,7 +1629,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_is_end (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * Returns %TRUE if @iter is the first iterator in the buffer, that is
  * if @iter has a character offset of 0.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter is the first in the buffer
+ * Returns: whether @iter is the first in the buffer
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_is_start (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -1644,7 +1644,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_is_start (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * Returns the number of characters in the line containing @iter,
  * including the paragraph delimiters.
  *
- * Return value: number of characters in the line
+ * Returns: number of characters in the line
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_iter_get_chars_in_line (const GtkTextIter   *iter)
@@ -1696,7 +1696,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_chars_in_line (const GtkTextIter   *iter)
  * Returns the number of bytes in the line containing @iter,
  * including the paragraph delimiters.
  *
- * Return value: number of bytes in the line
+ * Returns: number of bytes in the line
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_iter_get_bytes_in_line (const GtkTextIter   *iter)
@@ -1754,7 +1754,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_get_bytes_in_line (const GtkTextIter   *iter)
  * effects of any tags present at @iter. If any tags affected @values,
  * the function returns %TRUE.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @values was modified
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @values was modified
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_get_attributes (const GtkTextIter  *iter,
@@ -2214,7 +2214,7 @@ _gtk_text_iter_backward_indexable_segment (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * the end iterator, and gtk_text_iter_forward_char () returns %FALSE for
  * convenience when writing loops.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_forward_char (GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -2243,7 +2243,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_char (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * offset 0), gtk_text_iter_backward_char () returns %FALSE for convenience when
  * writing loops.
  *
- * Return value: whether movement was possible
+ * Returns: whether movement was possible
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_backward_char (GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -2282,7 +2282,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_char (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * (the last iterator in the buffer is not dereferenceable). If @count
  * is 0, the function does nothing and returns %FALSE.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_forward_chars (GtkTextIter *iter, gint count)
@@ -2353,7 +2353,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_chars (GtkTextIter *iter, gint count)
  * moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
  * the function does nothing and returns %FALSE.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
  *
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -2466,7 +2466,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_chars (GtkTextIter *iter, gint count)
  * through the results of gtk_text_iter_get_text (), rather than
  * gtk_text_iter_get_slice ().
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_forward_text_chars  (GtkTextIter *iter,
@@ -2487,7 +2487,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_text_chars  (GtkTextIter *iter,
  * through the results of gtk_text_iter_get_text (), rather than
  * gtk_text_iter_get_slice ().
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_backward_text_chars (GtkTextIter *iter,
@@ -2507,7 +2507,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_text_chars (GtkTextIter *iter,
  * If after the operation, the iter is at the end of the buffer and not
  * dereferencable, returns %FALSE. Otherwise, returns %TRUE.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter can be dereferenced
+ * Returns: whether @iter can be dereferenced
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_forward_line (GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -2559,7 +2559,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_line (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * in a loop calling this function, the line number may not change on
  * every iteration, if your first iteration is on line 0.)
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter moved
+ * Returns: whether @iter moved
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_backward_line (GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -2636,7 +2636,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_line (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
  * moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_forward_lines (GtkTextIter *iter, gint count)
@@ -2687,7 +2687,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_lines (GtkTextIter *iter, gint count)
  * the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
  * moves forward by 0 - @count lines.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_backward_lines (GtkTextIter *iter, gint count)
@@ -2723,7 +2723,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_lines (GtkTextIter *iter, gint count)
  * the end of the buffer and is now not dereferenceable, or if @iter was
  * already at the end of the buffer.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter can be dereferenced
+ * Returns: whether @iter can be dereferenced
  * 
  * Since: 2.8
  **/
@@ -2763,7 +2763,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_line (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * in a loop calling this function, the line number may not change on
  * every iteration, if your first iteration is on line 0.)
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter moved
+ * Returns: whether @iter moved
  *
  * Since: 2.8
  **/
@@ -2804,7 +2804,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_line (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
  * moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
  * 
  * Since: 2.8
  **/
@@ -2844,7 +2844,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_lines (GtkTextIter *iter,
  * the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
  * moves forward by 0 - @count lines.
  *
- * Return value: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
  *
  * Since: 2.8
  **/
@@ -3219,7 +3219,7 @@ move_multiple_steps (GtkTextIter *iter,
  * language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
  * algorithms).
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end (GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -3237,7 +3237,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
  * algorithms).
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start (GtkTextIter      *iter)
@@ -3256,7 +3256,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start (GtkTextIter      *iter)
  * 
  * Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end() up to @count times.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_forward_word_ends (GtkTextIter      *iter,
@@ -3274,7 +3274,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_word_ends (GtkTextIter      *iter,
  * 
  * Calls gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start() up to @count times.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_backward_word_starts (GtkTextIter      *iter,
@@ -3295,7 +3295,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_word_starts (GtkTextIter      *iter,
  * language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
  * algorithms).
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -3315,7 +3315,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
  * algorithms).
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -3332,7 +3332,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_word_start (GtkTextIter      *iter)
  * 
  * Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end() up to @count times.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -3352,7 +3352,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_ends (GtkTextIter *iter,
  * 
  * Calls gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_word_start() up to @count times.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator 
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -3374,7 +3374,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_word_starts (GtkTextIter *iter,
  * language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
  * algorithms).
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter is at the start of a word
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter is at the start of a word
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_starts_word (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -3391,7 +3391,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_starts_word (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
  * algorithms).
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter is at the end of a word
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter is at the end of a word
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_ends_word (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -3408,7 +3408,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_ends_word (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language (if not, the
  * correct fix would be to the Pango word break algorithms).
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter is inside a word
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter is inside a word
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_inside_word (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -3425,7 +3425,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_inside_word (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary
  * algorithms).
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter is at the start of a sentence.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter is at the start of a sentence.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_starts_sentence (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -3442,7 +3442,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_starts_sentence (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary
  * algorithms).
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter is at the end of a sentence.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter is at the end of a sentence.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_ends_sentence (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -3460,7 +3460,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_ends_sentence (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language (if not, the
  * correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary algorithms).
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter is inside a sentence.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter is inside a sentence.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_inside_sentence (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -3478,7 +3478,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_inside_sentence (const GtkTextIter *iter)
  * any language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text
  * boundary algorithms).
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end (GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -3496,7 +3496,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * any language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text
  * boundary algorithms).
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_backward_sentence_start (GtkTextIter      *iter)
@@ -3516,7 +3516,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_sentence_start (GtkTextIter      *iter)
  * gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() returns %FALSE). If @count is
  * negative, moves backward instead of forward.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_ends (GtkTextIter      *iter,
@@ -3536,7 +3536,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_ends (GtkTextIter      *iter,
  * or until it returns %FALSE. If @count is negative, moves forward
  * instead of backward.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_backward_sentence_starts (GtkTextIter      *iter,
@@ -3611,7 +3611,7 @@ is_cursor_pos_func (const PangoLogAttr *attrs,
  * between those two characters. See also the #PangoLogAttr-struct and
  * pango_break() function.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position (GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -3625,7 +3625,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * 
  * Like gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position(), but moves backward.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if we moved
+ * Returns: %TRUE if we moved
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position (GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -3641,7 +3641,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * Moves up to @count cursor positions. See
  * gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() for details.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_positions (GtkTextIter *iter,
@@ -3660,7 +3660,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_positions (GtkTextIter *iter,
  * Moves up to @count cursor positions. See
  * gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() for details.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_positions (GtkTextIter *iter,
@@ -3678,7 +3678,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_positions (GtkTextIter *iter,
  * Moves @iter forward to the next visible cursor position. See 
  * gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() for details.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -3695,7 +3695,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_cursor_position (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * Moves @iter forward to the previous visible cursor position. See 
  * gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position() for details.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -3713,7 +3713,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_cursor_position (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * Moves up to @count visible cursor positions. See
  * gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() for details.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -3734,7 +3734,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_cursor_positions (GtkTextIter *iter,
  * Moves up to @count visible cursor positions. See
  * gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position() for details.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
+ * Returns: %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -3754,7 +3754,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_cursor_positions (GtkTextIter *iter,
  * See gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() or #PangoLogAttr or
  * pango_break() for details on what a cursor position is.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the cursor can be placed at @iter
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the cursor can be placed at @iter
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_is_cursor_position (const GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -4100,7 +4100,7 @@ find_paragraph_delimiter_for_line (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * not end in paragraph delimiters, moves to the end iterator (end of
  * the last line), and returns %FALSE.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if we moved and the new location is not the end iterator
+ * Returns: %TRUE if we moved and the new location is not the end iterator
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_forward_to_line_end (GtkTextIter *iter)
@@ -4150,7 +4150,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_to_line_end (GtkTextIter *iter)
  * the location of the toggle, or to the end of the buffer
  * if no toggle is found.
  *
- * Return value: whether we found a tag toggle after @iter
+ * Returns: whether we found a tag toggle after @iter
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_forward_to_tag_toggle (GtkTextIter *iter,
@@ -4235,7 +4235,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_to_tag_toggle (GtkTextIter *iter,
  * to the location of the toggle, or the start of the buffer
  * if no toggle is found.
  *
- * Return value: whether we found a tag toggle before @iter
+ * Returns: whether we found a tag toggle before @iter
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_backward_to_tag_toggle (GtkTextIter *iter,
@@ -4347,7 +4347,7 @@ matches_pred (GtkTextIter *iter,
  * If @pred never returns %TRUE, @iter is set to @limit if
  * @limit is non-%NULL, otherwise to the end iterator.
  * 
- * Return value: whether a match was found
+ * Returns: whether a match was found
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char (GtkTextIter         *iter,
@@ -4382,7 +4382,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char (GtkTextIter         *iter,
  * 
  * Same as gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char(), but goes backward from @iter.
  * 
- * Return value: whether a match was found
+ * Returns: whether a match was found
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_backward_find_char (GtkTextIter         *iter,
@@ -5341,7 +5341,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_backward_search (const GtkTextIter *iter,
  * comparing the offsets yourself. Also, it’s a bit faster than
  * gtk_text_iter_compare().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the iterators point to the same place in the buffer
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the iterators point to the same place in the buffer
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_equal (const GtkTextIter *lhs,
@@ -5381,7 +5381,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_equal (const GtkTextIter *lhs,
  * Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
  * is less than the second character in the buffer.
  * 
- * Return value: -1 if @lhs is less than @rhs, 1 if @lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal
+ * Returns: -1 if @lhs is less than @rhs, 1 if @lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_iter_compare (const GtkTextIter *lhs,
@@ -5451,7 +5451,7 @@ gtk_text_iter_compare (const GtkTextIter *lhs,
  * Checks whether @iter falls in the range [@start, @end).
  * @start and @end must be in ascending order.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter is in the range
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter is in the range
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_iter_in_range (const GtkTextIter *iter,
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextlayout.c b/gtk/gtktextlayout.c
index 7c551c160c..4ad0aee3ae 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextlayout.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextlayout.c
@@ -477,7 +477,7 @@ gtk_text_layout_set_keyboard_direction (GtkTextLayout   *layout,
  * Gets the text buffer used by the layout. See
  * gtk_text_layout_set_buffer().
  *
- * Return value: the text buffer used by the layout.
+ * Returns: the text buffer used by the layout.
  */
 GtkTextBuffer *
 gtk_text_layout_get_buffer (GtkTextLayout *layout)
@@ -544,7 +544,7 @@ gtk_text_layout_set_cursor_visible (GtkTextLayout *layout,
  *
  * Returns whether the insertion cursor will be shown.
  *
- * Return value: if %FALSE, the insertion cursor will not be
+ * Returns: if %FALSE, the insertion cursor will not be
  *     shown, even if the text is editable.
  */
 gboolean
@@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ gtk_text_layout_wrap (GtkTextLayout *layout,
 /**
  * gtk_text_layout_get_lines:
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkTextLine) (transfer container):
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkTextLine) (transfer container):
  */
 GSList*
 gtk_text_layout_get_lines (GtkTextLayout *layout,
@@ -973,7 +973,7 @@ gtk_text_layout_real_free_line_data (GtkTextLayout     *layout,
  *
  * Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout’s buffer
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if any invalid regions were found
+ * Returns: %TRUE if any invalid regions were found
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_text_layout_is_valid (GtkTextLayout *layout)
@@ -1467,7 +1467,7 @@ gtk_text_attr_appearance_compare (const PangoAttribute *attr1,
  * allows setting family, style, weight, variant, stretch,
  * and size simultaneously.)
  *
- * Return value:
+ * Returns:
  */
 static PangoAttribute *
 gtk_text_attr_appearance_new (const GtkTextAppearance *appearance)
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextmark.c b/gtk/gtktextmark.c
index d0fddd3bf9..7a1b7e3334 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextmark.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextmark.c
@@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ gtk_text_mark_get_property (GObject    *object,
  * mark with right gravity (when you type, the cursor stays on the right
  * side of the text you’re typing).
  *
- * Return value: new #GtkTextMark
+ * Returns: new #GtkTextMark
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  **/
@@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ gtk_text_mark_new (const gchar *name,
  * Returns %TRUE if the mark is visible (i.e. a cursor is displayed
  * for it).
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if visible
+ * Returns: %TRUE if visible
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_mark_get_visible (GtkTextMark *mark)
@@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ gtk_text_mark_get_visible (GtkTextMark *mark)
  * 
  * Returns the mark name; returns NULL for anonymous marks.
  * 
- * Return value: mark name
+ * Returns: mark name
  **/
 const char *
 gtk_text_mark_get_name (GtkTextMark *mark)
@@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ gtk_text_mark_get_name (GtkTextMark *mark)
  * with gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark(). See gtk_text_buffer_add_mark()
  * for a way to add it to a buffer again.
  * 
- * Return value: whether the mark is deleted
+ * Returns: whether the mark is deleted
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_mark_get_deleted (GtkTextMark *mark)
@@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ gtk_text_mark_get_deleted (GtkTextMark *mark)
  * Gets the buffer this mark is located inside,
  * or %NULL if the mark is deleted.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the mark’s #GtkTextBuffer
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the mark’s #GtkTextBuffer
  **/
 GtkTextBuffer*
 gtk_text_mark_get_buffer (GtkTextMark *mark)
@@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ gtk_text_mark_get_buffer (GtkTextMark *mark)
  * 
  * Determines whether the mark has left gravity.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the mark has left gravity, %FALSE otherwise
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the mark has left gravity, %FALSE otherwise
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_mark_get_left_gravity (GtkTextMark *mark)
diff --git a/gtk/gtktexttag.c b/gtk/gtktexttag.c
index e9ee74a856..4510872c51 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktexttag.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktexttag.c
@@ -767,7 +767,7 @@ gtk_text_tag_init (GtkTextTag *text_tag)
  * Creates a #GtkTextTag. Configure the tag using object arguments,
  * i.e. using g_object_set().
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkTextTag
+ * Returns: a new #GtkTextTag
  **/
 GtkTextTag*
 gtk_text_tag_new (const gchar *name)
@@ -1894,7 +1894,7 @@ delta_priority_foreach (GtkTextTag *tag, gpointer user_data)
  * 
  * Get the tag priority.
  * 
- * Return value: The tag’s priority.
+ * Returns: The tag’s priority.
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_tag_get_priority (GtkTextTag *tag)
@@ -1968,7 +1968,7 @@ gtk_text_tag_set_priority (GtkTextTag *tag,
  * 
  * Emits the “event” signal on the #GtkTextTag.
  * 
- * Return value: result of signal emission (whether the event was handled)
+ * Returns: result of signal emission (whether the event was handled)
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_tag_event (GtkTextTag        *tag,
diff --git a/gtk/gtktexttagtable.c b/gtk/gtktexttagtable.c
index b69df05688..f750318ab7 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktexttagtable.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktexttagtable.c
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ gtk_text_tag_table_init (GtkTextTagTable *table)
  * Creates a new #GtkTextTagTable. The table contains no tags by
  * default.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkTextTagTable
+ * Returns: a new #GtkTextTagTable
  **/
 GtkTextTagTable*
 gtk_text_tag_table_new (void)
@@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ gtk_text_tag_table_add (GtkTextTagTable *table,
  * 
  * Look up a named tag.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): The tag, or %NULL if none by that name is in the table.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The tag, or %NULL if none by that name is in the table.
  **/
 GtkTextTag*
 gtk_text_tag_table_lookup (GtkTextTagTable *table,
@@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ gtk_text_tag_table_foreach (GtkTextTagTable       *table,
  * 
  * Returns the size of the table (number of tags)
  * 
- * Return value: number of tags in @table
+ * Returns: number of tags in @table
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_tag_table_get_size (GtkTextTagTable *table)
diff --git a/gtk/gtktextview.c b/gtk/gtktextview.c
index ee3b9b8ea6..b3c3bd15f5 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktextview.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktextview.c
@@ -1567,7 +1567,7 @@ gtk_text_view_init (GtkTextView *text_view)
  * for you. Get the buffer with gtk_text_view_get_buffer(). If you want
  * to specify your own buffer, consider gtk_text_view_new_with_buffer().
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkTextView
+ * Returns: a new #GtkTextView
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_text_view_new (void)
@@ -1586,7 +1586,7 @@ gtk_text_view_new (void)
  * text view adds its own reference count to the buffer; it does not
  * take over an existing reference.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkTextView.
+ * Returns: a new #GtkTextView.
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_text_view_new_with_buffer (GtkTextBuffer *buffer)
@@ -1768,7 +1768,7 @@ get_buffer (GtkTextView *text_view)
  * The reference count on the buffer is not incremented; the caller
  * of this function won’t own a new reference.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GtkTextBuffer
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GtkTextBuffer
  **/
 GtkTextBuffer*
 gtk_text_view_get_buffer (GtkTextView *text_view)
@@ -2007,7 +2007,7 @@ gtk_text_view_get_line_at_y (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * using gtk_text_view_scroll_to_mark() which saves a point to be 
  * scrolled to after line validation.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if scrolling occurred
+ * Returns: %TRUE if scrolling occurred
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_view_scroll_to_iter (GtkTextView   *text_view,
@@ -2481,7 +2481,7 @@ clamp_iter_onscreen (GtkTextView *text_view, GtkTextIter *iter)
  * Moves a mark within the buffer so that it's
  * located within the currently-visible text area.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the mark moved (wasn’t already onscreen)
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the mark moved (wasn’t already onscreen)
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_view_move_mark_onscreen (GtkTextView *text_view,
@@ -2574,7 +2574,7 @@ gtk_text_view_set_wrap_mode (GtkTextView *text_view,
  *
  * Gets the line wrapping for the view.
  *
- * Return value: the line wrap setting
+ * Returns: the line wrap setting
  **/
 GtkWrapMode
 gtk_text_view_get_wrap_mode (GtkTextView *text_view)
@@ -2637,7 +2637,7 @@ gtk_text_view_set_editable (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * Returns the default editability of the #GtkTextView. Tags in the
  * buffer may override this setting for some ranges of text.
  *
- * Return value: whether text is editable by default
+ * Returns: whether text is editable by default
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_view_get_editable (GtkTextView *text_view)
@@ -2685,7 +2685,7 @@ gtk_text_view_set_pixels_above_lines (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * 
  * Gets the default number of pixels to put above paragraphs.
  * 
- * Return value: default number of pixels above paragraphs
+ * Returns: default number of pixels above paragraphs
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_view_get_pixels_above_lines (GtkTextView *text_view)
@@ -2734,7 +2734,7 @@ gtk_text_view_set_pixels_below_lines (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_text_view_set_pixels_below_lines().
  * 
- * Return value: default number of blank pixels below paragraphs
+ * Returns: default number of blank pixels below paragraphs
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_view_get_pixels_below_lines (GtkTextView *text_view)
@@ -2783,7 +2783,7 @@ gtk_text_view_set_pixels_inside_wrap (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_text_view_set_pixels_inside_wrap().
  * 
- * Return value: default number of pixels of blank space between wrapped lines
+ * Returns: default number of pixels of blank space between wrapped lines
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_view_get_pixels_inside_wrap (GtkTextView *text_view)
@@ -2833,7 +2833,7 @@ gtk_text_view_set_justification (GtkTextView     *text_view,
  * Gets the default justification of paragraphs in @text_view.
  * Tags in the buffer may override the default.
  * 
- * Return value: default justification
+ * Returns: default justification
  **/
 GtkJustification
 gtk_text_view_get_justification (GtkTextView *text_view)
@@ -2882,7 +2882,7 @@ gtk_text_view_set_left_margin (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * Gets the default left margin size of paragraphs in the @text_view.
  * Tags in the buffer may override the default.
  * 
- * Return value: left margin in pixels
+ * Returns: left margin in pixels
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_view_get_left_margin (GtkTextView *text_view)
@@ -2929,7 +2929,7 @@ gtk_text_view_set_right_margin (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * Gets the default right margin for text in @text_view. Tags
  * in the buffer may override the default.
  * 
- * Return value: right margin in pixels
+ * Returns: right margin in pixels
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_view_get_right_margin (GtkTextView *text_view)
@@ -2979,7 +2979,7 @@ gtk_text_view_set_indent (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * Tags in the view’s buffer may override the default.
  * The indentation may be negative.
  * 
- * Return value: number of pixels of indentation
+ * Returns: number of pixels of indentation
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_view_get_indent (GtkTextView *text_view)
@@ -3036,7 +3036,7 @@ gtk_text_view_set_tabs (GtkTextView   *text_view,
  * “standard” (8-space) tabs are used. Free the return value
  * with pango_tab_array_free().
  * 
- * Return value: copy of default tab array, or %NULL if “standard” 
+ * Returns: copy of default tab array, or %NULL if “standard” 
  *    tabs are used; must be freed with pango_tab_array_free().
  **/
 PangoTabArray*
@@ -3096,7 +3096,7 @@ gtk_text_view_set_cursor_visible (GtkTextView *text_view,
  *
  * Find out whether the cursor is being displayed.
  *
- * Return value: whether the insertion mark is visible
+ * Returns: whether the insertion mark is visible
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_view_get_cursor_visible (GtkTextView *text_view)
@@ -3114,7 +3114,7 @@ gtk_text_view_get_cursor_visible (GtkTextView *text_view)
  * Moves the cursor to the currently visible region of the
  * buffer, it it isn’t there already.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the cursor had to be moved.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the cursor had to be moved.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_view_place_cursor_onscreen (GtkTextView *text_view)
@@ -6601,7 +6601,7 @@ gtk_text_view_toggle_overwrite (GtkTextView *text_view)
  *
  * Returns whether the #GtkTextView is in overwrite mode or not.
  *
- * Return value: whether @text_view is in overwrite mode or not.
+ * Returns: whether @text_view is in overwrite mode or not.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -6670,7 +6670,7 @@ gtk_text_view_set_accepts_tab (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * Returns whether pressing the Tab key inserts a tab characters.
  * gtk_text_view_set_accepts_tab().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if pressing the Tab key inserts a tab character, 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if pressing the Tab key inserts a tab character, 
  *   %FALSE if pressing the Tab key moves the keyboard focus.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -7293,7 +7293,7 @@ gtk_text_view_ensure_layout (GtkTextView *text_view)
  * The return value is a copy owned by the caller of this function,
  * and should be freed.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkTextAttributes
+ * Returns: a new #GtkTextAttributes
  **/
 GtkTextAttributes*
 gtk_text_view_get_default_attributes (GtkTextView *text_view)
@@ -7401,7 +7401,7 @@ gtk_text_view_reset_im_context (GtkTextView *text_view)
  * }
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the input method handled the key event.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the input method handled the key event.
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  */
@@ -9438,7 +9438,7 @@ text_window_get_height (GtkTextWindow *win)
  * height is 0, and are nonexistent before the widget has been
  * realized.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GdkWindow, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GdkWindow, or %NULL
  **/
 GdkWindow*
 gtk_text_view_get_window (GtkTextView *text_view,
@@ -9506,7 +9506,7 @@ gtk_text_view_get_window (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * should be called on `event-&gt;window` to
  * see which window it was.
  *
- * Return value: the window type.
+ * Returns: the window type.
  **/
 GtkTextWindowType
 gtk_text_view_get_window_type (GtkTextView *text_view,
@@ -9955,7 +9955,7 @@ gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size (GtkTextView      *text_view,
  * Gets the width of the specified border window. See
  * gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size().
  *
- * Return value: width of window
+ * Returns: width of window
  **/
 gint
 gtk_text_view_get_border_window_size (GtkTextView       *text_view,
@@ -10230,7 +10230,7 @@ gtk_text_view_move_child (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all
  * views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_view_forward_display_line (GtkTextView *text_view,
@@ -10258,7 +10258,7 @@ gtk_text_view_forward_display_line (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all
  * views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_view_backward_display_line (GtkTextView *text_view,
@@ -10286,7 +10286,7 @@ gtk_text_view_backward_display_line (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all
  * views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_view_forward_display_line_end (GtkTextView *text_view,
@@ -10314,7 +10314,7 @@ gtk_text_view_forward_display_line_end (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all
  * views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_view_backward_display_line_start (GtkTextView *text_view,
@@ -10337,7 +10337,7 @@ gtk_text_view_backward_display_line_start (GtkTextView *text_view,
  * See gtk_text_view_forward_display_line() for an explanation of
  * display lines vs. paragraphs.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter begins a wrapped line
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter begins a wrapped line
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_view_starts_display_line (GtkTextView       *text_view,
@@ -10370,7 +10370,7 @@ gtk_text_view_starts_display_line (GtkTextView       *text_view,
  * of the current run, and there may be jumps when the cursor
  * is moved off of the end of a run.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not on the end iterator
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter moved and is not on the end iterator
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_text_view_move_visually (GtkTextView *text_view,
diff --git a/gtk/gtktogglebutton.c b/gtk/gtktogglebutton.c
index e31406af70..5080097ce9 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktogglebutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktogglebutton.c
@@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ gtk_toggle_button_set_mode (GtkToggleButton *toggle_button,
  * Retrieves whether the button is displayed as a separate indicator
  * and label. See gtk_toggle_button_set_mode().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the togglebutton is drawn as a separate indicator
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the togglebutton is drawn as a separate indicator
  *   and label.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ gtk_toggle_button_set_inconsistent (GtkToggleButton *toggle_button,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_toggle_button_set_inconsistent().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the button is displayed as inconsistent, %FALSE otherwise
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the button is displayed as inconsistent, %FALSE otherwise
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_toggle_button_get_inconsistent (GtkToggleButton *toggle_button)
diff --git a/gtk/gtktoggletoolbutton.c b/gtk/gtktoggletoolbutton.c
index bca04889e7..f7391143ea 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktoggletoolbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktoggletoolbutton.c
@@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ gtk_toggle_tool_button_sync_action_properties (GtkActivatable *activatable,
  * 
  * Returns a new #GtkToggleToolButton
  * 
- * Return value: a newly created #GtkToggleToolButton
+ * Returns: a newly created #GtkToggleToolButton
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ gtk_toggle_tool_button_new (void)
  *
  * It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
  * 
- * Return value: A new #GtkToggleToolButton
+ * Returns: A new #GtkToggleToolButton
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ gtk_toggle_tool_button_set_active (GtkToggleToolButton *button,
  * Queries a #GtkToggleToolButton and returns its current state.
  * Returns %TRUE if the toggle button is pressed in and %FALSE if it is raised.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtktoolbar.c b/gtk/gtktoolbar.c
index e71ab7f279..c4e55819a1 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktoolbar.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktoolbar.c
@@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ gtk_toolbar_class_init (GtkToolbarClass *klass)
    * number is given by the @button parameter. If the menu was popped
    * up using the keybaord, @button is -1.
    *
-   * Return value: return %TRUE if the signal was handled, %FALSE if not
+   * Returns: return %TRUE if the signal was handled, %FALSE if not
    */
   toolbar_signals[POPUP_CONTEXT_MENU] =
     g_signal_new (I_("popup-context-menu"),
@@ -479,7 +479,7 @@ gtk_toolbar_class_init (GtkToolbarClass *klass)
    * A keybinding signal used internally by GTK+. This signal can't
    * be used in application code
    *
-   * Return value: %TRUE if the signal was handled, %FALSE if not
+   * Returns: %TRUE if the signal was handled, %FALSE if not
    */
   toolbar_signals[FOCUS_HOME_OR_END] =
     g_signal_new_class_handler (I_("focus-home-or-end"),
@@ -2714,7 +2714,7 @@ gtk_toolbar_popup_menu (GtkWidget *toolbar)
  * 
  * Creates a new toolbar. 
  
- * Return Value: the newly-created toolbar.
+ * Returns: the newly-created toolbar.
  **/
 GtkWidget *
 gtk_toolbar_new (void)
@@ -2760,7 +2760,7 @@ gtk_toolbar_insert (GtkToolbar  *toolbar,
  * Returns the position of @item on the toolbar, starting from 0.
  * It is an error if @item is not a child of the toolbar.
  * 
- * Return value: the position of item on the toolbar.
+ * Returns: the position of item on the toolbar.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -2823,7 +2823,7 @@ gtk_toolbar_set_style (GtkToolbar      *toolbar,
  * Retrieves whether the toolbar has text, icons, or both . See
  * gtk_toolbar_set_style().
  
- * Return value: the current style of @toolbar
+ * Returns: the current style of @toolbar
  **/
 GtkToolbarStyle
 gtk_toolbar_get_style (GtkToolbar *toolbar)
@@ -2867,7 +2867,7 @@ gtk_toolbar_unset_style (GtkToolbar *toolbar)
  * 
  * Returns the number of items on the toolbar.
  * 
- * Return value: the number of items on the toolbar
+ * Returns: the number of items on the toolbar
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -2891,7 +2891,7 @@ gtk_toolbar_get_n_items (GtkToolbar *toolbar)
  * Returns the @n'th item on @toolbar, or %NULL if the
  * toolbar does not contain an @n'th item.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The @n'th #GtkToolItem on @toolbar,
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The @n'th #GtkToolItem on @toolbar,
  *     or %NULL if there isn’t an @n'th item.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -2927,7 +2927,7 @@ gtk_toolbar_get_nth_item (GtkToolbar *toolbar,
  *
  * Retrieves the icon size for the toolbar. See gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size().
  *
- * Return value: the current icon size for the icons on the toolbar.
+ * Returns: the current icon size for the icons on the toolbar.
  **/
 GtkIconSize
 gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size (GtkToolbar *toolbar)
@@ -2944,7 +2944,7 @@ gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size (GtkToolbar *toolbar)
  * Returns the relief style of buttons on @toolbar. See
  * gtk_button_set_relief().
  * 
- * Return value: The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
+ * Returns: The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -2999,7 +2999,7 @@ gtk_toolbar_set_show_arrow (GtkToolbar *toolbar,
  * Returns whether the toolbar has an overflow menu.
  * See gtk_toolbar_set_show_arrow().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the toolbar has an overflow menu.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the toolbar has an overflow menu.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -3024,7 +3024,7 @@ gtk_toolbar_get_show_arrow (GtkToolbar *toolbar)
  *
  * @x and @y are in @toolbar coordinates.
  * 
- * Return value: The position corresponding to the point (@x, @y) on the toolbar.
+ * Returns: The position corresponding to the point (@x, @y) on the toolbar.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtktoolbutton.c b/gtk/gtktoolbutton.c
index 0b5046f655..e5ac79272b 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktoolbutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktoolbutton.c
@@ -1081,7 +1081,7 @@ gtk_tool_button_sync_action_properties (GtkActivatable *activatable,
  *
  * It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
  * 
- * Return value: A new #GtkToolButton
+ * Returns: A new #GtkToolButton
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -1109,7 +1109,7 @@ gtk_tool_button_new_from_stock (const gchar *stock_id)
  * Creates a new %GtkToolButton using @icon_widget as contents and @label as
  * label.
  *
- * Return value: A new #GtkToolButton
+ * Returns: A new #GtkToolButton
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ gtk_tool_button_set_label (GtkToolButton *button,
  * doesn’t have a label. or uses a the label from a stock item. The returned
  * string is owned by GTK+, and must not be modified or freed.
  * 
- * Return value: The label, or %NULL
+ * Returns: The label, or %NULL
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -1230,7 +1230,7 @@ gtk_tool_button_set_use_underline (GtkToolButton *button,
  * Returns whether underscores in the label property are used as mnemonics
  * on menu items on the overflow menu. See gtk_tool_button_set_use_underline().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if underscores in the label property are used as
+ * Returns: %TRUE if underscores in the label property are used as
  * mnemonics on menu items on the overflow menu.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1281,7 +1281,7 @@ gtk_tool_button_set_stock_id (GtkToolButton *button,
  * Returns the name of the stock item. See gtk_tool_button_set_stock_id().
  * The returned string is owned by GTK+ and must not be freed or modifed.
  * 
- * Return value: the name of the stock item for @button.
+ * Returns: the name of the stock item for @button.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  *
@@ -1439,7 +1439,7 @@ gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget (GtkToolButton *button,
  * Returns the widget used as label on @button.
  * See gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The widget used as label
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The widget used as label
  *     on @button, or %NULL.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1459,7 +1459,7 @@ gtk_tool_button_get_label_widget (GtkToolButton *button)
  * Return the widget used as icon widget on @button.
  * See gtk_tool_button_set_icon_widget().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The widget used as icon
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The widget used as icon
  *     on @button, or %NULL.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
diff --git a/gtk/gtktoolitem.c b/gtk/gtktoolitem.c
index f3b2841183..4664bf8138 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktoolitem.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktoolitem.c
@@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_class_init (GtkToolItemClass *klass)
  * to invalidate the cache and ensure that the toolbar rebuilds its overflow
  * menu.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the signal was handled, %FALSE if not
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the signal was handled, %FALSE if not
  **/
   toolitem_signals[CREATE_MENU_PROXY] =
     g_signal_new (I_("create-menu-proxy"),
@@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_set_use_action_appearance (GtkToolItem *item,
  * 
  * Creates a new #GtkToolItem
  * 
- * Return value: the new #GtkToolItem
+ * Returns: the new #GtkToolItem
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_new (void)
  * #GtkToolItem should call this function to find out how text should
  * be ellipsized.
  *
- * Return value: a #PangoEllipsizeMode indicating how text in @tool_item
+ * Returns: a #PangoEllipsizeMode indicating how text in @tool_item
  * should be ellipsized.
  *
  * Since: 2.20
@@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_get_ellipsize_mode (GtkToolItem *tool_item)
  * #GtkToolItem should call this function to find out what size icons
  * they should use.
  * 
- * Return value: (type int): a #GtkIconSize indicating the icon size
+ * Returns: (type int): a #GtkIconSize indicating the icon size
  * used for @tool_item
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -747,7 +747,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_get_icon_size (GtkToolItem *tool_item)
  * #GtkToolItem should call this function to find out what size icons
  * they should use.
  * 
- * Return value: a #GtkOrientation indicating the orientation
+ * Returns: a #GtkOrientation indicating the orientation
  * used for @tool_item
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -783,7 +783,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_get_orientation (GtkToolItem *tool_item)
  * - %GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ, meaning the tool item should show
  *   both an icon and a label, arranged horizontally
  * 
- * Return value: A #GtkToolbarStyle indicating the toolbar style used
+ * Returns: A #GtkToolbarStyle indicating the toolbar style used
  * for @tool_item.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -811,7 +811,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_get_toolbar_style (GtkToolItem *tool_item)
  * of the #GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured signal to find out the
  * relief style of buttons.
  * 
- * Return value: a #GtkReliefStyle indicating the relief style used
+ * Returns: a #GtkReliefStyle indicating the relief style used
  * for @tool_item.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -838,7 +838,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_get_relief_style (GtkToolItem *tool_item)
  * #GtkToolItem should call this function to find out how text should
  * be aligned.
  * 
- * Return value: a #gfloat indicating the horizontal text alignment
+ * Returns: a #gfloat indicating the horizontal text alignment
  * used for @tool_item
  * 
  * Since: 2.20
@@ -865,7 +865,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment (GtkToolItem *tool_item)
  * #GtkToolItem should call this function to find out how text should
  * be orientated.
  *
- * Return value: a #GtkOrientation indicating the text orientation
+ * Returns: a #GtkOrientation indicating the text orientation
  * used for @tool_item
  *
  * Since: 2.20
@@ -892,7 +892,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation (GtkToolItem *tool_item)
  * Custom subclasses of #GtkToolItem should call this function
  * and use the size group for labels.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GtkSizeGroup
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GtkSizeGroup
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  */
@@ -945,7 +945,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_set_expand (GtkToolItem *tool_item,
  * Returns whether @tool_item is allocated extra space.
  * See gtk_tool_item_set_expand().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -991,7 +991,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_set_homogeneous (GtkToolItem *tool_item,
  * Returns whether @tool_item is the same size as other homogeneous
  * items. See gtk_tool_item_set_homogeneous().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the item is the same size as other homogeneous
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the item is the same size as other homogeneous
  * items.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1011,7 +1011,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_get_homogeneous (GtkToolItem *tool_item)
  * Returns whether @tool_item is considered important. See
  * gtk_tool_item_set_is_important()
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is considered important.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @tool_item is considered important.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -1147,7 +1147,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_set_use_drag_window (GtkToolItem *toolitem,
  * Returns whether @tool_item has a drag window. See
  * gtk_tool_item_set_use_drag_window().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item uses a drag window.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @tool_item uses a drag window.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -1193,7 +1193,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_set_visible_horizontal (GtkToolItem *toolitem,
  * Returns whether the @tool_item is visible on toolbars that are
  * docked horizontally.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @tool_item is visible on toolbars that are
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @tool_item is visible on toolbars that are
  * docked horizontally.
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1244,7 +1244,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_set_visible_vertical (GtkToolItem *toolitem,
  * Returns whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically.
  * See gtk_tool_item_set_visible_vertical().
  * 
- * Return value: Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
+ * Returns: Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -1264,7 +1264,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_get_visible_vertical (GtkToolItem *toolitem)
  * gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item(), ie. the #GtkMenuItem
  * that is going to appear in the overflow menu.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
  * overflow menu for @tool_item.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -1295,7 +1295,7 @@ gtk_tool_item_retrieve_proxy_menu_item (GtkToolItem *tool_item)
  * @menu_item_ids must match ensures that a #GtkToolItem
  * will not inadvertently change a menu item that they did not create.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The #GtkMenuItem passed to
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The #GtkMenuItem passed to
  *     gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item(), if the @menu_item_ids
  *     match.
  *
diff --git a/gtk/gtktoolshell.c b/gtk/gtktoolshell.c
index 7ebf18c648..bd63eddebb 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktoolshell.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktoolshell.c
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ gtk_tool_shell_real_get_ellipsize_mode (GtkToolShell *shell)
  * Retrieves the icon size for the tool shell. Tool items must not call this
  * function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_icon_size() instead.
  *
- * Return value: (type int): the current size for icons of @shell
+ * Returns: (type int): the current size for icons of @shell
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ gtk_tool_shell_get_icon_size (GtkToolShell *shell)
  * call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_orientation()
  * instead.
  *
- * Return value: the current orientation of @shell
+ * Returns: the current orientation of @shell
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ gtk_tool_shell_get_orientation (GtkToolShell *shell)
  * not call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_toolbar_style()
  * instead.
  *
- * Return value: the current style of @shell
+ * Returns: the current style of @shell
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ gtk_tool_shell_get_style (GtkToolShell *shell)
  * Returns the relief style of buttons on @shell. Tool items must not call this
  * function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_relief_style() instead.
  *
- * Return value: The relief style of buttons on @shell.
+ * Returns: The relief style of buttons on @shell.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ gtk_tool_shell_rebuild_menu (GtkToolShell *shell)
  * call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation()
  * instead.
  *
- * Return value: the current text orientation of @shell
+ * Returns: the current text orientation of @shell
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ gtk_tool_shell_get_text_orientation (GtkToolShell *shell)
  * call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment()
  * instead.
  *
- * Return value: the current text alignment of @shell
+ * Returns: the current text alignment of @shell
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ gtk_tool_shell_get_text_alignment (GtkToolShell *shell)
  * call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_ellipsize_mode()
  * instead.
  *
- * Return value: the current ellipsize mode of @shell
+ * Returns: the current ellipsize mode of @shell
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
@@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ gtk_tool_shell_get_ellipsize_mode (GtkToolShell *shell)
  * call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_size_group()
  * instead.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the current text size group of @shell
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the current text size group of @shell
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtktrashmonitor.c b/gtk/gtktrashmonitor.c
index 539e496798..06dfff66a8 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktrashmonitor.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktrashmonitor.c
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ _gtk_trash_monitor_init (GtkTrashMonitor *monitor)
 /**
  * _gtk_trash_monitor_get:
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a new reference to the singleton
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a new reference to the singleton
  * #GtkTrashMonitor object.  Be sure to call g_object_unref() on it when you are
  * done with the trash monitor.
  */
@@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ _gtk_trash_monitor_get (void)
  * _gtk_trash_monitor_get_icon:
  * @monitor: a #GtkTrashMonitor
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the #GIcon that should be used to represent
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the #GIcon that should be used to represent
  * the state of the trash folder on screen, based on whether there is trash or
  * not.
  */
@@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ _gtk_trash_monitor_get_icon (GtkTrashMonitor *monitor)
  * _gtk_trash_monitor_get_has_trash:
  * @monitor: a #GtkTrashMonitor
  *
- * Return value: #TRUE if there is trash in the trash:/// folder, or #FALSE otherwise.
+ * Returns: #TRUE if there is trash in the trash:/// folder, or #FALSE otherwise.
  */
 gboolean
 _gtk_trash_monitor_get_has_trash (GtkTrashMonitor *monitor)
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreednd.c b/gtk/gtktreednd.c
index 0e1d2efc5c..57b6240855 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreednd.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreednd.c
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ gtk_tree_drag_dest_get_type (void)
  * the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn’t implement
  * this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the row can be dragged
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the row can be dragged
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_drag_source_row_draggable (GtkTreeDragSource *drag_source,
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ gtk_tree_drag_source_row_draggable (GtkTreeDragSource *drag_source,
  * some model-specific reason. Should robustly handle a @path no
  * longer found in the model!
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the row was successfully deleted
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the row was successfully deleted
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_drag_source_drag_data_delete (GtkTreeDragSource *drag_source,
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ gtk_tree_drag_source_drag_data_delete (GtkTreeDragSource *drag_source,
  * the required type of the data.  Should robustly handle a @path no
  * longer found in the model!
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if data of the required type was provided 
+ * Returns: %TRUE if data of the required type was provided 
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_drag_source_drag_data_get    (GtkTreeDragSource *drag_source,
@@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ gtk_tree_drag_source_drag_data_get    (GtkTreeDragSource *drag_source,
  * not created for some model-specific reason.  Should robustly handle
  * a @dest no longer found in the model!
  * 
- * Return value: whether a new row was created before position @dest
+ * Returns: whether a new row was created before position @dest
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_drag_dest_drag_data_received (GtkTreeDragDest  *drag_dest,
@@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ gtk_tree_drag_dest_drag_data_received (GtkTreeDragDest  *drag_dest,
  * exist; the return value will almost certainly be %FALSE if the
  * parent of @dest_path doesn’t exist, though.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if a drop is possible before @dest_path
+ * Returns: %TRUE if a drop is possible before @dest_path
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_drag_dest_row_drop_possible (GtkTreeDragDest   *drag_dest,
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ struct _TreeRowData
  * Sets selection data of target type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW. Normally used
  * in a drag_data_get handler.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the #GtkSelectionData had the proper target type to allow us to set a tree row
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the #GtkSelectionData had the proper target type to allow us to set a tree row
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_set_row_drag_data (GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
@@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ gtk_tree_set_row_drag_data (GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
  * in from the current process. The returned path must be freed with
  * gtk_tree_path_free().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @selection_data had target type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW and
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @selection_data had target type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW and
  *  is otherwise valid
  **/
 gboolean
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreemenu.c b/gtk/gtktreemenu.c
index 67d2c5ccf0..0cbf64e8db 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreemenu.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreemenu.c
@@ -1564,7 +1564,7 @@ gtk_tree_menu_set_model_internal (GtkTreeMenu  *menu,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkTreeMenu.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkTreeMenu with no model or root.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkTreeMenu with no model or root.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1580,7 +1580,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_new (void)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkTreeMenu using @area to render its cells.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkTreeMenu with no model or root.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkTreeMenu with no model or root.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1600,7 +1600,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_new_with_area (GtkCellArea    *area)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkTreeMenu hierarchy from the provided @model and @root using @area to render its cells.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkTreeMenu.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkTreeMenu.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1643,7 +1643,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_set_model (GtkTreeMenu  *menu,
  *
  * Gets the @model currently used for the menu heirarhcy.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GtkTreeModel which is used
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GtkTreeModel which is used
  * for @menu’s hierarchy.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -1699,7 +1699,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_set_root (GtkTreeMenu *menu,
  * Gets the @root path for @menu’s hierarchy, or returns %NULL if @menu
  * has no model or is building a heirarchy for the entire model. *
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full) (allow-none): A newly created #GtkTreePath
+ * Returns: (transfer full) (allow-none): A newly created #GtkTreePath
  * pointing to the root of @menu which must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -1725,7 +1725,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_get_root (GtkTreeMenu *menu)
  *
  * Gets whether this menu is build with a leading tearoff menu item.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the menu has a tearoff item.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the menu has a tearoff item.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1777,7 +1777,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_set_tearoff (GtkTreeMenu *menu,
  * Gets the wrap width which is used to determine the number of columns
  * for @menu. If the wrap width is larger than 1, @menu is in table mode.
  *
- * Return value: the wrap width.
+ * Returns: the wrap width.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1832,7 +1832,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_set_wrap_width (GtkTreeMenu *menu,
  * The row span column contains integers which indicate how many rows
  * a menu item should span.
  *
- * Return value: the column in @menu’s model containing row span information, or -1.
+ * Returns: the column in @menu’s model containing row span information, or -1.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1888,7 +1888,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_set_row_span_column (GtkTreeMenu *menu,
  * The column span column contains integers which indicate how many columns
  * a menu item should span.
  *
- * Return value: the column in @menu’s model containing column span information, or -1.
+ * Returns: the column in @menu’s model containing column span information, or -1.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1942,7 +1942,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_set_column_span_column (GtkTreeMenu *menu,
  *
  * Gets the current #GtkTreeViewRowSeparatorFunc separator function.
  *
- * Return value: the current row separator function.
+ * Returns: the current row separator function.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1999,7 +1999,7 @@ _gtk_tree_menu_set_row_separator_func (GtkTreeMenu          *menu,
  *
  * Gets the current #GtkTreeMenuHeaderFunc header function.
  *
- * Return value: the current header function.
+ * Returns: the current header function.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreemenu.h b/gtk/gtktreemenu.h
index 674ce01e70..3040d0d4b0 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreemenu.h
+++ b/gtk/gtktreemenu.h
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ typedef struct _GtkTreeMenuPrivate       GtkTreeMenuPrivate;
  * which has children should be replicated as a header item in the
  * child menu.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter should have an activatable header menu
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter should have an activatable header menu
  * item created for it in a submenu.
  */
 typedef gboolean (*GtkTreeMenuHeaderFunc) (GtkTreeModel      *model,
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreemodel.c b/gtk/gtktreemodel.c
index 874de5fe57..6d159ef1e1 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreemodel.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreemodel.c
@@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ rows_reordered_marshal (GClosure          *closure,
  * Creates a new #GtkTreePath-struct.
  * This refers to a row.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkTreePath-struct.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkTreePath-struct.
  */
 GtkTreePath *
 gtk_tree_path_new (void)
@@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ gtk_tree_path_new (void)
  * child of that 11th child, and the 1st child of that 5th child.
  * If an invalid path string is passed in, %NULL is returned.
  *
- * Return value: A newly-created #GtkTreePath-struct, or %NULL
+ * Returns: A newly-created #GtkTreePath-struct, or %NULL
  */
 GtkTreePath *
 gtk_tree_path_new_from_string (const gchar *path)
@@ -659,7 +659,7 @@ gtk_tree_path_new_from_string (const gchar *path)
  *
  * Creates a new path with @first_index and @varargs as indices.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkTreePath-struct
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkTreePath-struct
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  */
@@ -694,7 +694,7 @@ gtk_tree_path_new_from_indices (gint first_index,
  *
  * Creates a new path with the given @indices array of @length.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkTreePath-struct
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkTreePath-struct
  *
  * Since: 3.12
  */
@@ -725,7 +725,7 @@ gtk_tree_path_new_from_indicesv (gint *indices,
  * For example, “4:10:0:3” would be an acceptable
  * return value for this string.
  *
- * Return value: A newly-allocated string.
+ * Returns: A newly-allocated string.
  *     Must be freed with g_free().
  */
 gchar *
@@ -763,7 +763,7 @@ gtk_tree_path_to_string (GtkTreePath *path)
  *
  * The string representation of this path is “0”.
  *
- * Return value: A new #GtkTreePath-struct
+ * Returns: A new #GtkTreePath-struct
  */
 GtkTreePath *
 gtk_tree_path_new_first (void)
@@ -841,7 +841,7 @@ gtk_tree_path_prepend_index (GtkTreePath *path,
  *
  * Returns the current depth of @path.
  *
- * Return value: The depth of @path
+ * Returns: The depth of @path
  */
 gint
 gtk_tree_path_get_depth (GtkTreePath *path)
@@ -862,7 +862,7 @@ gtk_tree_path_get_depth (GtkTreePath *path)
  *
  * The length of the array can be obtained with gtk_tree_path_get_depth().
  *
- * Return value: The current indices, or %NULL
+ * Returns: The current indices, or %NULL
  */
 gint *
 gtk_tree_path_get_indices (GtkTreePath *path)
@@ -884,7 +884,7 @@ gtk_tree_path_get_indices (GtkTreePath *path)
  * It also returns the number of elements in the array.
  * The array should not be freed.
  *
- * Return value: (array length=depth) (transfer none): The current
+ * Returns: (array length=depth) (transfer none): The current
  *     indices, or %NULL
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -923,7 +923,7 @@ gtk_tree_path_free (GtkTreePath *path)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkTreePath-struct as a copy of @path.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkTreePath-struct
+ * Returns: a new #GtkTreePath-struct
  */
 GtkTreePath *
 gtk_tree_path_copy (const GtkTreePath *path)
@@ -955,7 +955,7 @@ G_DEFINE_BOXED_TYPE (GtkTreePath, gtk_tree_path,
  * If @b appears before @a, then 1 is returned.
  * If the two nodes are equal, then 0 is returned.
  *
- * Return value: the relative positions of @a and @b
+ * Returns: the relative positions of @a and @b
  */
 gint
 gtk_tree_path_compare (const GtkTreePath *a,
@@ -987,7 +987,7 @@ gtk_tree_path_compare (const GtkTreePath *a,
  *
  * Returns %TRUE if @descendant is a descendant of @path.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @descendant is contained inside @path
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @descendant is contained inside @path
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_path_is_ancestor (GtkTreePath *path,
@@ -1020,7 +1020,7 @@ gtk_tree_path_is_ancestor (GtkTreePath *path,
  *
  * Returns %TRUE if @path is a descendant of @ancestor.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @ancestor contains @path somewhere below it
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @ancestor contains @path somewhere below it
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_path_is_descendant (GtkTreePath *path,
@@ -1069,7 +1069,7 @@ gtk_tree_path_next (GtkTreePath *path)
  * Moves the @path to point to the previous node at the
  * current depth, if it exists.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @path has a previous node, and
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @path has a previous node, and
  *     the move was made
  */
 gboolean
@@ -1094,7 +1094,7 @@ gtk_tree_path_prev (GtkTreePath *path)
  *
  * Moves the @path to point to its parent node, if it has a parent.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @path has a parent, and the move was made
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @path has a parent, and the move was made
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_path_up (GtkTreePath *path)
@@ -1134,7 +1134,7 @@ gtk_tree_path_down (GtkTreePath *path)
  * (`GtkTreeIter new_iter = iter;`).
  * You must free this iter with gtk_tree_iter_free().
  *
- * Return value: a newly-allocated copy of @iter
+ * Returns: a newly-allocated copy of @iter
  */
 GtkTreeIter *
 gtk_tree_iter_copy (GtkTreeIter *iter)
@@ -1179,7 +1179,7 @@ G_DEFINE_BOXED_TYPE (GtkTreeIter,  gtk_tree_iter,
  * The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
  * of the @tree_model.
  *
- * Return value: the flags supported by this interface
+ * Returns: the flags supported by this interface
  */
 GtkTreeModelFlags
 gtk_tree_model_get_flags (GtkTreeModel *tree_model)
@@ -1201,7 +1201,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_get_flags (GtkTreeModel *tree_model)
  *
  * Returns the number of columns supported by @tree_model.
  *
- * Return value: the number of columns
+ * Returns: the number of columns
  */
 gint
 gtk_tree_model_get_n_columns (GtkTreeModel *tree_model)
@@ -1222,7 +1222,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_get_n_columns (GtkTreeModel *tree_model)
  *
  * Returns the type of the column.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the type of the column
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the type of the column
  */
 GType
 gtk_tree_model_get_column_type (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
@@ -1248,7 +1248,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_get_column_type (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
  * Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path.  If @path does
  * not exist, @iter is set to an invalid iterator and %FALSE is returned.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE, if @iter was set
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if @iter was set
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_model_get_iter (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
@@ -1279,7 +1279,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_get_iter (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
  * Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path_string, if it
  * exists. Otherwise, @iter is left invalid and %FALSE is returned.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE, if @iter was set
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if @iter was set
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_model_get_iter_from_string (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
@@ -1314,7 +1314,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_get_iter_from_string (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
  * For example, “4:10:0:3” would be an acceptable
  * return value for this string.
  *
- * Return value: a newly-allocated string.
+ * Returns: a newly-allocated string.
  *     Must be freed with g_free().
  *
  * Since: 2.2
@@ -1348,7 +1348,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_get_string_from_iter (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
  * (the one at the path "0") and returns %TRUE. Returns
  * %FALSE if the tree is empty.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE, if @iter was set
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if @iter was set
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
@@ -1376,7 +1376,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
  *
  * This path should be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
  *
- * Return value: a newly-created #GtkTreePath-struct
+ * Returns: a newly-created #GtkTreePath-struct
  */
 GtkTreePath *
 gtk_tree_model_get_path (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
@@ -1433,7 +1433,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_get_value (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
  * If there is no next @iter, %FALSE is returned and @iter is set
  * to be invalid.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter has been changed to the next node
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter has been changed to the next node
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_model_iter_next (GtkTreeModel  *tree_model,
@@ -1481,7 +1481,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_iter_previous_default (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
  * If there is no previous @iter, %FALSE is returned and @iter is
  * set to be invalid.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter has been changed to the previous node
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter has been changed to the previous node
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1520,7 +1520,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_iter_previous (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
  * If @parent is %NULL returns the first node, equivalent to
  * `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE, if @child has been set to the first child
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if @child has been set to the first child
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_model_iter_children (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
@@ -1547,7 +1547,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_iter_children (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
  *
  * Returns %TRUE if @iter has children, %FALSE otherwise.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter has children
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter has children
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_model_iter_has_child (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
@@ -1574,7 +1574,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_iter_has_child (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
  * As a special case, if @iter is %NULL, then the number
  * of toplevel nodes is returned.
  *
- * Return value: the number of children of @iter
+ * Returns: the number of children of @iter
  */
 gint
 gtk_tree_model_iter_n_children (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
@@ -1605,7 +1605,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_iter_n_children (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
  * special case, if @parent is %NULL, then the @n-th root node
  * is set.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE, if @parent has an @n-th child
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if @parent has an @n-th child
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
@@ -1640,7 +1640,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
  * @child will remain a valid node after this function has been
  * called.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE, if @iter is set to the parent of @child
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if @iter is set to the parent of @child
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_model_iter_parent (GtkTreeModel *tree_model,
@@ -2277,7 +2277,7 @@ gtk_tree_row_reference_unref_path (GtkTreePath  *path,
  * propagated, and the path is updated appropriately. If
  * @path isn’t a valid path in @model, then %NULL is returned.
  *
- * Return value: a newly allocated #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+ * Returns: a newly allocated #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
  */
 GtkTreeRowReference *
 gtk_tree_row_reference_new (GtkTreeModel *model,
@@ -2324,7 +2324,7 @@ gtk_tree_row_reference_new (GtkTreeModel *model,
  * need to carefully monitor exactly when a row reference updates
  * itself, and is not generally needed by most applications.
  *
- * Return value: a newly allocated #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+ * Returns: a newly allocated #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
  */
 GtkTreeRowReference *
 gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy (GObject      *proxy,
@@ -2390,7 +2390,7 @@ gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy (GObject      *proxy,
  * Returns a path that the row reference currently points to,
  * or %NULL if the path pointed to is no longer valid.
  *
- * Return value: a current path, or %NULL
+ * Returns: a current path, or %NULL
  */
 GtkTreePath *
 gtk_tree_row_reference_get_path (GtkTreeRowReference *reference)
@@ -2412,7 +2412,7 @@ gtk_tree_row_reference_get_path (GtkTreeRowReference *reference)
  *
  * Returns the model that the row reference is monitoring.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the model
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the model
  *
  * Since: 2.8
  */
@@ -2431,7 +2431,7 @@ gtk_tree_row_reference_get_model (GtkTreeRowReference *reference)
  * Returns %TRUE if the @reference is non-%NULL and refers to
  * a current valid path.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @reference points to a valid path
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_row_reference_valid (GtkTreeRowReference *reference)
@@ -2449,7 +2449,7 @@ gtk_tree_row_reference_valid (GtkTreeRowReference *reference)
  *
  * Copies a #GtkTreeRowReference.
  *
- * Return value: a copy of @reference
+ * Returns: a copy of @reference
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreemodel.h b/gtk/gtktreemodel.h
index d702b3b5a8..9eef7c62ce 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreemodel.h
+++ b/gtk/gtktreemodel.h
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ typedef struct _GtkTreeModelIface   GtkTreeModelIface;
  * Type of the callback passed to gtk_tree_model_foreach() to
  * iterate over the rows in a tree model.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE to stop iterating, %FALSE to continue
+ * Returns: %TRUE to stop iterating, %FALSE to continue
  *
  */
 typedef gboolean (* GtkTreeModelForeachFunc) (GtkTreeModel *model, GtkTreePath *path, GtkTreeIter *iter, gpointer data);
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.c b/gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.c
index 3acd21aa04..7e4a8716ef 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreemodelfilter.c
@@ -3770,7 +3770,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_filter_set_root (GtkTreeModelFilter *filter,
  * Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child_model
  * and @root as the virtual root.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): A new #GtkTreeModel.
+ * Returns: (transfer full): A new #GtkTreeModel.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -3792,7 +3792,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_filter_new (GtkTreeModel *child_model,
  *
  * Returns a pointer to the child model of @filter.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A pointer to a #GtkTreeModel.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A pointer to a #GtkTreeModel.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -3948,7 +3948,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_filter_set_visible_column (GtkTreeModelFilter *filter,
  * row pointed at by @child_iter.  If @filter_iter was not set, %FALSE is
  * returned.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE, if @filter_iter was set, i.e. if @child_iter is a
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if @filter_iter was set, i.e. if @child_iter is a
  * valid iterator pointing to a visible row in child model.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
@@ -4130,7 +4130,7 @@ gtk_real_tree_model_filter_convert_child_path_to_path (GtkTreeModelFilter *filte
  * child model or points to a row which is not visible in @filter, then %NULL
  * is returned.
  *
- * Return value: A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
+ * Returns: A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -4173,7 +4173,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_path_to_path (GtkTreeModelFilter *filter,
  * point to the same location in the model not being filtered. If @filter_path
  * does not point to a location in the child model, %NULL is returned.
  *
- * Return value: A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
+ * Returns: A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreemodelsort.c b/gtk/gtktreemodelsort.c
index 368cbd2534..2a7de1e434 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreemodelsort.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreemodelsort.c
@@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_sort_drag_source_init (GtkTreeDragSourceIface *iface)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child model.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): A new #GtkTreeModel.
+ * Returns: (transfer full): A new #GtkTreeModel.
  */
 GtkTreeModel *
 gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model (GtkTreeModel *child_model)
@@ -2206,7 +2206,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_sort_set_model (GtkTreeModelSort *tree_model_sort,
  *
  * Returns the model the #GtkTreeModelSort is sorting.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the "child model" being sorted
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the "child model" being sorted
  **/
 GtkTreeModel *
 gtk_tree_model_sort_get_model (GtkTreeModelSort *tree_model)
@@ -2288,7 +2288,7 @@ gtk_real_tree_model_sort_convert_child_path_to_path (GtkTreeModelSort *tree_mode
  * point to the same row in the sorted model.  If @child_path isn’t a valid 
  * path on the child model, then %NULL is returned.
  * 
- * Return value: A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
+ * Returns: A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
  **/
 GtkTreePath *
 gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_child_path_to_path (GtkTreeModelSort *tree_model_sort,
@@ -2311,7 +2311,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_child_path_to_path (GtkTreeModelSort *tree_model_sor
  * the row pointed at by @child_iter.  If @sort_iter was not set, %FALSE
  * is returned.  Note: a boolean is only returned since 2.14.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE, if @sort_iter was set, i.e. if @sort_iter is a
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if @sort_iter was set, i.e. if @sort_iter is a
  * valid iterator pointer to a visible row in the child model.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -2361,7 +2361,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_child_iter_to_iter (GtkTreeModelSort *tree_model_sor
  * sorted.  If @sorted_path does not point to a location in the child model, 
  * %NULL is returned.
  * 
- * Return value: A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
+ * Returns: A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
  **/
 GtkTreePath *
 gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_path_to_child_path (GtkTreeModelSort *tree_model_sort,
@@ -2772,7 +2772,7 @@ gtk_tree_model_sort_iter_is_valid_helper (GtkTreeIter *iter,
  *
  * Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeModelSort.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreeselection.c b/gtk/gtktreeselection.c
index 99c982396c..4096489d70 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreeselection.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreeselection.c
@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ gtk_tree_selection_get_property (GObject *object,
  * Creates a new #GtkTreeSelection object.  This function should not be invoked,
  * as each #GtkTreeView will create its own #GtkTreeSelection.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkTreeSelection object.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkTreeSelection object.
  **/
 GtkTreeSelection*
 _gtk_tree_selection_new (void)
@@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ _gtk_tree_selection_new (void)
  * Creates a new #GtkTreeSelection object.  This function should not be invoked,
  * as each #GtkTreeView will create its own #GtkTreeSelection.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkTreeSelection object.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkTreeSelection object.
  **/
 GtkTreeSelection*
 _gtk_tree_selection_new_with_tree_view (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
@@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ gtk_tree_selection_set_mode (GtkTreeSelection *selection,
  * Gets the selection mode for @selection. See
  * gtk_tree_selection_set_mode().
  *
- * Return value: the current selection mode
+ * Returns: the current selection mode
  **/
 GtkSelectionMode
 gtk_tree_selection_get_mode (GtkTreeSelection *selection)
@@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ gtk_tree_selection_set_select_function (GtkTreeSelection     *selection,
  *
  * Returns the current selection function.
  *
- * Return value: The function.
+ * Returns: The function.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  **/
@@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ gtk_tree_selection_get_select_function (GtkTreeSelection *selection)
  *
  * Returns the user data for the selection function.
  *
- * Return value: The user data.
+ * Returns: The user data.
  **/
 gpointer
 gtk_tree_selection_get_user_data (GtkTreeSelection *selection)
@@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ gtk_tree_selection_get_user_data (GtkTreeSelection *selection)
  * 
  * Returns the tree view associated with @selection.
  * 
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GtkTreeView
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GtkTreeView
  **/
 GtkTreeView *
 gtk_tree_selection_get_tree_view (GtkTreeSelection *selection)
@@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ gtk_tree_selection_get_tree_view (GtkTreeSelection *selection)
  * with the current model as a convenience.  This function will not work if you
  * use @selection is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.
  *
- * Return value: TRUE, if there is a selected node.
+ * Returns: TRUE, if there is a selected node.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_selection_get_selected (GtkTreeSelection  *selection,
@@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ gtk_tree_selection_get_selected (GtkTreeSelection  *selection,
  * g_list_free_full (list, (GDestroyNotify) gtk_tree_path_free);
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkTreePath) (transfer full): A #GList containing a #GtkTreePath for each selected row.
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkTreePath) (transfer full): A #GList containing a #GtkTreePath for each selected row.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ gtk_tree_selection_count_selected_rows_helper (GtkRBTree *tree,
  *
  * Returns the number of rows that have been selected in @tree.
  *
- * Return value: The number of rows selected.
+ * Returns: The number of rows selected.
  * 
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -1019,7 +1019,7 @@ gtk_tree_selection_unselect_iter (GtkTreeSelection *selection,
  * Returns %TRUE if the row pointed to by @path is currently selected.  If @path
  * does not point to a valid location, %FALSE is returned
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @path is selected.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @path is selected.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_selection_path_is_selected (GtkTreeSelection *selection,
@@ -1059,7 +1059,7 @@ gtk_tree_selection_path_is_selected (GtkTreeSelection *selection,
  * 
  * Returns %TRUE if the row at @iter is currently selected.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE, if @iter is selected
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if @iter is selected
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_selection_iter_is_selected (GtkTreeSelection *selection,
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreesortable.c b/gtk/gtktreesortable.c
index 0736bb4c9a..1cb42741fb 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreesortable.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreesortable.c
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ gtk_tree_sortable_sort_column_changed (GtkTreeSortable *sortable)
  * %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID or 
  * %GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the sort column is not one of the special sort
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the sort column is not one of the special sort
  *   column ids.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ gtk_tree_sortable_set_default_sort_func (GtkTreeSortable        *sortable,
  * primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can 
  * go back to the default state, or not.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if the model has a default sort function
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_sortable_has_default_sort_func (GtkTreeSortable *sortable)
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreestore.c b/gtk/gtktreestore.c
index 2fbc6a6a29..1ef7a3989c 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreestore.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreestore.c
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ gtk_tree_store_init (GtkTreeStore *tree_store)
  * GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF);` will create a new #GtkTreeStore with three columns, of type
  * #gint, #gchararray, and #GdkPixbuf respectively.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkTreeStore
+ * Returns: a new #GtkTreeStore
  **/
 GtkTreeStore *
 gtk_tree_store_new (gint n_columns,
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ gtk_tree_store_new (gint n_columns,
  *
  * Non vararg creation function.  Used primarily by language bindings.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a new #GtkTreeStore
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a new #GtkTreeStore
  **/
 GtkTreeStore *
 gtk_tree_store_newv (gint   n_columns,
@@ -1196,7 +1196,7 @@ gtk_tree_store_set (GtkTreeStore *tree_store,
  * next valid row at that level, or invalidated if it previously pointed to the
  * last one.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @iter is still valid, %FALSE if not.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @iter is still valid, %FALSE if not.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_store_remove (GtkTreeStore *tree_store,
@@ -1777,7 +1777,7 @@ gtk_tree_store_append (GtkTreeStore *tree_store,
  * Returns %TRUE if @iter is an ancestor of @descendant.  That is, @iter is the
  * parent (or grandparent or great-grandparent) of @descendant.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE, if @iter is an ancestor of @descendant
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if @iter is an ancestor of @descendant
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_store_is_ancestor (GtkTreeStore *tree_store,
@@ -1801,7 +1801,7 @@ gtk_tree_store_is_ancestor (GtkTreeStore *tree_store,
  * Returns the depth of @iter.  This will be 0 for anything on the root level, 1
  * for anything down a level, etc.
  * 
- * Return value: The depth of @iter
+ * Returns: The depth of @iter
  **/
 gint
 gtk_tree_store_iter_depth (GtkTreeStore *tree_store,
@@ -1914,7 +1914,7 @@ gtk_tree_store_iter_is_valid_helper (GtkTreeIter *iter,
  *
  * Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeStore.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreeview.c b/gtk/gtktreeview.c
index 968a1bf406..953f0709d4 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreeview.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreeview.c
@@ -8249,7 +8249,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_fixed_height_mode (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  * 
  * Returns whether fixed height mode is turned on for @tree_view.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @tree_view is in fixed height mode
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @tree_view is in fixed height mode
  * 
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -11215,7 +11215,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_adjustment_changed (GtkAdjustment *adjustment,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
  **/
 GtkWidget *
 gtk_tree_view_new (void)
@@ -11229,7 +11229,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_new (void)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget with the model initialized to @model.
  *
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
  **/
 GtkWidget *
 gtk_tree_view_new_with_model (GtkTreeModel *model)
@@ -11247,7 +11247,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_new_with_model (GtkTreeModel *model)
  * Returns the model the #GtkTreeView is based on.  Returns %NULL if the
  * model is unset.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
  **/
 GtkTreeModel *
 gtk_tree_view_get_model (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
@@ -11417,7 +11417,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_model (GtkTreeView  *tree_view,
  *
  * Gets the #GtkTreeSelection associated with @tree_view.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GtkTreeSelection object.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GtkTreeSelection object.
  **/
 GtkTreeSelection *
 gtk_tree_view_get_selection (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
@@ -11433,7 +11433,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_get_selection (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
  *
  * Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the horizontal aspect.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL
  *     if none is currently being used.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use gtk_scrollable_get_hadjustment()
@@ -11509,7 +11509,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_do_set_hadjustment (GtkTreeView   *tree_view,
  *
  * Gets the #GtkAdjustment currently being used for the vertical aspect.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GtkAdjustment object, or %NULL
  *     if none is currently being used.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use gtk_scrollable_get_vadjustment()
@@ -11586,7 +11586,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_do_set_vadjustment (GtkTreeView   *tree_view,
  *
  * Returns %TRUE if the headers on the @tree_view are visible.
  *
- * Return value: Whether the headers are visible or not.
+ * Returns: Whether the headers are visible or not.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_get_headers_visible (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
@@ -11722,7 +11722,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_headers_clickable (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  *
  * Returns whether all header columns are clickable.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if all header columns are clickable, otherwise %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if all header columns are clickable, otherwise %FALSE
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -11782,7 +11782,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint (GtkTreeView  *tree_view,
  *
  * Gets the setting set by gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if rules are useful for the user of this tree
+ * Returns: %TRUE if rules are useful for the user of this tree
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_get_rules_hint (GtkTreeView  *tree_view)
@@ -11824,7 +11824,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_activate_on_single_click (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  *
  * Gets the setting set by gtk_tree_view_set_activate_on_single_click().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if row-activated will be emitted on a single click
+ * Returns: %TRUE if row-activated will be emitted on a single click
  *
  * Since: 3.8
  **/
@@ -11848,7 +11848,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_get_activate_on_single_click (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
  * mode enabled, then @column must have its “sizing” property set to be
  * GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
  *
- * Return value: The number of columns in @tree_view after appending.
+ * Returns: The number of columns in @tree_view after appending.
  **/
 gint
 gtk_tree_view_append_column (GtkTreeView       *tree_view,
@@ -11891,7 +11891,7 @@ _gtk_tree_view_reset_header_styles (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
  *
  * Removes @column from @tree_view.
  *
- * Return value: The number of columns in @tree_view after removing.
+ * Returns: The number of columns in @tree_view after removing.
  **/
 gint
 gtk_tree_view_remove_column (GtkTreeView       *tree_view,
@@ -11968,7 +11968,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_remove_column (GtkTreeView       *tree_view,
  * “fixed_height” mode enabled, then @column must have its “sizing” property
  * set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
  *
- * Return value: The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
+ * Returns: The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
  **/
 gint
 gtk_tree_view_insert_column (GtkTreeView       *tree_view,
@@ -12042,7 +12042,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_insert_column (GtkTreeView       *tree_view,
  * has “fixed_height” mode enabled, then the new column will have its sizing
  * property set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
  *
- * Return value: The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
+ * Returns: The number of columns in @tree_view after insertion.
  **/
 gint
 gtk_tree_view_insert_column_with_attributes (GtkTreeView     *tree_view,
@@ -12098,7 +12098,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_insert_column_with_attributes (GtkTreeView     *tree_view,
  * If @tree_view has “fixed_height” mode enabled, then the new column will have its
  * “sizing” property set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
  *
- * Return value: number of columns in the tree view post-insert
+ * Returns: number of columns in the tree view post-insert
  **/
 gint
 gtk_tree_view_insert_column_with_data_func  (GtkTreeView               *tree_view,
@@ -12149,7 +12149,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_get_n_columns (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
  *
  * Gets the #GtkTreeViewColumn at the given position in the #tree_view.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The #GtkTreeViewColumn, or %NULL if the
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The #GtkTreeViewColumn, or %NULL if the
  *     position is outside the range of columns.
  **/
 GtkTreeViewColumn *
@@ -12174,7 +12174,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_get_column (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  * Returns a #GList of all the #GtkTreeViewColumn s currently in @tree_view.
  * The returned list must be freed with g_list_free ().
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkTreeViewColumn) (transfer container): A list of #GtkTreeViewColumn s
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkTreeViewColumn) (transfer container): A list of #GtkTreeViewColumn s
  **/
 GList *
 gtk_tree_view_get_columns (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
@@ -12279,7 +12279,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_expander_column (GtkTreeView       *tree_view,
  * Returns the column that is the current expander column.
  * This column has the expander arrow drawn next to it.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The expander column.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The expander column.
  **/
 GtkTreeViewColumn *
 gtk_tree_view_get_expander_column (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
@@ -12748,7 +12748,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_real_expand_row (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  *
  * Opens the row so its children are visible.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the row existed and had children
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the row existed and had children
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_expand_row (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
@@ -12933,7 +12933,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_real_collapse_row (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  *
  * Collapses a row (hides its child rows, if they exist).
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the row was collapsed.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the row was collapsed.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_collapse_row (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
@@ -13020,7 +13020,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_map_expanded_rows (GtkTreeView            *tree_view,
  *
  * Returns %TRUE if the node pointed to by @path is expanded in @tree_view.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if #path is expanded.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if #path is expanded.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_row_expanded (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
@@ -13047,7 +13047,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_row_expanded (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  * Retrieves whether the user can reorder the tree via drag-and-drop. See
  * gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the tree can be reordered.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the tree can be reordered.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_get_reorderable (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
@@ -13345,7 +13345,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_cursor_on_cell (GtkTreeView       *tree_view,
  * This is used primarily to compare to `event->window`
  * to confirm that the event on @tree_view is on the right window.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): A #GdkWindow, or %NULL when @tree_view
+ * Returns: (transfer none): A #GdkWindow, or %NULL when @tree_view
  *     hasn’t been realized yet
  **/
 GdkWindow *
@@ -13384,7 +13384,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
  * GtkWidget::query-tooltip), please see
  * gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if a row exists at that coordinate.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if a row exists at that coordinate.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_get_path_at_pos (GtkTreeView        *tree_view,
@@ -14019,7 +14019,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_get_visible_range (GtkTreeView  *tree_view,
  * likewise as for gtk_tree_view_get_path_at_pos().  Please see
  * gtk_tree_view_get_path_at_pos() for more information.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the area at the given coordinates is blank,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the area at the given coordinates is blank,
  * %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -14364,7 +14364,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_get_drag_dest_row (GtkTreeView              *tree_view,
  * meaningful if @tree_view is realized.  Therefore this function will always
  * return %FALSE if @tree_view is not realized or does not have a model.
  * 
- * Return value: whether there is a row at the given position, %TRUE if this
+ * Returns: whether there is a row at the given position, %TRUE if this
  * is indeed the case.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -14463,7 +14463,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_get_dest_row_at_pos (GtkTreeView             *tree_view,
  * Creates a #cairo_surface_t representation of the row at @path.  
  * This image is used for a drag icon.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a newly-allocated surface of the drag icon.
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a newly-allocated surface of the drag icon.
  **/
 cairo_surface_t *
 gtk_tree_view_create_row_drag_icon (GtkTreeView  *tree_view,
@@ -14706,7 +14706,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_enable_search (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  * Returns whether or not the tree allows to start interactive searching 
  * by typing in text.
  *
- * Return value: whether or not to let the user search interactively
+ * Returns: whether or not to let the user search interactively
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_get_enable_search (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
@@ -14723,7 +14723,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_get_enable_search (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
  *
  * Gets the column searched on by the interactive search code.
  *
- * Return value: the column the interactive search code searches in.
+ * Returns: the column the interactive search code searches in.
  */
 gint
 gtk_tree_view_get_search_column (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
@@ -14768,7 +14768,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_search_column (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  *
  * Returns the compare function currently in use.
  *
- * Return value: the currently used compare function for the search code.
+ * Returns: the currently used compare function for the search code.
  */
 
 GtkTreeViewSearchEqualFunc
@@ -14817,7 +14817,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_search_equal_func (GtkTreeView                *tree_view,
  * entry for @tree_view.  In case the built-in entry is being used, %NULL
  * will be returned.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the entry currently in use as search entry.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the entry currently in use as search entry.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -14936,7 +14936,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_search_position_func (GtkTreeView                   *tree_view
  *
  * Returns the positioning function currently in use.
  *
- * Return value: the currently used function for positioning the search dialog.
+ * Returns: the currently used function for positioning the search dialog.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  */
@@ -15658,7 +15658,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_hover_selection (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  * 
  * Returns whether hover selection mode is turned on for @tree_view.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @tree_view is in hover selection mode
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @tree_view is in hover selection mode
  *
  * Since: 2.6 
  **/
@@ -15699,7 +15699,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_hover_expand (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  * 
  * Returns whether hover expansion mode is turned on for @tree_view.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @tree_view is in hover expansion mode
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @tree_view is in hover expansion mode
  *
  * Since: 2.6 
  **/
@@ -15742,7 +15742,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_rubber_banding (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  * selection mode is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the
  * user to select multiple rows by dragging the mouse.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if rubber banding in @tree_view is enabled.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if rubber banding in @tree_view is enabled.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -15759,7 +15759,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_get_rubber_banding (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
  * Returns whether a rubber banding operation is currently being done
  * in @tree_view.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if a rubber banding operation is currently being
+ * Returns: %TRUE if a rubber banding operation is currently being
  * done in @tree_view.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
@@ -15782,7 +15782,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_is_rubber_banding_active (GtkTreeView *tree_view)
  * 
  * Returns the current row separator function.
  * 
- * Return value: the current row separator function.
+ * Returns: the current row separator function.
  *
  * Since: 2.6
  **/
@@ -15861,7 +15861,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_state_flags_changed (GtkWidget     *widget,
  *
  * Returns which grid lines are enabled in @tree_view.
  *
- * Return value: a #GtkTreeViewGridLines value indicating which grid lines
+ * Returns: a #GtkTreeViewGridLines value indicating which grid lines
  * are enabled.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -15948,7 +15948,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_grid_lines (GtkTreeView           *tree_view,
  *
  * Returns whether or not tree lines are drawn in @tree_view.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if tree lines are drawn in @tree_view, %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if tree lines are drawn in @tree_view, %FALSE
  * otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -16068,7 +16068,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_show_expanders (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  *
  * Returns whether or not expanders are drawn in @tree_view.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if expanders are drawn in @tree_view, %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if expanders are drawn in @tree_view, %FALSE
  * otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
@@ -16110,7 +16110,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_level_indentation (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  * Returns the amount, in pixels, of extra indentation for child levels
  * in @tree_view.
  *
- * Return value: the amount of extra indentation for child levels in
+ * Returns: the amount of extra indentation for child levels in
  * @tree_view.  A return value of 0 means that this feature is disabled.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
@@ -16264,7 +16264,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell (GtkTreeView       *tree_view,
  * that row and the corresponding model.  @x and @y will always be converted
  * to be relative to @tree_view’s bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
  *
- * Return value: whether or not the given tooltip context points to a row.
+ * Returns: whether or not the given tooltip context points to a row.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -16423,7 +16423,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column (GtkTreeView *tree_view,
  * Returns the column of @tree_view’s model which is being used for
  * displaying tooltips on @tree_view’s rows.
  *
- * Return value: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+ * Returns: the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
  * used, or -1 if this is disabled.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
diff --git a/gtk/gtktreeviewcolumn.c b/gtk/gtktreeviewcolumn.c
index 58424a2f3b..0e8a94c80d 100644
--- a/gtk/gtktreeviewcolumn.c
+++ b/gtk/gtktreeviewcolumn.c
@@ -1608,7 +1608,7 @@ _gtk_tree_view_column_is_blank_at_pos (GtkTreeViewColumn *column,
  * 
  * Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn.
  * 
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkTreeViewColumn.
  **/
 GtkTreeViewColumn *
 gtk_tree_view_column_new (void)
@@ -1626,7 +1626,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_new (void)
  * 
  * Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn using @area to render its cells.
  * 
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkTreeViewColumn.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -1668,7 +1668,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_new_with_area (GtkCellArea *area)
  *  }
  * ]|
  * 
- * Return value: A newly created #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+ * Returns: A newly created #GtkTreeViewColumn.
  **/
 GtkTreeViewColumn *
 gtk_tree_view_column_new_with_attributes (const gchar     *title,
@@ -1887,7 +1887,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_spacing (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column,
  * 
  * Returns the spacing of @tree_column.
  * 
- * Return value: the spacing of @tree_column.
+ * Returns: the spacing of @tree_column.
  **/
 gint
 gtk_tree_view_column_get_spacing (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
@@ -1946,7 +1946,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_visible (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column,
  * 
  * Returns %TRUE if @tree_column is visible.
  * 
- * Return value: whether the column is visible or not.  If it is visible, then
+ * Returns: whether the column is visible or not.  If it is visible, then
  * the tree will show the column.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -1997,7 +1997,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_resizable (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column,
  * 
  * Returns %TRUE if the @tree_column can be resized by the end user.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE, if the @tree_column can be resized.
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if the @tree_column can be resized.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_column_get_resizable (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
@@ -2044,7 +2044,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_sizing (GtkTreeViewColumn       *tree_column,
  * 
  * Returns the current type of @tree_column.
  * 
- * Return value: The type of @tree_column.
+ * Returns: The type of @tree_column.
  **/
 GtkTreeViewColumnSizing
 gtk_tree_view_column_get_sizing (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
@@ -2060,7 +2060,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_get_sizing (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
  * 
  * Returns the current size of @tree_column in pixels.
  * 
- * Return value: The current width of @tree_column.
+ * Returns: The current width of @tree_column.
  **/
 gint
 gtk_tree_view_column_get_width (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
@@ -2076,7 +2076,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_get_width (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
  * 
  * Returns the current X offset of @tree_column in pixels.
  * 
- * Return value: The current X offset of @tree_column.
+ * Returns: The current X offset of @tree_column.
  *
  * Since: 3.2
  */
@@ -2223,7 +2223,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_fixed_width (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column,
  * Gets the fixed width of the column.  This may not be the actual displayed
  * width of the column; for that, use gtk_tree_view_column_get_width().
  *
- * Return value: The fixed width of the column.
+ * Returns: The fixed width of the column.
  **/
 gint
 gtk_tree_view_column_get_fixed_width (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
@@ -2285,7 +2285,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_min_width (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column,
  * Returns the minimum width in pixels of the @tree_column, or -1 if no minimum
  * width is set.
  * 
- * Return value: The minimum width of the @tree_column.
+ * Returns: The minimum width of the @tree_column.
  **/
 gint
 gtk_tree_view_column_get_min_width (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
@@ -2349,7 +2349,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_max_width (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column,
  * Returns the maximum width in pixels of the @tree_column, or -1 if no maximum
  * width is set.
  * 
- * Return value: The maximum width of the @tree_column.
+ * Returns: The maximum width of the @tree_column.
  **/
 gint
 gtk_tree_view_column_get_max_width (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
@@ -2414,7 +2414,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_title (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column,
  * 
  * Returns the title of the widget.
  * 
- * Return value: the title of the column. This string should not be
+ * Returns: the title of the column. This string should not be
  * modified or freed.
  **/
 const gchar *
@@ -2471,7 +2471,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_expand (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column,
  *
  * Returns %TRUE if the column expands to fill available space.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the column expands to fill available space.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the column expands to fill available space.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -2516,7 +2516,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_clickable (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column,
  * 
  * Returns %TRUE if the user can click on the header for the column.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if user can click the column header.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if user can click the column header.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_column_get_clickable (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
@@ -2563,7 +2563,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_widget (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column,
  * Returns the #GtkWidget in the button on the column header.
  * If a custom widget has not been set then %NULL is returned.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The #GtkWidget in the column
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The #GtkWidget in the column
  *     header, or %NULL
  **/
 GtkWidget *
@@ -2610,7 +2610,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_alignment (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column,
  * Returns the current x alignment of @tree_column.  This value can range
  * between 0.0 and 1.0.
  * 
- * Return value: The current alignent of @tree_column.
+ * Returns: The current alignent of @tree_column.
  **/
 gfloat
 gtk_tree_view_column_get_alignment (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
@@ -2655,7 +2655,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_reorderable (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column,
  * 
  * Returns %TRUE if the @tree_column can be reordered by the user.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the @tree_column can be reordered by the user.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the @tree_column can be reordered by the user.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_column_get_reorderable (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
@@ -2734,7 +2734,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_column_id (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column,
  * column is selected for sorting.
  * See gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_column_id().
  *
- * Return value: the current @sort_column_id for this column, or -1 if
+ * Returns: the current @sort_column_id for this column, or -1 if
  *               this column can’t be used for sorting.
  **/
 gint
@@ -2778,7 +2778,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator (GtkTreeViewColumn     *tree_column,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
  * 
- * Return value: whether the sort indicator arrow is displayed
+ * Returns: whether the sort indicator arrow is displayed
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_indicator  (GtkTreeViewColumn     *tree_column)
@@ -2825,7 +2825,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order      (GtkTreeViewColumn     *tree_column,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order().
  * 
- * Return value: the sort order the sort indicator is indicating
+ * Returns: the sort order the sort indicator is indicating
  **/
 GtkSortType
 gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_order      (GtkTreeViewColumn     *tree_column)
@@ -2985,7 +2985,7 @@ _gtk_tree_view_column_cell_event (GtkTreeViewColumn  *tree_column,
  * For this to be meaningful, you must first initialize the cells with
  * gtk_tree_view_column_cell_set_cell_data()
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE, if any of the cells packed into the @tree_column are currently visible
+ * Returns: %TRUE, if any of the cells packed into the @tree_column are currently visible
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_column_cell_is_visible (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
@@ -3079,7 +3079,7 @@ _gtk_tree_view_column_cell_get_dirty (GtkTreeViewColumn  *tree_column)
  * cell is not found in the column, @start_pos and @width are not changed and
  * %FALSE is returned.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if @cell belongs to @tree_column.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @cell belongs to @tree_column.
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_tree_view_column_cell_get_position (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column,
@@ -3144,7 +3144,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_queue_resize (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
  * If @column is currently not inserted in any tree view, %NULL is
  * returned.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The tree view wherein @column has
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The tree view wherein @column has
  *     been inserted if any, %NULL otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
@@ -3163,7 +3163,7 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_get_tree_view (GtkTreeViewColumn *tree_column)
  *
  * Returns the button used in the treeview column header
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The button for the column header.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The button for the column header.
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkversion.h.in b/gtk/gtkversion.h.in
index cfebc2b80c..b6b5337223 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkversion.h.in
+++ b/gtk/gtkversion.h.in
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@
  * Returns %TRUE if the version of the GTK+ header files
  * is the same as or newer than the passed-in version.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if GTK+ headers are new enough
+ * Returns: %TRUE if GTK+ headers are new enough
  */
 #define GTK_CHECK_VERSION(major,minor,micro)                          \
     (GTK_MAJOR_VERSION > (major) ||                                   \
diff --git a/gtk/gtkviewport.c b/gtk/gtkviewport.c
index 51b6e3a216..e129610bd3 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkviewport.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkviewport.c
@@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ viewport_get_view_allocation (GtkViewport   *viewport,
  *
  * Returns the horizontal adjustment of the viewport.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the horizontal adjustment of @viewport.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the horizontal adjustment of @viewport.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use gtk_scrollable_get_hadjustment()
  **/
@@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ gtk_viewport_get_hadjustment (GtkViewport *viewport)
  * 
  * Returns the vertical adjustment of the viewport.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the vertical adjustment of @viewport.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the vertical adjustment of @viewport.
  *
  * Deprecated: 3.0: Use gtk_scrollable_get_vadjustment()
  **/
@@ -613,7 +613,7 @@ gtk_viewport_set_shadow_type (GtkViewport   *viewport,
  * Gets the shadow type of the #GtkViewport. See
  * gtk_viewport_set_shadow_type().
  *
- * Return value: the shadow type 
+ * Returns: the shadow type 
  **/
 GtkShadowType
 gtk_viewport_get_shadow_type (GtkViewport *viewport)
@@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ gtk_viewport_get_shadow_type (GtkViewport *viewport)
  *
  * Gets the bin window of the #GtkViewport.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GdkWindow
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GdkWindow
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
@@ -647,7 +647,7 @@ gtk_viewport_get_bin_window (GtkViewport *viewport)
  *
  * Gets the view window of the #GtkViewport.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GdkWindow
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GdkWindow
  *
  * Since: 2.22
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkvolumebutton.c b/gtk/gtkvolumebutton.c
index 4f2d613140..ada64ae4e7 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkvolumebutton.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkvolumebutton.c
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ gtk_volume_button_init (GtkVolumeButton *button)
  * a stepping of 0.02. Volume values can be obtained and modified using
  * the functions from #GtkScaleButton.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkVolumeButton
+ * Returns: a new #GtkVolumeButton
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
diff --git a/gtk/gtkwidget.c b/gtk/gtkwidget.c
index b3b0a3bd8e..52cf13f387 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkwidget.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkwidget.c
@@ -2898,7 +2898,7 @@ G_GNUC_END_IGNORE_DEPRECATIONS
    * been already handled (not showing the default "drag operation failed"
    * animation), otherwise it returns %FALSE.
    *
-   * Return value: %TRUE if the failed drag operation has been already handled.
+   * Returns: %TRUE if the failed drag operation has been already handled.
    *
    * Since: 2.12
    */
@@ -4145,7 +4145,7 @@ gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify (GtkWidget *widget)
  * g_object_new(), but returns a widget so you don’t have to
  * cast the object yourself.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkWidget of type @widget_type
+ * Returns: a new #GtkWidget of type @widget_type
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_widget_new (GType        type,
@@ -4520,7 +4520,7 @@ gtk_widget_real_hide (GtkWidget *widget)
  * the window. By default, GTK+ destroys windows when ::delete-event
  * is received.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE
+ * Returns: %TRUE
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_widget_hide_on_delete (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -5304,7 +5304,7 @@ gtk_widget_queue_resize_no_redraw (GtkWidget *widget)
  *
  * Unrealized widgets do not have a frame clock.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GdkFrameClock (or #NULL if widget is unrealized)
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GdkFrameClock (or #NULL if widget is unrealized)
  *
  * Since: 3.8
  */
@@ -5689,7 +5689,7 @@ gtk_widget_size_allocate (GtkWidget	*widget,
  * Find the common ancestor of @widget_a and @widget_b that
  * is closest to the two widgets.
  *
- * Return value: the closest common ancestor of @widget_a and
+ * Returns: the closest common ancestor of @widget_a and
  *   @widget_b or %NULL if @widget_a and @widget_b do not
  *   share a common ancestor.
  **/
@@ -5754,7 +5754,7 @@ gtk_widget_common_ancestor (GtkWidget *widget_a,
  * operation, both widgets must be realized, and must share a common
  * toplevel.
  *
- * Return value: %FALSE if either widget was not realized, or there
+ * Returns: %FALSE if either widget was not realized, or there
  *   was no common ancestor. In this case, nothing is stored in
  *   *@dest_x and *@dest_y. Otherwise %TRUE.
  **/
@@ -6010,7 +6010,7 @@ gtk_widget_real_can_activate_accel (GtkWidget *widget,
  * that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
  * its ancestors mapped.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the accelerator can be activated.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the accelerator can be activated.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -6219,7 +6219,7 @@ gtk_widget_remove_accelerator (GtkWidget      *widget,
  * #GtkAccelGroup of a closure which can be found out with
  * gtk_accel_group_from_accel_closure().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer container) (element-type GClosure):
+ * Returns: (transfer container) (element-type GClosure):
  *     a newly allocated #GList of closures
  */
 GList*
@@ -6863,7 +6863,7 @@ gtk_widget_real_touch_event (GtkWidget     *widget,
  * use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() to invalidate a region of the
  * window.
  *
- * Return value: return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if
+ * Returns: return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if
  *               the event was handled)
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -7027,7 +7027,7 @@ gtk_cairo_transform_to_window (cairo_t   *cr,
  * To cause the redraw to be done immediately, follow that call
  * with a call to gdk_window_process_updates().
  *
- * Return value: return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if
+ * Returns: return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if
  *               the event was handled)
  **/
 gint
@@ -7240,7 +7240,7 @@ gtk_widget_event_internal (GtkWidget *widget,
  * press Enter on a widget during key navigation. If @widget isn't
  * activatable, the function returns %FALSE.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the widget was activatable
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the widget was activatable
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_widget_activate (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -7393,7 +7393,7 @@ gtk_widget_reparent (GtkWidget *widget,
  * an intersection.  @intersection may be %NULL if you’re only
  * interested in whether there was an intersection.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if there was an intersection
+ * Returns: %TRUE if there was an intersection
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_widget_intersect (GtkWidget	         *widget,
@@ -7768,7 +7768,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_can_focus (GtkWidget *widget,
  * Determines whether @widget can own the input focus. See
  * gtk_widget_set_can_focus().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -7788,7 +7788,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_can_focus (GtkWidget *widget)
  * gtk_widget_is_focus() for the difference between having the global
  * input focus, and only having the focus within a toplevel.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the widget has the global input focus.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the widget has the global input focus.
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -7814,7 +7814,7 @@ gtk_widget_has_focus (GtkWidget *widget)
  * To find out if the widget has the global input focus, use
  * gtk_widget_has_focus().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the widget should display a “focus rectangle”
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the widget should display a “focus rectangle”
  *
  * Since: 3.2
  */
@@ -7851,7 +7851,7 @@ gtk_widget_has_visible_focus (GtkWidget *widget)
  * necessarily set; #GtkWidget:has-focus will only be set if the
  * toplevel widget additionally has the global input focus.)
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the widget is the focus widget.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the widget is the focus widget.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_widget_is_focus (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -7901,7 +7901,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_can_default (GtkWidget *widget,
  * Determines whether @widget can be a default widget. See
  * gtk_widget_set_can_default().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @widget can be a default widget, %FALSE otherwise
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @widget can be a default widget, %FALSE otherwise
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -7920,7 +7920,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_can_default (GtkWidget *widget)
  * Determines whether @widget is the current default widget within its
  * toplevel. See gtk_widget_set_can_default().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @widget is the current default widget within
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @widget is the current default widget within
  *     its toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
  *
  * Since: 2.18
@@ -8017,7 +8017,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_receives_default (GtkWidget *widget,
  *
  * See gtk_widget_set_receives_default().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @widget acts as the default widget when focussed,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @widget acts as the default widget when focussed,
  *               %FALSE otherwise
  *
  * Since: 2.18
@@ -8039,7 +8039,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_receives_default (GtkWidget *widget)
  *
  * See also gtk_grab_add().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the widget is in the grab_widgets stack
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the widget is in the grab_widgets stack
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -8152,7 +8152,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_name (GtkWidget	 *widget,
  * Retrieves the name of a widget. See gtk_widget_set_name() for the
  * significance of widget names.
  *
- * Return value: name of the widget. This string is owned by GTK+ and
+ * Returns: name of the widget. This string is owned by GTK+ and
  * should not be modified or freed
  **/
 const gchar*
@@ -8440,7 +8440,7 @@ _gtk_widget_set_visible_flag (GtkWidget *widget,
  *
  * See gtk_widget_set_visible().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the widget is visible
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the widget is visible
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -8463,7 +8463,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_visible (GtkWidget *widget)
  *
  * See also gtk_widget_get_visible() and gtk_widget_set_visible()
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the widget and all its parents are visible
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the widget and all its parents are visible
  *
  * Since: 3.8
  **/
@@ -8519,7 +8519,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_has_window (GtkWidget *widget,
  * Determines whether @widget has a #GdkWindow of its own. See
  * gtk_widget_set_has_window().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @widget has a window, %FALSE otherwise
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @widget has a window, %FALSE otherwise
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -8541,7 +8541,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_has_window (GtkWidget *widget)
  * #GtkPlugs) are toplevel widgets. Toplevel widgets have no parent
  * widget.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @widget is a toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @widget is a toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -8567,7 +8567,7 @@ _gtk_widget_set_is_toplevel (GtkWidget *widget,
  * Determines whether @widget can be drawn to. A widget can be drawn
  * to if it is mapped and visible.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @widget is drawable, %FALSE otherwise
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @widget is drawable, %FALSE otherwise
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -8586,7 +8586,7 @@ gtk_widget_is_drawable (GtkWidget *widget)
  *
  * Determines whether @widget is realized.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @widget is realized, %FALSE otherwise
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @widget is realized, %FALSE otherwise
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
@@ -8625,7 +8625,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_realized (GtkWidget *widget,
  *
  * Whether the widget is mapped.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the widget is mapped, %FALSE otherwise.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the widget is mapped, %FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  */
@@ -8703,7 +8703,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_app_paintable (GtkWidget *widget,
  *
  * See gtk_widget_set_app_paintable()
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the widget is app paintable
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the widget is app paintable
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -8766,7 +8766,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_double_buffered (GtkWidget *widget,
  *
  * See gtk_widget_set_double_buffered()
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the widget is double buffered
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the widget is double buffered
  *
  * Since: 2.18
  **/
@@ -9009,7 +9009,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_parent (GtkWidget *widget,
  *
  * Returns the parent container of @widget.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the parent container of @widget, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the parent container of @widget, or %NULL
  **/
 GtkWidget *
 gtk_widget_get_parent (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -9373,7 +9373,7 @@ gtk_widget_propagate_screen_changed_recurse (GtkWidget *widget,
  * in the future if used on a widget that has a composited
  * window in its hierarchy (as set by gdk_window_set_composited()).
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the widget can rely on its alpha
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the widget can rely on its alpha
  * channel being drawn correctly.
  *
  * Since: 2.10
@@ -9669,7 +9669,7 @@ gtk_widget_peek_pango_context (GtkWidget *widget)
  * match any changes to the widget’s attributes. This can be tracked
  * by using the #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal on the widget.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #PangoContext for the widget.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #PangoContext for the widget.
  **/
 PangoContext *
 gtk_widget_get_pango_context (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -9742,7 +9742,7 @@ gtk_widget_update_pango_context (GtkWidget *widget)
  * font description, and base direction for drawing text for
  * this widget. See also gtk_widget_get_pango_context().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the new #PangoContext
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the new #PangoContext
  **/
 PangoContext *
 gtk_widget_create_pango_context (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -9783,7 +9783,7 @@ gtk_widget_create_pango_context (GtkWidget *widget)
  * This can be tracked by using the #GtkWidget::screen-changed signal
  * on the widget.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): the new #PangoLayout
+ * Returns: (transfer full): the new #PangoLayout
  **/
 PangoLayout *
 gtk_widget_create_pango_layout (GtkWidget   *widget,
@@ -9821,7 +9821,7 @@ gtk_widget_create_pango_layout (GtkWidget   *widget,
  * the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be freed
  * after use with g_object_unref().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer full): a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the
+ * Returns: (transfer full): a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the
  *     stock ID wasn’t known
  *
  * Since: 3.0
@@ -10001,7 +10001,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_child_visible (GtkWidget *widget,
  * This function is only useful for container implementations and
  * never should be called by an application.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_widget_get_child_visible (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -10042,7 +10042,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_screen_unchecked (GtkWidget *widget)
  * resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
  * free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkScreen for the toplevel for this widget.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GdkScreen for the toplevel for this widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -10079,7 +10079,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_screen (GtkWidget *widget)
  * screen, and all widgets added into a hierarchy with a toplevel
  * window at the top.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if there is a #GdkScreen associcated
+ * Returns: %TRUE if there is a #GdkScreen associcated
  *   with the widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
@@ -10165,7 +10165,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_scale_factor (GtkWidget *widget)
  * resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
  * free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkDisplay for the toplevel for this widget.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GdkDisplay for the toplevel for this widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -10190,7 +10190,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_display (GtkWidget *widget)
  * create display specific resources when a widget has been realized,
  * and you should free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the #GdkWindow root window for the toplevel for this widget.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the #GdkWindow root window for the toplevel for this widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  *
@@ -10229,7 +10229,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_root_window (GtkWidget *widget)
  * call gtk_widget_grab_focus() to place the focus accordingly;
  * if returning %FALSE, they don’t modify the current focus location.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if focus ended up inside @widget
+ * Returns: %TRUE if focus ended up inside @widget
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_widget_child_focus (GtkWidget       *widget,
@@ -10291,7 +10291,7 @@ gtk_widget_child_focus (GtkWidget       *widget,
  * entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces
  * that require entering license keys.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if stopping keyboard navigation is fine, %FALSE
+ * Returns: %TRUE if stopping keyboard navigation is fine, %FALSE
  *               if the emitting widget should try to handle the keyboard
  *               navigation attempt in its parent container(s).
  *
@@ -10634,7 +10634,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_device_enabled (GtkWidget *widget,
  * Returns whether @device can interact with @widget and its
  * children. See gtk_widget_set_device_enabled().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE is @device is enabled for @widget
+ * Returns: %TRUE is @device is enabled for @widget
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  */
@@ -10800,7 +10800,7 @@ gtk_widget_add_device_events (GtkWidget    *widget,
  *    }
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the topmost ancestor of @widget, or @widget itself
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the topmost ancestor of @widget, or @widget itself
  *    if there’s no ancestor.
  **/
 GtkWidget*
@@ -10829,7 +10829,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_toplevel (GtkWidget *widget)
  * Note that unlike gtk_widget_is_ancestor(), gtk_widget_get_ancestor()
  * considers @widget to be an ancestor of itself.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the ancestor widget, or %NULL if not found
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the ancestor widget, or %NULL if not found
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_widget_get_ancestor (GtkWidget *widget,
@@ -10882,7 +10882,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_visual (GtkWidget *widget,
  *
  * Gets the visual that will be used to render @widget.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the visual for @widget
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the visual for @widget
  **/
 GdkVisual*
 gtk_widget_get_visual (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -10925,7 +10925,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_visual (GtkWidget *widget)
  * is attached to a toplevel, since the settings object is specific
  * to a particular #GdkScreen.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the relevant #GtkSettings object
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the relevant #GtkSettings object
  */
 GtkSettings*
 gtk_widget_get_settings (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -10943,7 +10943,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_settings (GtkWidget *widget)
  * from the #GdkEventMask enumeration). These are the events that the widget
  * will receive.
  *
- * Return value: event mask for @widget
+ * Returns: event mask for @widget
  **/
 gint
 gtk_widget_get_events (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -11038,7 +11038,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_pointer (GtkWidget *widget,
  * Determines whether @widget is somewhere inside @ancestor, possibly with
  * intermediate containers.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @ancestor contains @widget as a child,
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @ancestor contains @widget as a child,
  *    grandchild, great grandchild, etc.
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -11226,7 +11226,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_direction (GtkWidget        *widget,
  * Gets the reading direction for a particular widget. See
  * gtk_widget_set_direction().
  *
- * Return value: the reading direction for the widget.
+ * Returns: the reading direction for the widget.
  **/
 GtkTextDirection
 gtk_widget_get_direction (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -11298,7 +11298,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_default_direction (GtkTextDirection dir)
  * Obtains the current default reading direction. See
  * gtk_widget_set_default_direction().
  *
- * Return value: the current default direction.
+ * Returns: the current default direction.
  **/
 GtkTextDirection
 gtk_widget_get_default_direction (void)
@@ -11766,7 +11766,7 @@ gtk_widget_real_adjust_baseline_request (GtkWidget         *widget,
  * Returns the address of the widget’s request cache (strictly for
  * internal use in gtksizerequest.c)
  *
- * Return value: the address of @widget’s size request cache.
+ * Returns: the address of @widget’s size request cache.
  **/
 gpointer
 _gtk_widget_peek_request_cache (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -11825,7 +11825,7 @@ _gtk_widget_set_device_window (GtkWidget *widget,
  * @widget: a #GtkWidget
  * @device: a #GdkDevice
  *
- * Return value: the device window set on @widget, or %NULL
+ * Returns: the device window set on @widget, or %NULL
  */
 GdkWindow *
 _gtk_widget_get_device_window (GtkWidget *widget,
@@ -12223,7 +12223,7 @@ static const GtkWidgetAuxInfo default_aux_info = {
  *
  * Get the #GtkWidgetAuxInfo-struct for the widget.
  *
- * Return value: the #GtkWidgetAuxInfo-struct for the widget, or
+ * Returns: the #GtkWidgetAuxInfo-struct for the widget, or
  *    %NULL if @create is %FALSE and one doesn’t already exist.
  */
 static GtkWidgetAuxInfo *
@@ -12976,7 +12976,7 @@ gtk_widget_queue_compute_expand (GtkWidget *widget)
  * set on the widget itself, or, if none has been explicitly set,
  * the widget may expand if some of its children do.
  *
- * Return value: whether widget tree rooted here should be expanded
+ * Returns: whether widget tree rooted here should be expanded
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_widget_compute_expand (GtkWidget     *widget,
@@ -13106,7 +13106,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_expand_set (GtkWidget      *widget,
  * than computing whether the entire widget tree rooted at this widget
  * wants to expand.
  *
- * Return value: whether hexpand flag is set
+ * Returns: whether hexpand flag is set
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_widget_get_hexpand (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -13171,7 +13171,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_hexpand (GtkWidget      *widget,
  * There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here
  * for completeness and consistency.
  *
- * Return value: whether hexpand has been explicitly set
+ * Returns: whether hexpand has been explicitly set
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set (GtkWidget      *widget)
@@ -13221,7 +13221,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_hexpand_set (GtkWidget      *widget,
  *
  * See gtk_widget_get_hexpand() for more detail.
  *
- * Return value: whether vexpand flag is set
+ * Returns: whether vexpand flag is set
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_widget_get_vexpand (GtkWidget *widget)
@@ -13259,7 +13259,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_vexpand (GtkWidget      *widget,
  *
  * See gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set() for more detail.
  *
- * Return value: whether vexpand has been explicitly set
+ * Returns: whether vexpand has been explicitly set
  */
 gboolean
 gtk_widget_get_vexpand_set (GtkWidget      *widget)
@@ -14417,7 +14417,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_margin_bottom (GtkWidget *widget,
  * associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel
  * window.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the appropriate clipboard object. If no
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the appropriate clipboard object. If no
  *             clipboard already exists, a new one will
  *             be created. Once a clipboard object has
  *             been created, it is persistent for all time.
@@ -14449,7 +14449,7 @@ gtk_widget_get_clipboard (GtkWidget *widget, GdkAtom selection)
  * (GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL)` first, and then unref all the
  * widgets afterwards.
 
- * Return value: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer container): the list of
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer container): the list of
  *  mnemonic labels; free this list
  *  with g_list_free() when you are done with it.
  *
@@ -14537,7 +14537,7 @@ gtk_widget_remove_mnemonic_label (GtkWidget *widget,
  * which determines whether calls to gtk_widget_show_all()
  * will affect this widget.
  *
- * Return value: the current value of the “no-show-all” property.
+ * Returns: the current value of the “no-show-all” property.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -14664,7 +14664,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_tooltip_window (GtkWidget *widget,
  * GtkWindow created by default, or the custom tooltip window set
  * using gtk_widget_set_tooltip_window().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): The #GtkWindow of the current tooltip.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): The #GtkWindow of the current tooltip.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -14750,7 +14750,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_tooltip_text (GtkWidget   *widget,
  *
  * Gets the contents of the tooltip for @widget.
  *
- * Return value: the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
+ * Returns: the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
  *   returned string with g_free() when done.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
@@ -14798,7 +14798,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_tooltip_markup (GtkWidget   *widget,
  *
  * Gets the contents of the tooltip for @widget.
  *
- * Return value: the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
+ * Returns: the tooltip text, or %NULL. You should free the
  *   returned string with g_free() when done.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
@@ -14841,7 +14841,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_has_tooltip (GtkWidget *widget,
  * Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property.  See
  * #GtkWidget:has-tooltip for more information.
  *
- * Return value: current value of has-tooltip on @widget.
+ * Returns: current value of has-tooltip on @widget.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  */
@@ -15122,7 +15122,7 @@ gtk_widget_unregister_window (GtkWidget    *widget,
  *
  * Returns the widget’s window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): @widget’s window.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): @widget’s window.
  *
  * Since: 2.14
  */
@@ -15273,7 +15273,7 @@ gtk_widget_set_opacity  (GtkWidget *widget,
  * Fetches the requested opacity for this widget. See
  * gtk_widget_set_opacity().
  *
- * Return value: the requested opacity for this widget.
+ * Returns: the requested opacity for this widget.
  *
  * Since: 3.8
  **/
@@ -15326,7 +15326,7 @@ _gtk_widget_set_has_focus (GtkWidget *widget,
  *   gdk_event_free (event);
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: the return value from the event signal emission: %TRUE
+ * Returns: the return value from the event signal emission: %TRUE
  *   if the event was handled, and %FALSE otherwise
  *
  * Since: 2.20
diff --git a/gtk/gtkwindow.c b/gtk/gtkwindow.c
index a12e8d0c8d..64ab2b7b54 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkwindow.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkwindow.c
@@ -1845,7 +1845,7 @@ gtk_window_buildable_custom_finished (GtkBuildable  *buildable,
  *
  * To delete a #GtkWindow, call gtk_window_destroy().
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkWindow.
+ * Returns: a new #GtkWindow.
  **/
 GtkWidget*
 gtk_window_new (GtkWindowType type)
@@ -1923,7 +1923,7 @@ gtk_window_set_title (GtkWindow   *window,
  *
  * Retrieves the title of the window. See gtk_window_set_title().
  *
- * Return value: the title of the window, or %NULL if none has
+ * Returns: the title of the window, or %NULL if none has
  *    been set explicitly. The returned string is owned by the widget
  *    and must not be modified or freed.
  **/
@@ -2086,7 +2086,7 @@ gtk_window_set_startup_id (GtkWindow   *window,
  * Returns the role of the window. See gtk_window_set_role() for
  * further explanation.
  *
- * Return value: the role of the window if set, or %NULL. The
+ * Returns: the role of the window if set, or %NULL. The
  *   returned is owned by the widget and must not be modified
  *   or freed.
  **/
@@ -2434,7 +2434,7 @@ gtk_window_set_mnemonic_modifier (GtkWindow      *window,
  * Returns the mnemonic modifier for this window. See
  * gtk_window_set_mnemonic_modifier().
  *
- * Return value: the modifier mask used to activate
+ * Returns: the modifier mask used to activate
  *               mnemonics on this window.
  **/
 GdkModifierType
@@ -2491,7 +2491,7 @@ gtk_window_set_position (GtkWindow         *window,
  * 
  * Activates the current focused widget within the window.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if a widget got activated.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if a widget got activated.
  **/
 gboolean 
 gtk_window_activate_focus (GtkWindow *window)
@@ -2518,7 +2518,7 @@ gtk_window_activate_focus (GtkWindow *window)
  * is not focused then  `gtk_widget_has_focus (widget)` will
  * not be %TRUE for the widget.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the currently focused widget, or %NULL if there is none.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the currently focused widget, or %NULL if there is none.
  **/
 GtkWidget *
 gtk_window_get_focus (GtkWindow *window)
@@ -2537,7 +2537,7 @@ gtk_window_get_focus (GtkWindow *window)
  * (see gtk_widget_set_receives_default()), in which case the
  * focused widget is activated. 
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if a widget got activated.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if a widget got activated.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_window_activate_default (GtkWindow *window)
@@ -2615,7 +2615,7 @@ gtk_window_set_modal (GtkWindow *window,
  * 
  * Returns whether the window is modal. See gtk_window_set_modal().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the window is set to be modal and
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the window is set to be modal and
  *               establishes a grab when shown
  **/
 gboolean
@@ -2636,7 +2636,7 @@ gtk_window_get_modal (GtkWindow *window)
  * `g_list_foreach (result, (GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL)` first, and
  * then unref all the widgets afterwards.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer container): list of toplevel widgets
+ * Returns: (element-type GtkWidget) (transfer container): list of toplevel widgets
  **/
 GList*
 gtk_window_list_toplevels (void)
@@ -2862,7 +2862,7 @@ gtk_window_set_transient_for  (GtkWindow *window,
  * Fetches the transient parent for this window. See
  * gtk_window_set_transient_for().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the transient parent for this window, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the transient parent for this window, or %NULL
  *    if no transient parent has been set.
  **/
 GtkWindow *
@@ -2936,7 +2936,7 @@ gtk_window_set_attached_to (GtkWindow *window,
  * Fetches the attach widget for this window. See
  * gtk_window_set_attached_to().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): the widget where the window is attached,
+ * Returns: (transfer none): the widget where the window is attached,
  *   or %NULL if the window is not attached to any widget.
  *
  * Since: 3.4
@@ -2981,7 +2981,7 @@ gtk_window_set_opacity  (GtkWindow *window,
  * Fetches the requested opacity for this window. See
  * gtk_window_set_opacity().
  *
- * Return value: the requested opacity for this window.
+ * Returns: the requested opacity for this window.
  *
  * Since: 2.12
  * Deprecated: 3.8: Use gtk_widget_get_opacity instead.
@@ -3000,7 +3000,7 @@ gtk_window_get_opacity (GtkWindow *window)
  *
  * Gets the #GtkApplication associated with the window (if any).
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GtkApplication, or %NULL
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GtkApplication, or %NULL
  *
  * Since: 3.0
  **/
@@ -3113,7 +3113,7 @@ gtk_window_set_type_hint (GtkWindow           *window,
  *
  * Gets the type hint for this window. See gtk_window_set_type_hint().
  *
- * Return value: the type hint for @window.
+ * Returns: the type hint for @window.
  **/
 GdkWindowTypeHint
 gtk_window_get_type_hint (GtkWindow *window)
@@ -3161,7 +3161,7 @@ gtk_window_set_skip_taskbar_hint (GtkWindow *window,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_skip_taskbar_hint()
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if window shouldn’t be in taskbar
+ * Returns: %TRUE if window shouldn’t be in taskbar
  * 
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -3214,7 +3214,7 @@ gtk_window_set_skip_pager_hint (GtkWindow *window,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_skip_pager_hint().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if window shouldn’t be in pager
+ * Returns: %TRUE if window shouldn’t be in pager
  * 
  * Since: 2.2
  **/
@@ -3264,7 +3264,7 @@ gtk_window_set_urgency_hint (GtkWindow *window,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_urgency_hint()
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if window is urgent
+ * Returns: %TRUE if window is urgent
  * 
  * Since: 2.8
  **/
@@ -3314,7 +3314,7 @@ gtk_window_set_accept_focus (GtkWindow *window,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_accept_focus().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if window should receive the input focus
+ * Returns: %TRUE if window should receive the input focus
  * 
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -3365,7 +3365,7 @@ gtk_window_set_focus_on_map (GtkWindow *window,
  * 
  * Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_focus_on_map().
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if window should receive the input focus when
+ * Returns: %TRUE if window should receive the input focus when
  * mapped.
  * 
  * Since: 2.6
@@ -3422,7 +3422,7 @@ gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent  (GtkWindow *window,
  * Returns whether the window will be destroyed with its transient parent. See
  * gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent ().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_window_get_destroy_with_parent (GtkWindow *window)
@@ -3478,7 +3478,7 @@ gtk_window_set_hide_titlebar_when_maximized (GtkWindow *window,
  * Returns whether the window has requested to have its titlebar hidden
  * when maximized. See gtk_window_set_hide_titlebar_when_maximized ().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the window has requested to have its titlebar
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the window has requested to have its titlebar
  *               hidden when maximized
  *
  * Since: 3.4
@@ -3811,7 +3811,7 @@ gtk_window_set_decorated (GtkWindow *window,
  * Returns whether the window has been set to have decorations
  * such as a title bar via gtk_window_set_decorated().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the window has been set to have decorations
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the window has been set to have decorations
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_window_get_decorated (GtkWindow *window)
@@ -3880,7 +3880,7 @@ gtk_window_set_deletable (GtkWindow *window,
  * Returns whether the window has been set to have a close button
  * via gtk_window_set_deletable().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the window has been set to have a close button
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the window has been set to have a close button
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
@@ -4209,7 +4209,7 @@ gtk_window_set_icon_list (GtkWindow  *window,
  * The list is copied, but the reference count on each
  * member won’t be incremented.
  *
- * Return value: (element-type GdkPixbuf) (transfer container): copy of window’s icon list
+ * Returns: (element-type GdkPixbuf) (transfer container): copy of window’s icon list
  **/
 GList*
 gtk_window_get_icon_list (GtkWindow  *window)
@@ -4352,7 +4352,7 @@ gtk_window_get_icon_name (GtkWindow *window)
  * called gtk_window_set_icon_list(), gets the first icon in
  * the icon list).
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): icon for window
+ * Returns: (transfer none): icon for window
  **/
 GdkPixbuf*
 gtk_window_get_icon (GtkWindow  *window)
@@ -4605,7 +4605,7 @@ gtk_window_set_default_icon_from_file (const gchar *filename,
  * but the pixbufs in the list have not had their reference count
  * incremented.
  * 
- * Return value: (element-type GdkPixbuf) (transfer container): copy of default icon list 
+ * Returns: (element-type GdkPixbuf) (transfer container): copy of default icon list 
  **/
 GList*
 gtk_window_get_default_icon_list (void)
@@ -7549,7 +7549,7 @@ _gtk_window_query_nonaccels (GtkWindow      *window,
  * however in some cases it may be useful to call this directly when
  * overriding the standard key handling for a toplevel window.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if a widget in the focus chain handled the event.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if a widget in the focus chain handled the event.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -10464,7 +10464,7 @@ gtk_window_set_resizable (GtkWindow *window,
  *
  * Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_resizable().
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if the user can resize the window
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the user can resize the window
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_window_get_resizable (GtkWindow *window)
@@ -10515,7 +10515,7 @@ gtk_window_set_gravity (GtkWindow *window,
  *
  * Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_gravity().
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): window gravity
+ * Returns: (transfer none): window gravity
  **/
 GdkGravity
 gtk_window_get_gravity (GtkWindow *window)
@@ -10736,7 +10736,7 @@ gtk_window_check_screen (GtkWindow *window)
  *
  * Returns the #GdkScreen associated with @window.
  *
- * Return value: (transfer none): a #GdkScreen.
+ * Returns: (transfer none): a #GdkScreen.
  *
  * Since: 2.2
  */
@@ -10760,7 +10760,7 @@ gtk_window_get_screen (GtkWindow *window)
  * differently in an active window from a widget in an inactive window.
  * See gtk_window_has_toplevel_focus()
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the window part of the current active window.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the window part of the current active window.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -10780,7 +10780,7 @@ gtk_window_is_active (GtkWindow *window)
  * For real toplevel windows, this is identical to gtk_window_is_active(),
  * but for embedded windows, like #GtkPlug, the results will differ.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the input focus is within this GtkWindow
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the input focus is within this GtkWindow
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  **/
@@ -10826,7 +10826,7 @@ gtk_window_group_class_init (GtkWindowGroupClass *klass)
  * Creates a new #GtkWindowGroup object. Grabs added with
  * gtk_grab_add() only affect windows within the same #GtkWindowGroup.
  * 
- * Return value: a new #GtkWindowGroup. 
+ * Returns: a new #GtkWindowGroup. 
  **/
 GtkWindowGroup *
 gtk_window_group_new (void)
@@ -11010,7 +11010,7 @@ gtk_window_get_group (GtkWindow *window)
  *
  * Returns whether @window has an explicit window group.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if @window has an explicit window group.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if @window has an explicit window group.
  *
  * Since 2.22
  **/
@@ -11454,7 +11454,7 @@ gtk_XParseGeometry (const char   *string,
  * }
  * ]|
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if string was parsed successfully
+ * Returns: %TRUE if string was parsed successfully
  **/
 gboolean
 gtk_window_parse_geometry (GtkWindow   *window,
@@ -11695,7 +11695,7 @@ gtk_window_free_key_hash (GtkWindow *window)
  * however in some cases it may be useful to call this directly when
  * overriding the standard key handling for a toplevel window.
  *
- * Return value: %TRUE if a mnemonic or accelerator was found and activated.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if a mnemonic or accelerator was found and activated.
  *
  * Since: 2.4
  */
@@ -11961,7 +11961,7 @@ gtk_window_set_auto_startup_notification (gboolean setting)
  *
  * Gets the type of the window. See #GtkWindowType.
  *
- * Return value: the type of the window
+ * Returns: the type of the window
  *
  * Since: 2.20
  **/
diff --git a/gtk/gtkxembed.c b/gtk/gtkxembed.c
index 88a9304ea9..97d3606f8a 100644
--- a/gtk/gtkxembed.c
+++ b/gtk/gtkxembed.c
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ _gtk_xembed_set_focus_wrapped (void)
  * Gets whether the current focus sequence has wrapped around
  * to the beginning of the ultimate toplevel.
  * 
- * Return value: %TRUE if the focus sequence has wrapped around.
+ * Returns: %TRUE if the focus sequence has wrapped around.
  **/
 gboolean
 _gtk_xembed_get_focus_wrapped (void)
diff --git a/modules/printbackends/cups/gtkprintbackendcups.c b/modules/printbackends/cups/gtkprintbackendcups.c
index f9ab5d0f81..36e7f0fb78 100644
--- a/modules/printbackends/cups/gtkprintbackendcups.c
+++ b/modules/printbackends/cups/gtkprintbackendcups.c
@@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ gtk_print_backend_cups_get_type (void)
  * implements the #GtkPrintBackend interface with direct access to
  * the filesystem using Unix/Linux API calls
  *
- * Return value: the new #GtkPrintBackendCups object
+ * Returns: the new #GtkPrintBackendCups object
  */
 GtkPrintBackend *
 gtk_print_backend_cups_new (void)
diff --git a/modules/printbackends/cups/gtkprintercups.c b/modules/printbackends/cups/gtkprintercups.c
index 383bf90420..880c88b22c 100644
--- a/modules/printbackends/cups/gtkprintercups.c
+++ b/modules/printbackends/cups/gtkprintercups.c
@@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ colord_printer_details_aquired_cb (GtkPrinterCups *printer,
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkPrinterCups.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkPrinterCups
+ * Returns: a new #GtkPrinterCups
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
diff --git a/modules/printbackends/file/gtkprintbackendfile.c b/modules/printbackends/file/gtkprintbackendfile.c
index b6872421be..44c3ffbca6 100644
--- a/modules/printbackends/file/gtkprintbackendfile.c
+++ b/modules/printbackends/file/gtkprintbackendfile.c
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ gtk_print_backend_file_get_type (void)
  * implements the #GtkPrintBackend interface with direct access to
  * the filesystem using Unix/Linux API calls
  *
- * Return value: the new #GtkPrintBackendFile object
+ * Returns: the new #GtkPrintBackendFile object
  **/
 GtkPrintBackend *
 gtk_print_backend_file_new (void)
diff --git a/modules/printbackends/lpr/gtkprintbackendlpr.c b/modules/printbackends/lpr/gtkprintbackendlpr.c
index 29e415244b..4257771dbf 100644
--- a/modules/printbackends/lpr/gtkprintbackendlpr.c
+++ b/modules/printbackends/lpr/gtkprintbackendlpr.c
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ gtk_print_backend_lpr_get_type (void)
  * implements the #GtkPrintBackend interface with direct access to
  * the filesystem using Unix/Linux API calls
  *
- * Return value: the new #GtkPrintBackendLpr object
+ * Returns: the new #GtkPrintBackendLpr object
  **/
 GtkPrintBackend *
 gtk_print_backend_lpr_new (void)
diff --git a/modules/printbackends/papi/gtkprintbackendpapi.c b/modules/printbackends/papi/gtkprintbackendpapi.c
index 001c57e56c..d3aa729739 100644
--- a/modules/printbackends/papi/gtkprintbackendpapi.c
+++ b/modules/printbackends/papi/gtkprintbackendpapi.c
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ gtk_print_backend_papi_get_type (void)
  * implements the #GtkPrintBackend interface with direct access to
  * the filesystem using Unix/Linux API calls
  *
- * Return value: the new #GtkPrintBackendPapi object
+ * Returns: the new #GtkPrintBackendPapi object
  **/
 GtkPrintBackend *
 gtk_print_backend_papi_new (void)
diff --git a/modules/printbackends/papi/gtkprinterpapi.c b/modules/printbackends/papi/gtkprinterpapi.c
index 816bce0867..72e0719ff4 100644
--- a/modules/printbackends/papi/gtkprinterpapi.c
+++ b/modules/printbackends/papi/gtkprinterpapi.c
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ gtk_printer_papi_finalize (GObject *object)
  *
  * Creates a new #GtkPrinterPapi.
  *
- * Return value: a new #GtkPrinterPapi
+ * Returns: a new #GtkPrinterPapi
  *
  * Since: 2.10
  **/
diff --git a/modules/printbackends/test/gtkprintbackendtest.c b/modules/printbackends/test/gtkprintbackendtest.c
index b51fedf152..f379d1a2d5 100644
--- a/modules/printbackends/test/gtkprintbackendtest.c
+++ b/modules/printbackends/test/gtkprintbackendtest.c
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ gtk_print_backend_test_get_type (void)
  * implements the #GtkPrintBackend interface with direct access to
  * the testsystem using Unix/Linux API calls
  *
- * Return value: the new #GtkPrintBackendTest object
+ * Returns: the new #GtkPrintBackendTest object
  **/
 GtkPrintBackend *
 gtk_print_backend_test_new (void)